Skip to main content

Full text of "Children's stories in America history"

See other formats


•i       S3.*  ^   "^^    ^^^     -a.*  »    ^ 


0 


%.*^ 


-A*^ 


\<^^  - 


'%^*^    ->    -      :=     ^<^ 


"^AO^ 


^  9^ 


^AO^ 


... 


<0-    Q<s       = 


^¥^'       ^ 


,r    ^ 


o  ~-(/> 


tP 


c3>  A. 


^  ./■  -^ 


^^i^^%      c^o::;^.V     ^^:^^.% 


^Q.     : 


>^^^  =^}w:^./ 


^^m^^ 


cv^' 


CK     ^  0  ,  .  -^      x^ 


-^A 

H 


^^ 


^"^  ^ii:-'^  "^^      cp^v^^;!:^''^. 


t.0 

5<v 


^^o^      J 


<j>  -^ 


?-  -3       C^.  *  ^<>(" 


^    ^       ^-'^^^^^^SJ.?^ 


.c.G^^    ^.^:^ 


^^•:^4^.%      ^^^^^Sp      cf^-Ai:;'^% 


.^^  °^  "^ 


^ 

-^^ 


>..r^„=.:^«^^^^ 


r 


"-e. 


cP 


■lyitii 


^c)^    j^^ii^  %  '"^0* 


^/.O^ 


-^^ 


;^ 


CHILDREN'S  STORIES 


AMERICAN    HISTORY 


A    MA  MM  IT  II    HUNT. 


CHILDREN'S  Stories 


IN 


American  History 


BY 

Henrietta  Christian  Wright 


Illustrated  by  J.   Steeple  Davis 


NEW  YORK 

CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 

1885 


•uh5 


Copyright,  1885,  by 
CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 


TROW'8 

PRINTING  AND  BOOKBINDINQ  COMPANV, 

NEW  YORK. 


(,9^ 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER   I. 

PAGE 

Ancient  America, i 

CHAPTER   H. 
The  Mound-Builders, 5 

CHAPTER  HI. 
The  Red  Men, 14 

CHAPTER  IV. 
The  Northmen, 27 

CHAPTER  V. 
Columbus  and  the  Discovery  of  America,      ,       .    38 

CHAPTER   VI. 
The  Cabots, '  .  61 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Amkiicus  Vespucius, 65 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Ponce  de  Leon, 71 


VI  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  IX.  PAGE 

Vasco   Nunez  de  Balboa,  the  Discoverer  of  the 

Pacific  Ocean, 76 

CHAPTER  X. 
Cabeca  de  Vaca, 85 

CHAPTER  XI. 
Hernando  Cortez  and  the  Conquest  of  Mexico,  .  103 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Pizarro  and  the  Conquest  of  Peru,         .       .       .114 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Ferdinand  de  Soto,  the  Discoverer  of  the  Missis- 
sippi,          172 

CHAPTER   XIV. 
Verrazano, 199 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Jacques  Cartier, 210 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
The  Huguenots, 228 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Sir  Walter  Raleigh, 254 


CONTENTS.  vii 

CHAPTER    XVIII.  PAGE 

The  Story  of  Pocahontas,  the  Indian  Princess,  .  259 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Settlement  of  Maine,  and  Discovery  of  Lake 

Champlain, 269 

CHAPTER   XX. 
Henry  Hudson  and  the  Knickerbockers,        .        .  292 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

The  Pilgrims  and   the   Settlement  of  New  Eng- 
land,  300 

CHAPTER   XXII. 
La  Salle, 316 

CHAPTER   XXIII. 
The  Story  of  Acadia, 331 

CHAPTER   XXIV. 
The  Story  of  Pontiac, 337 

CHAPTER   XXV. 
The  Revolution, 348 


LIST  OF   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


A  Mammoth  Hunt, Frontispiece. 

FACING  PAGE 

The  Teaching  of  an  Indian  Child,    .        .        .        .14 

Young  Columbus, 38 

Vespucius  Landing  to  Chastise  the  Cannibals,  .  65 
Balboa  in  Search  of  the  Unknown  Sea,  .       .    79 

The  Messengers  of  Montezuma,         .        .        .       .103 

De  Soto, 172 

Jacques    Cartier    finds    Newfoundland    Inhospi- 
table,        210 

Smith  Saved  by  Pocahontas, 259 

The  Half-Moon  in  the  Hudson,  ....  292 
The  Driving  out  of  the  Acadians,  .  .  .  .331 
The  Story  of  Pontiac's  Plot, 337 


CHAPTER  I. 

ANCIENT    AMERICA. 

Many  ao-es  aeo  in  North  America  there  was 
no  spring  or  summer  or  autumn,  but  only  winter 
all  the  time ;  there  were  no  forests  or  fields  or 
flowers,  but  only  ice  and  snow,  which  stretched 
from  the  Arctic  Ocean  to  Maryland.  Some- 
times the  climate  would  grow  a  little  warmer, 
and  then  the  great  glaciers  would  shrink  toward 
the  north,  and  then  again  it  would  grow  cold, 
while  the  ice  crept  southward ;  but  finally  it  be- 
came warmer  and  warmer  until  all  the  southern 
part  of  the  country  was  quite  free  from  the  ice 
and  snow,  which  could  then  only  be  seen,  as  it 
is  now,  in  the  Polar  regions. 

Apfes  and  ag-es  after  this,  grass  and  trees  be- 
gan  to  appear,  and  at  last  great  forests  covered 
the  land,  and  over  the  fields  and  through  the 
woods  gigantic  animals  roved — strange  and 
terrible-looking  beasts,  larger  than  any  animal 


ANCIENT   AMERICA. 


now  living,  and  very  fierce  and  strong.  Among 
these  were  the  mammoth  and  mastodon,  which 
were  so  strong  and  ferocious  that  it  would  take 
hundreds  of  men  to  hunt  and  kill  them.  These 
great  animals  would  go  trampling  through  the 
forests,  breaking  down  the  trees  and  crushing 
the  grass  and  flowers  under  their  feet,  or  rush 
over  the  fields  in  pursuit  of  their  prey,  making 
such  dreadful,  threatening  noises  that  all  the 
other  animals  would  flee  before  them,  just  as 
now  the  more  timid  animals  flee  from  the  lion 
or  rhinoceros.  Sometimes  they  would  rush  or 
be  driven  by  men  into  swamps  and  marshes, 
where  their  great  weight  would  sink  them 
down  so  deep  into  the  mud  that  they  could  not 
lift  themselves  out  again,  and  then,  they  would 
die  of  starvation  or  be  killed  by  the  arrows  of 
the  men  who  were  hunting  them. 

Besides  these  mammoths  and  mastodons 
there  were  other  animals  living  in  North  Amer- 
ica at  that  time,  very  different  from  those  that 
are  found  here  now. 

These  were  the  rhinoceros,  as  large  as  the 
elephant  of  to-day,  five  different  kinds  of  camels, 


ANCIENT   AMERICA. 


thirty  different  kinds  of  horses,  some  of  which 
had  three  toes,  and  some  four,  on  each  foot  ; 
and  then  there  were  a  great  many  smaller  ani- 
mals which  we  no  longer  find  here.  Monkeys 
swung  in  the  branches  of  the  trees,  just  as  they 
do  now  in  other  parts  of  the  world,  and  great, 
strange  birds  went  flying  through  the  air  and 
built  their  nests  in  the  trees  which,  ages  ago, 
crumbled  away  to  dust. 

But  at  last  all  these  curious  animals  vanished 
from  the  forests  of  North  America — all,  that  is, 
except  the  reindeer,  which  is  still  found  in  the 
far  north — and  the  only  reason  we  have  for 
knowing  that  they  really  lived  here  is  that  their 
bones  have  been  found  in  the  soil. 

Among  mountains  far  from  the  sea  are  often 
found  the  shells  of  sea-animals,  and  the  imprints 
of  fishes  in  the  rocks,  and  so  we  know  those 
animals  must  once  have  lived  there,  and  in  the 
same  way  when  the  bones  of  the  mammoth  and 
mastodon,  and  camel  and  rhinoceros,  are  found, 
we  also  know  that  they  must  have  lived  here 
too,  although  it  was  so  long  ago  that  nobody 
knows  very  much  about  it. 


ANCIENT   AMERICA. 


Among  these  bones  have  been  found  human 
bones  also,  and  tools,  and  arrow-heads  of  flint ; 
so  it  is  supposed  that  there  was  a  race  of  peo- 
ple living  in  North  America  at  the  same  time. 
But  who  these  people  were,  or  where  they  came 
from,  or  whither  they  went,  we  shall  probably 
never  know,  for  they  have  vanished  as  utterly 
from  the  New  World  as  have  the  fairies  and 
nymphs  and  giants  from  the  Old  World,  and  will 
always  remain  a  mystery. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE    MOUND-BUILDERS. 

About  two  thousand  years  ago  there  lived  a 
very  curious  people  in  North  America  known  as 
the  Mound-builders.  Where  they  came  from 
no  one  knows,  but  it  is  supposed  that  they  were 
either  descendants  of  people  from  Japan,  who 
had  been  driven  across  the  Pacific  by  storms, 
and  washed  on  the  western  coast  of  America,  or 
that  they  originally  came  from  Asia  by  the  way 
of  Behring  Strait.  Many  people  suppose  them 
to  have  been  the  descendants  of  the  Shepherd 
Kings,  who  journeyed  from  Central  India  to 
Egypt  about  the  time  of  the  building  of  the 
Tower  of  Babel ;  they  were  called  the  Shepherd 
Kings  because  they  were  shepherds,  and  came 
down  into  Egypt  driving  their  flocks  before 
them.  Here  they  conquered  the  country  and 
made  themselves  kings ;  they  built  many  won- 
derful temples,  and  founded  Hehopolis,  the  City 


THE   MOUND-BUILDERS. 


of  the  Sun,  in  honor  to  their  great  god,  the 
Sun,  whom  they  worshipped,  under  the  name  of 
Osiris ;  Isis,  the  moon,  being  their  chief  god- 
dess. It  was  supposed  that  Osiris  dwelt  in  the 
body  of  the  sacred  bull  Apis,  and  therefore  this 
bull  was  adored  as  a  god.  He  lived  in  a  splen- 
did temple,  the  walls  of  which  shone  with  gold 
and  silver,  and  sparkled  with  gems  and  precious 
stones  brought  from  India  and  Ethiopia ;  it  was 
the  duty  of  the  priests  to  wait  upon  him  with 
the  greatest  care,  and  he  was  always  fed  from 
golden  dishes.  At  the  time  of  the  rising  of  the 
Nile  there  was  always  a  festival  to  Apis,  when 
he  was  displayed  to  the  people  covered  with 
the  richest  and  finest  embroidered  cloths,  and 
surrounded  by  troops  of  boys  singing  songs 
to  him.  If  he  lived  twenty-five  years  he  was 
drowned  in  a  sacred  fountain,  but  if  he  died  be- 
fore that  time  all  Egypt  went  into  mourning, 
which  continued  until  a  new  Apis  was  found. 
The  successor  must  be  a  perfectly  black '  calf, 
with  a  square  white  spot  on  the  forehead,  the 
figure  of  an  eagle  upon  the  back,  a  crescent  on 
the  side,  and  a  beetle  on  the  tongue.'  Of  course 


THE   MOUND-BUILDERS. 


these  marks  were  made  by  the  priests,  but  the 
people  did  not  know  that,  and  supposed  that  the 
soul  of  Apis  had  passed  into  this  calf,  which 
they  received  with  great  joy. 

The  Egyptians  worshipped  many  other  ani- 
mals besides  the  sacred  bull;  the  dog,  wolf, 
hawk,  crocodile,  and  cat  were  all  considered 
gods,  and  any  one  who  might  kill  one  of  these  ani- 
mals, even  by  accident,  was  punished  with  death. 
When  a  cat  died  every  one  in  the  family  cut  off 
his  eyebrows,  and  when  a  dog  died  the  whole 
head  was  shaven.  And  if  on  their  journeys  the 
Egyptians  found  the  dead  body  of  a  cat  or  dog, 
they  always  brought  it  home  and  embalmed  it 
with  great  care.  The  reason  why  the  Egyp- 
tians reverenced  these  animals  was,  that  they 
believed  that  the  soul  of  man,  after  his  death, 
passed  into  the  bodies  of  different  animals,  and 
that  after  three  thousand  years  it  would  return 
and  inhabit  a  human  form  again,  so,  of  course, 
they  did  not  look  upon  a  cat  or  dog  as  we  do, 
merely  as  an  animal  to  be  petted  or  used,  but 
they  thought  that  in  this  animal  dwelt  the  soul  of 
some  human  beino-,  and  hence  it  was  sacred  to 


THE   MOUND-BUILDERS. 


them.  One  of  the  great  gods  of  Egypt  was 
the  River  Nile ;  and  no  wonder  that  they  wor- 
shipped it,  as  it  was  to  them  the  means  of  Hfe. 
It  never  rains  in  Egypt,  and  the  land  would  be 
like  a  desert  were  it  not  for  the  overflowing  of 
the  Nile.  Once  a  year  this  great  river,  swollen 
by  the  waters  that  have  poured  into  it  from  the 
lake  country  above,  overflows  its  banks,  water- 
ing the  country  on  either  side  of  it,  and  leaving, 
when  it  recedes,  a  deposit  of  rich  mud  upon  the 
land;  then  the  people  sow  and  plant,  sure  of  a 
good  harvest.  Up  and  down  the  Nile  Valley 
extends  a  chain  of  rocky  mountains,  and  these 
the  Egyptians  used  as  places  of  burial.  The 
tombs,  or  catacombs,  as  they  are  called,  are 
ornamented  with  pictures  and  sculptures  which 
may  be  seen  to  this  day.  The  subjects  of 
these  paintings  were  always  taken  from  life. 
People  were  represented  planting,  sowing,  and 
reaping,  spinning,  weaving,  sewing,  washing, 
dressing,  and  playing.  Even  the  games  of  chil- 
dren were  shown  in  these  tombs,  and  the  balls 
and  dolls  and  toys  with  which  they  played. 
Would  you  not  feel  strange  to   stand  in    one 


THE   MOUND-BUILDERS. 


of  these  catacombs  and  see  the  figure  of  a  doll 
carved  in  the  rock,  and  to  know  that  it  is  the 
tomb  of  some  little  Egyptian  girl  who  died 
three  thousand  years  ago  ?  The  games  which 
children  play  to-day  are  not  new,  and  when 
you  have  a  game  of  ball  or  top  or  leap-frog, 
when  you  play  with  your  dolls,  or  sit  down  and 
tell  each  other  fairy  stories,  you  are  only  do- 
ing the  same  thing  that  the  little  Egyptian  and 
Grecian  boys  and  girls  did  thousands  of  years 
ago  ;  it  makes  them  seem  like  real  children  to 
think  that,  doesn't  it  ? 

But  different  as  the  Egyptian  religion  was 
from  ours,  there  was  one  thing  which  they  be- 
lieved which  we  also  believe  in,  the  resurrection 
of  the  dead ;  and  as  to-day  we  symbolize  this 
belief  by  pictures  of  the  lily,  the  egg,  the  butter- 
fly, and  other  objects,  so  the  Egyptians  used 
the  lotus,  which  bloomed  on  the  waves  of  the 
Nile,  opening  every  morning  and  closing  every 
night,  as  the  symbol  of  the  resurrection,  and  we 
find  this  flower,  carved  in  stone,  used  as  an 
ornament  all  throughout  Egypt. 

Of  all  the  works  of  the  ancient  Egyptians, 


10  THE   MOUND-BUILDERS. 

the  greatest  are  the  pyramids,  the  tombs  of  the 
kings  ;  these  were  mostly  built  during  the  reigns 
of  the  Shepherd  Kings. 

After  a  long  time,  perhaps  five  or  six  hun- 
dred years,  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  Egypt 
drove  out  the  Shepherd  Kings.  It  is  supposed 
then  that  they  crossed  back  to  Asia,  wandering 
through  that  country  from  the  south  to  the 
north,  spending  some  time  in  Siberia,  where 
they  built  mounds  like  those  in  our  own  coun- 
try, then  crossing  Behring  Strait  they  reached 
North  America,  wandered  down  the  Mississippi 
Valley,  building  mounds  and  temples,  journeyed 
through  Mexico,  where  are  found  some  of  the 
most  remarkable  of  these  remains,  and  so  on 
across  the  Isthmus  of  Panama  into  Peru,  where 
at  the  time  of  the  conquest  of  that  country  by 
the  Spaniards  the  sun  and  moon  were  wor- 
shipped as  gods,  just  as  had  been  done  in  Egypt 
thousands  of  years  before,  and  where  was  found 
a  magnificent  temple  of  the  sun,  the  inside  walls 
of  which  were  covered  almost  entirely  of  gold. 
So  you  see  the  reason  why  it  is  thought  that 
perhaps  the  mound-builders  were  descendants 


THE   MOUND-BUILDERS.  II 

of  the  Shepherd  Kings  is  that  these  mounds  and 
temples  are  Hke  those  found  in  the  old  world. 
In  Mexico  and  Peru  all  the  great  buildings  were 
made  in  the  pyramidal  form,  while,  as  I  have 
said,  in  Siberia  have  been  found  mounds  like 
those  in  the  United  States. 

Some  of  the  most  curious  of  these  mounds 
are  found  in  the  State  of  Ohio.  One,  in  the 
form  of  a  serpent,  with  the  tail  ending  in  a  triple 
coil,  is  very  curious.  It  is  about  a  thousand  feet 
lonof  and  extends  alono-  a  bluff  which  rises  above 
Brush  Creek,  in  Adams  County,  Ohio.  The 
neck  of  the  serpent  is  stretched  out  and  slightly 
curved  over,  and  in  its  mouth  is  another  mound 
in  the  form  of  an  egg. 

Many  of  these  mounds,  from  their  shapes,  it 
is  thought,  were  used  for  fortifications,  and  some- 
times they  are  at  regular  spaces  apart,  which 
shows  they  may  have  been  used  for  sending 
signals  across  the  country.  They  were  made 
almost  entirely  of  earth,  but  sometimes  brick 
and  stone  were  used.  Sometimes  they  were 
built  very  high,  and  on  the  tops  of  these  high- 
est mounds  have  been  found  pieces  of  burned 


12  THE   MOUND-BUILDERS. 

wood,  showing  that  they  were  probably  used  as 
places  of  worship,  and  that  the  priests  offered 
up  burnt-offerings  and  sacrifices  there.  The 
mounds  are  sometimes  in  the  form  of  animals 
and  men.  In  those  that  were  used  as  places  of 
worship  human  bones  have  been  found,  and 
with  them  many  things  which  show  that  the 
Mound-builders  must  have  known  some  of  the 
arts  which  the  tribes  who  lived  in  America  at 
the  time  of  its  discovery  by  the  Europeans  knew 
nothing  of;  among  these  things  are  carvings 
in  stone,  pottery,  articles  of  ornament  in  metal, 
silver  and  copper  tools,  such  as  axes,  chisels, 
and  knives,  beside  beads,  bracelets,  carved  pipes, 
models  in  clay  of  birds,  quadrupeds,  and  human 
faces,  etc. 

Is  it  not  strange  to  think  of  this  race  of  peo- 
ple who  lived  here  in  our  own  America  so  many 
years  ago  ?  We  would  like  to  know  how  they 
lived,  what  they  looked  like,  and  what  language 
they  spoke,  but  we  cannot  even  guess.  We 
only  know  that  ages  after  the  time  of  the  Mam- 
moth and  Mastodon,  this  curious  race,  coming 
doubtless  from  the  East,  entered  the  Mississippi 


THE   MOUND-BUILDERS.  1 3 

Valley;  that  they  settled  there  and  built  those 
wonderful  mounds  at  least  two  thousand  years 
ago,  if  not  longer ;  that  finally  they  disappeared, 
and  we  should  never  have  known  of  them  but 
for  the  works  they  have  left. 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE    RED    MEN. 

When  America  was  first  discovered  by  the 
whites,  all  the  country  along  the  Atlantic  coast 
fi'om  Maine  to  Florida  was  peopled  by  a  dark- 
skinned  people  different  from  any  known  to 
Europeans.  They  were  tall,  with  black  or  ha- 
zel eyes,  and  straight,  black  hair.  Some  of 
them  were  mild  and  friendly  toward  the  whites, 
but  others  were  very  warlike  and  hated  the 
white  men  for  coming  to  live  in  their  own  wood- 
land homes.  They  never  lived  very  long  in  one 
place,  but  roamed  about  here  and  there,  living 
'by  hunting,  fishing,  and  sometimes  planting 
corn,  beans,  pumpkins,  etc.  Their  houses,  or 
wigwams,  as  they  called  them,  were  made  of 
bark,  or  skins,  or  matting,  stretched  on  poles 
driven  in  the  ground,  and  an  Indian  village  was 
simply  a  great  many  tents  in  one  spot,  in  the 
largest  of  which  the  chief  always  lived.     These 


THE  TEACHING  OF   AN   INDIAN  CHILD. 


THE   RED    MEN.  1 5 


little  villages  were  nothing  like  those  which  you 
would  see  now,  scattered  up  and  down  the  At- 
lantic coast,  where  all  kinds  of  people  live  to- 
gether ;  but  each  village  was  the  home  of  one 
particular  family  or  tribe  of  Indians,  and  it  was 
very  much  as  if  you  and  all  your  brothers  and 
sisters,  your  uncles,  aunts,  cousins,  nephews, 
nieces,  grandmothers,  grandfathers,  great-grand- 
mothers, great-grandfathers,  and  everybody  else 
who  was  the  least  bit  in  the  world  relation  to 
you,  lived  altogether  in  one  little  town  by  your- 
selves. Each  tribe  took  some  animal  for  its 
symbol,  or  totem,  as  they  called  it,  such  as  the 
turtle,  bear,  or  wolf,  and  they  believed  that  the 
spirit  of  the  animal  chosen  watched  over  them 
and  protected  them.  Like  the  ancient  Egyp- 
tians, they  believed  that  the  soul  of  man  passed 
at  his  death  into  the  body  of  some  other  man 
or  of  some  animal,  and  they  drew  signs  from  the 
flight  of  the  birds  and  the  shapes  of  the  clouds. 
They  worshipped  the  sun,  which  they  said  was 
the  symbol  of  the  Great  Spirit,  and  they  be- 
lieved that  the  moon  could  weave  charms.  They 
believed  also  that  the  wind  and  the  stars,  the 


l6  THE   RED   MEN. 


Streams  and  the  lakes,  the  great  trees  and  the 
beautiful  flowers,  all  had  spirits.  And  little  Indian 
boys  and  girls  never  went  to  school  as  you  do, 
to  learn  about  history  and  geography,  but  their 
school  was  out  in  the  shady  woods  at  their 
mother's  feet,  where  they  sat  and  listened  to  the 
beautiful  stories  of  Hiawatha,  the  son  of  the 
West  Wind,  who  had  been  sent  among  them  to 
clear  their  rivers,  forests,  and  fishing-grounds, 
and  to  teach  them  the  arts  of  peace  ;  of  his 
wife,  Minnehaha,  Laughing  Water,  who  sat  by 
the  doorway  of  her  wigwam,  plaiting  mats  of 
flags  and  rushes  when  Hiawatha  came  to  woo 
her ;  of  Minnehaha's  father,  the  old  arrow- 
maker,  who  made  arrow-heads  of  jasper  and 
chalcedony,  and  of  the  brave,  beautiful,  and 
gentle  Chibiabos,  the  best  of  all  musicians,  who 
sang  so  sweetly  that  all  the  warriors  and  wom- 
en and  children  crept  at  his  feet  to  listen,  and 
who  made  from  hollow  reeds  flutes  so  mellow 
and  musical  that  at  the  sound  the  brook  ceased 
to  murmur  in  the  woodland,  the  birds  stopped 
singing,  the  squirrel  ceased  chattering,  and  the 
rabbit  sat  up  to  listen.     And  the  bluebird  and 


THE   RED   MEN.  1/ 


robin  and  whippoorwill  begged  Chibiabos  that 
he  would  teach  them  to  sing  as  sweetly,  but 
he  could  not,  for  he  sang  of  the  things  they 
could  not  understand,  of  peace  and  love  and 
freedom  and  undying  life  in  the  Islands  of  the 
Blessed. 

And  then,  too,  the  Indian  mothers  would 
tell  their  children  the  story  of  Wabun,  the  East 
Wind,  who  brought  the  morning  to  the  earth, 
and  chased  away  the  darkness  with  his  silver 
arrows,  whose  cheeks  were  crimson  with  the 
sunrise,  and  whose  voice  awoke  the  deer  and 
the  hunter  ;  and  yet,  although  the  birds  sang  to 
him,  and  the  flowers  sent  up  their  perfume  to 
greet  him,  and  "  though  the  forests  and  rivers 
sang  and  shouted  at  his  coming,"  still  he  was 
not  happy,  for  he  was  alone  in  heaven.  But 
one  morning  while  the  villages  were  still  sleep- 
ing, and  the  fog  lay  on  the  rivers,  Wabun,  look- 
ing downward,  saw  a  beautiful  maiden  walking 
all  alone  in  a  meadow,  gathering  water- flags 
and  rushes.  And  each  day  after  that  the  first 
thing  he  saw  was  the  maiden's  eyes,  which  look- 
ed like  two  blue  lakes  among  the  rushes,  and 


THE   RED   MEN. 


he  loved  the  beautiful  maiden  and  wooed  her 
with  the  sunshine  of  his  smile,  and  whispered 
to  her  in  the  gentle  breezes  which  sang  through 
the  trees,  and  at  last  he  drew  her  to  him  and 
changed  her  to  a  star,  and  then  he  was  no  longer 
sad,  but  happy,  for  he  was  no  longer  alone  in 
heaven,  but  with  him  was  his  bride,  the  beauti- 
ful Wabun-Annung,  the  Morning  Star. 

And  then  the  story  of  Kabibonokka,  the 
North  Wind,  who  dwelt  among  the  icebergs 
and  snow-drifts  in  the  land  of  the  White  Rabbit ; 
the  North  Wind,  who  in  autumn  "  painted  all 
the  trees  with  scarlet  and  stained  the  leaves 
with  red  and  yellow,"  and  who  drove  the  birds 
down  to  the  land  of  the  South  Wind,  ere  he 
froze  the  rivers  and  lakes  and  ponds  and  sent 
the  snow-flakes  through  the  forest. 

And  the  story  of  Shawondassee,  the  South 
Wind,  who  dwelt  in  the  land  of  summer,  who 
sent  the  bluebirds  and  the  robins  and  the 
swallows  ;  and  the  smoke  from  his  pipe 

"  Filled  the  sky  with  haze  and  vapor, 
Filled  th^  air  with  dreamy  softness, 
Gave  a  twinkle  to  ^^.le  water, 


THE  RED   MEN.  19 


Touched  the  rugged  hills  with  smoothness, 
Brought  the  tender  Indian  Summer 
To  the  melancholy  north-land." 

And  the  South  Wind  had  also  his  trouble, 
for  he  loved  a  maiden  whom  he  saw  one  day- 
standing  on  the  prairies,  clothed  in  bright  green 
garments,  and  with  hair  like  sunshine  ;  but  he 
did  not  try  to  woo  the  maiden,  but  only  sighed 
and  sighed,  until  one  morning  behold  he  saw 
that  her  yellow  hair  had  grown  white,  and  the 
air  seemed  full  of  snow-flakes  which  rose  from 
the  earth  and  were  wafted  away  by  the  wind ; 
for,  after  all,  it  was  not  a  maiden  that  the  South 
Wind  had  loved,  but  only  a  prairie  dandelion, 
whose  petals  had  turned  to  down  and  floated 
away.  Do  you  not  think  these  Indian  children 
learned  pleasant  things  in  their  school  ?  There 
was  one  story  which  they  liked  very  much,  and 
which  you  may  also  hear.  It  was  the  Legend 
of  the  Red  Swan,  and  it  told  of  an  Indian  war- 
rior, who  with  his  three  brothers  went  out  to 
shoot,  and  each  one  said  that  he  would  kill  no 
other  animal  except  the  kind  he  was  used  to 
killing.    The  warrior , had  not  gone  far  before  he 


20  THE   RED    MEN. 


saw  a  bear,  which  he  shot,  although  he  should 
not  have  done  so,  as  he  was  not  in  the  habit  of 
killinof  bears.  But  as  he  was  skinnino-  the  dead 
bear,  the  air  all  around  him  turned  red,  and  he 
heard  a  strange  noise  in  the  distance  ;  he  fol- 
lowed the  noise  and  found  it  came  from  a  beau- 
tiful red  swan,  which  was  sitting  far  out  in  a 
lake,  and  whose  plumage  glittered  in  the  sun 
like  rubies,  and  although  the  Indian  warrior 
tried  very  hard  to  shoot  the  swan  with  his  magic 
arrows,  still  he  could  not  kill  it,  for  it  rose  and 
flapped  its  wings  and  flew  slowly  away  toward 
the  setting  sun. 

All  these  stories  and  many  others,  of  war 
and  hunting  and  bravery,  did  these  dusky  chil- 
dren of  the  Western  World  listen  to  eagerly. 
And  when  an  Indian  boy  wished  to  excel  his 
friends  and  become  their  leader,  he  did  not  take 
his  books  and  study  algebra  or  geometry  or 
Latin,  for  they  had  no  such  books  ;  he  did  not 
even  try  to  be  best  in  a  game  of  cricket  or  ball, 
or  to  be  a  good  oarsman,  but  he  would  train  his 
eye  so  he  could  shoot  a  bird  on  the  wing  so  far 
up  in  the  sky  that  one  could  scarcely  see  it ;  he 


THE   RED    MEN.  21 


would  train  his  muscle  so  that  he  could  fieht 
hand  to  hand  with  bears  and  wild-cats  if  need 
be  ;  he  would  learn  to  find  the  trail  of  an  enemy- 
through  the  deep  forest,  guided  only  by  the 
bent  twigs  or  broken  leaves,  and  he  would  be 
able  to  send  his  arrow  straight  through  the 
heart  of  the  deer  which  bounded  over  the  pre- 
cipices and  mountains.  And  the  little  Indian 
girls  would  learn  of  their  mothers  how  to  pre- 
pare skins  of  animals  and  make  moccasins  and 
garments  out  of  them  ;  how  to  ornament  belts 
and  leggings  with  shells  and  beads  and  feath- 
ers ;  how  to  plant  corn  and  cook  the  food.  And 
do  you  want  to  know  how  the  Indian  babies 
were  taken  care  of?  They  were  fastened  so 
tightly  in  their  queer  little  cradles  that  they 
could  not  move.  The  cradles  were  made  in 
such  a  manner  that  they  could  be  carried  on  the 
mother's  back,  or  hung  in  a  tree,  or  placed  on 
the  ground.  If  the  Indian  babies  grew  tired  of 
being  left  all  alone  in  this  way,  no  one  minded 
them ;  they  might  cry  and  cry,  but  no  one  paid 
any  attention,  for  their  mothers  believed  in  teach- 
ing them  patience  in  this  way. 


22  THE   RED   MEN. 


The  Indians  were  very  fond  of  games  ;  they 
used  to  play  ball  and  have  famous  ball  matches 
on  the  ground  in  summer  and  on  the  ice  in 
winter ;  and  then  they  had  races  and  liked  shoot- 
ing at  targets,  just  as  you  do  now.  The  game 
of  lacrosse,  which  is  played  so  much  in  Canada, 
is  an  Indian  game,  as  is  also  tobogganing  and 
snow-shoeing. 

In  the  winter  the  Indians  travelled  from 
place  to  place  on  their  snow-shoes  ;  these  were 
made  of  maple-wood  and  deer's  hide,  and  fast- 
ened on  the  feet  by  pieces  of  deer's  hide,  and 
upon  these  curious  shoes  the  Indians  could 
travel  very  fast,  sometimes  forty  miles  a  day, 
when  huntinof  the  deer  and  moose.  Each  tribe 
of  Indians  had  its  own  peculiar  kind  of  snow- 
shoe,  and  one  Indian  meeting  another  in  the 
forest  could  tell  by  the  totem  tattooed  on  the 
breast  and  by  the  pattern  of  the  snow-shoe  to 
what  tribe  he  belonged,  and  whether  he  were 
friend  or  foe. 

They  used  to  travel  by  water  in  their 
graceful  birch-bark  canoes  ;  these  were  made 
by  stripping  off  the  bark  from  a  birch  tree  and 


THE   RED   MEN.  23 


fastening  it  whole  around  the  frame  of  cedar. 
Some  of  the  canoes  were  very  long  and  could 
carry  ten  or  twelve  men.  Every  little  Indian 
boy  and  girl  could  manage  his  canoe  with  the 
greatest  ease,  either  sitting  or  standing,  and 
long  hours  they  spent  in  them,  paddling  on  the 
lakes  and  fishinsf  in  the  shadow  of  the  moun- 
tains. 

The  Red  Men  were  a  very  poetical  people, 
and  the  names  which  they  gave  to  their  moun- 
tains and  lakes  and  rivers  were  often  very  fanci- 
ful. Many  of  these  we  have  kept,  as  Mississippi, 
the  Father  of  Waters  ;  Minnehaha,  Laughing 
Water  ;  Canadarauga,  The  Smile  of  the  Great 
Spirit ;  Housatonic,  Winding  Waters  ;  Horicon 
(the  Indian  name  for  Lake  George),  Silver 
Water ;  Ohio,  Fair  to  Look  Upon,  etc. 

The  names  of  the  months  were  also  very 
poetical  and  pretty  ;  the  Indians  did  not  divide 
the  years  into  months,  but  moons,  and  instead 
of  saying  last  month,  or  next  month,  they  would 
say  at  the  time  of  the  last  moon,  or  the  next 
moon,  and  their  weeks  were  called  from  the 
changes    in   the   moon,   when    it   was    new   or 


24  THE   RED    MEN. 


quarter  or  full.  April  was  the  Moon  of  Bright 
Nights  ;  May,  the  Moon  of  Leaves  ;  June,  the 
Moon  of  Strawberries  ;  September,  the  Moon 
of  Falling  Leaves ;  November,  the  Moon  of 
Snow-shoes,  etc. 

And  besides  they  had  their  own  names 
for  all  the  wonderful  and  curious  things  in  the 
heavens  ;  thus  the  Milky  Way  was  the  Pathway 
of  Ghosts ;  the  Northern  Lights,  the  Death 
Dance  of  the  Spirits  ;  the  Rainbow  was  the 
Heaven  of  the  Flowers,  where  they  all  blossomed 
again  after  fading  on  the  earth,  and  the  shadows 
on  the  moon  w^ere  the  body  of  an  old  woman 
who  had  been  thrown  there  by  her  grandson. 

Their  picture-writing  was  very  curious  and 
interesting.  The  legend  relates  that  Hiawatha 
taught  the  Indians  this  art,  so  that  they  might 
be  able  to  remember  their  history  better,  and 
also  be  able  to  send  messages  to  one  another. 
In  this  picture-writing  the  Great  Spirit,  Gitche 
Manito,  was  painted  as  an  egg,  with  four  points, 
extending  north,  south,  east,  and  west,  which 
meant  that  the  Great  Spirit  was  everywhere. 
Mitche  Manito,  the  Evil  Spirit,  was  represented 


THE   RED   MEN.  25 


as  a  great  serpent ;  Life  was  shown  by  a  light 
circle,  Death  by  a  black  circle ;  a  straight  line 
meant  the  Earth,  and  a  bow  above  it  the  Sky ; 
foot-prints  going  toward  a  wigwam  meant  an 
invitation,  but  uplifted  red  hands  were  a  sign  of 
war, 

V  The  Indians  also  knew,  or  thought  they  did, 
what  all  the  cries  of  the  different  animals  meant, 
and  they  believed  that  these  animals  could 
understand  them  if  they  spoke  to  them.  The 
bear  was  the  favorite  animal  among  the  Indians 
and  was  used  most  frequently  as  a  totem,  and 
they  had  a  belief  that  there  was  a  very  large 
bear  living  somewhere  in  the  woods,  naked  all 
over  except  a  spot  of  white  hair  on  its  back, 
which  was  more  ferocious  than  any  common 
bear,  and  they  used  to  frighten  their  children 
by  saying,  "  Hush,  the  naked  bear  will  hear 
you,  be  upon  you,  and  devour  you."  And  the 
little  Indian  boys  and  girls  were  just  as  afraid 
of  this  naked  bear  as  you  are  afraid  of  ghosts 
and  hobgoblins  and  witches.  It  is  true  they 
never  actually  saw  the  naked  bear,  but  then 
neither  have  you  ever  seen  a  ghost. 


26  THE   RED   MEN. 


The  Indians  were  a  very  warlike  people,  the 
different  tribes  were  almost  always  at  war,  and 
sometimes  for  .years  at  a  time.  In  preparing 
for  battle  they  used  to  paint  their  bodies  in  very 
bright  colors,  called  war-paint,  and  dress  their 
heads  with  feathers  ;  then  all  the  warriors  of  the 
tribe  would  assemble  for  a  feast,  which  was  fol- 
lowed by  a  war-dance.  A  painted  post  would  be 
driven  into  the  ground,  and  the  Indians  would 
dance  in  a  circle  around  it,  brandishing  their 
hatchets  and  screaming  and  shouting  in  a  hid- 
eous manner.  The  night  would  be  spent  in  this 
way,  and  then  the  Indians  would  take  off  their 
finery  and  go  silently  through  the  woods  to  the 
place  where  they  knew  the  enemy  to  be.  They 
did  not  fear  death,  as  they  believed  that  a  brave 
warrior  went  as  soon  as  he  died  to  the  Happy 
Hunting  Grounds,  where  he  would  live  forever, 
and  they  always  buried  the  dead  man's  weapons 
with  him,  as  it  was  supposed  he  would  need 
them  there. 


CHAPTER   IV. 

THE    NORTHMEN. 

In  the  far  north  there  is  an  island  so  cold  and 
dreary  that  from  time  immemorial  it  has  been 
called  Iceland — the  land  of  ice  and  snow  and 
frosts.  Here  are  no  spreading  forests  or  fields 
of  flowers,  but  only  here  and  there  hardy  ever- 
greens and  a  few  pale  blossoms,  that  come, 
perhaps,  just  to  show  how  beautiful  the  place 
might  become  if  only  the  short  Icelandic  sum- 
mer lasted  as  long  as  the  sunny  months  farther 
south.  All  around  the  rocky,  frozen  shores 
break  the  white  waves  of  the  Northern  Ocean, 
and  in  the  summer  one  may  see  the  great  ice- 
bergs sailing  past,  and  hear  the  voices  of  the 
birds  that  have  come  northward  for  a  little  visit. 

In  the  winter  the  days  are  so  short  and  the 
cold  is  so  intense  that  the  children  are  almost 
shut  off  from  out-door  life,  and  are  glad  to  take 
up  with   in-door  games  and  plays.     But  they 


28  THE   NORTHMEN. 

are  very  happy  in  spite  of  this,  for  they  are 
a  healthy,  sturdy  race,  and  Hke  the  ice  and 
cold  and  snow.  In  the  lono-  winter  evenins^s 
they  gather  around  the  fire  and  listen  to  the 
old  stories  that  have  been  told  in  their  land 
for  hundreds  of  years,  the  stories  of  Odin  and 
Thor  and  Baldur,  for  long,  long  ago  the  religion 
of  the  Northmen  was  very  different  from  what  it 
is  now.  Then  they  believed  not  in  one  god 
but  many,  of  whom  Odin  was  the  chief,  who 
dwelt  in  Valhalla,  the  Northmen's  heaven.  And 
no  one  could  enter  there  who  had  not  died 
fighting,  which  made  the  Norse  heroes  very 
anxious  to  die  in  battle.  Perhaps  you  will  re- 
member this  god  better  when  you  hear  that 
one  of  the  days  of  the  week  is  named  after 
him,  for  Wednesday  means  Woden's  day,  and 
Woden  was  only  another  name  for  Odin.  Thurs- 
day is  also  named  after  one  of  the  Norse  gods, 
the  great  Thor,  called  the  thunderer,  who  held 
a  mighty  hammer  in  his  hand  which  no  one 
else  could  lift,  and  of  whom  every  one  was 
afraid.  But  of  all  their  gods  the  people  loved 
best  Baldur,  the  beautiful ;  they  called  him  the 


THE   NORTHMEN.  29 

fair  white  god,  and  not  only  was  he  beloved  by 
the  people  but  all  things  in  nature  loved  him 
and  had  promised  never  to  harm  him,  all  things, 
that  is,  excepting  the  mistletoe.  One  day  there 
was  a  great  company  gathered  together,  and 
they  all  agreed  to  shoot  arrows  at  Baldur  just 
to  prove  that  nothing  could  hurt  him  ;  so  they 
shot  arrows  of  oak  and  hemlock  and  pine,  and 
they  threw  great  stones  at  him,  but  he  remained 
unharmed  amid  it  all,  for  all  things  loved  him 
and  refused  to  do  him  injury ;  and  Baldur  smiled 
upon  the  people  and  they  raised  their  hands 
above  their  heads  and  vowed  that  they  would 
worship  him  forever.  And  now  entered  Hoerder, 
an  evil  spirit,  who  had  found  out  the  secret  of 
the  mistletoe;  he  asked  permission  to  shoot 
an  arrow  at  Baldur,  and  took  up  one  made  of 
the  mistletoe,  the  one  thing  in  the  world  that 
could  harm  the  beautiful  god.  Hoerder  took 
aim  and  the  arrow  sped  on  its  way,  and  thus 
died  Baldur  the  beautiful,  by  the  hand  of  Hoer- 
der the  evil  one.  And  the  people  mourned  for 
him,  and  all  things  in  nature  wept  over  the  death 
of  the  fair  white  god.     And  when  hundreds  of 


30  THE   NORTHMEN. 


years  had  passed  away,  and  the  people  had 
ceased  to  beheve  in  Odin  and  Thor  they  still 
loved  the  memory  of  Baldur ;  and  when  they 
listened  to  the  story  of  Christ  and  his  death  on 
the  cross,  they  said  He  was  like  the  beautiful 
one  who  had  been  slain  by  Hoerder  ;  so  the 
priests,  to  please  the  people,  twined  the  cross 
with  mistletoe,  and  to  this  day  at  Christmas- 
time little  English  children,  descendants  of  the 
fierce  Norse  rovers,  gather  the  mistletoe,  to- 
gether with  the  holly  and  evergreen,  and  all 
bright  and  beautiful  things,  and  deck  the  churches 
with  them  in  honor  of  the  birth  of  Him  who 
came  to  destroy  evil,  and  to  bring  peace  on 
earth  and  good-will  to  men.  And  thus  the  name 
of  Baldur  lives,  for  the  memory  of  the  good 
can  never  die,  but  lives  forever  in  the  heart, 
even  as  the  stars  forever  shine  in  heaven. 

Besides  the  old  stories  of  their  gods,  the 
people  of  these  North  countries  have  many 
other  tales  they  relate  of  things  which  actually 
happened.  Living  so  near  the  ocean,  they  were, 
of  course,  great  sailors,  and  often  went  off  on 
long  voyages,  which  lasted  sometimes  a  year  or 


THE   NORTHMEN.  3 1 

two.  In  the  old  histories  of  Iceland  we  read 
that  Erik  the  Red,  as  he  was  called,  being  un- 
justly treated  by  his  neighbors,  resolved  to  leave 
Iceland  and  seek  a  home  elsewhere.  So  he 
gathered  his  friends  together  and  took  ship  and 
sailed  away  boldly  toward  the  west.  No  one 
then  knew  that  there  was  any  land  west  of  Ice- 
land, so  many  of  his  friends  expected  never  to 
see  him  again.  But  Erik  was  a  brave  sailor  and 
kept  sailing  on  and  on,  still  westward,  until  one 
day  he  did  see  land,  and  then  steering  southward 
along  the  coast  he  found  a  place  where  he  might 
land  safely.  Here  he  stayed  the  whole  winter, 
calling  the  place  Erik's  Island ;  then  he  looked 
around  for  a  spot  suitable  to  live  in  always, 
and,  having  found  one,  a  little  village  was  built, 
and  there  he  remained  two  years.  When  he 
went  back  to  Iceland  he  told  the  people  of  the 
new  land  he  had  found,  and  called  it  Green- 
land, as  he  thought  that  name  would  sound 
pleasant  to  them,  and  they  would  be  eager  to 
go  there  and  live,  and  so  they  were,  and  Erik 
soon  sailed  away  again  toward  Greenland, 
taking   with  him    this    time    twenty-five   ships 


32  THE   NORTHMEN. 


filled  with  people  and  food  and  all  things  they 
might  need  in  a  new  country ;  and  having 
reached  the  little  village  which  Erik  had  be- 
gun they  landed  in  safety  and  were  soon  busy 
makinof  new  homes  for  themselves  in  that  west- 
ern  Greenland  which  had  been  discovered  by 
the  bold  rover  Erik  the  Red. 

This  happened  about  eight  hundred  years 
ago.  A  short  time  after,  Biarni,  another  brave 
Icelander,  resolved  to  go  to  Greenland  too.  So 
he  set  sail,  and  for  three  days  they  went  on 
briskly  with  a  fair  wind;  then  arose  a  most  fear- 
ful storm,  before  which  they  were  driven  for 
many  days,  they  knew  not  whither.  At  length 
the  storm  ceased,  and  sailing  westward  another 
day  they  saw  land  different  from  any  they  had 
ever  seen  before,  for  it  was  low  and  level  and 
had  no  mountains.  The  sailors  anxiously  asked 
if  this  were  Greenland,  but  Biarni  said  no,  it 
could  not  be.  Then  they  turned  the  ship  about 
and  sailed  toward  the  North  for  two  days,  and 
again  they  saw  land,  but  it  was  still  low  and 
level,  and  they  thought  this  could  not  be  Green- 
land ;  so  they  kept  sailing  northward  for  three 


THE   NORTHMEN.  33 


days  more,  and  then  they  came  to  a  land  that 
was  mountainous  and  covered  with  ice ;  this  land 
they  sailed  quite  around,  proving-  it  to  be  an 
island ;  they  were  almost  discouraged,  but  kept 
on  four  days  more,  and  then  at  last  Greenland 
came  in  sight.  Erik  and  his  companions  list- 
ened with  great  interest  to  the  stories  which 
Biarni  told  of  the  strange  new  lands  he  had 
seen,  but  they  were  all  too  busy  to  go  in  search 
of  them ;  and  so  it  came  about  that  for  many 
years  the  places  which  we  now  call  Cape  Cod, 
Nova  Scotia,  and  Newfoundland  remained  un- 
known to  all  of  the  Northmen  except  Biarni 
and  his  brave  followers. 

Finally,  Leif  the  Lucky,  son  of  Erik  the  Red, 
determined  to  go  in  search  of  the  strange  lands 
seen  by  Biarni.  He  bought  Biarni's  ship,  and 
taking  thirty-five  men  with  him,  started  off  on 
one  of  those  perilous  voyages  so  clearly  loved 
by  the  Norsemen.  The  first  land  he  saw  was 
the  mountainous,  icy  island  round  which  Biarni 
had  sailed,  and  which  Leif  named  Helluland, 
meaning  the  land  of  broad  stones  ;  then  he  sailed 
farther  south  and  came  to  a  land  low  and  level 


34  THE   NORTHMEN. 

and  covered  with  wood,  which  they  called  Mark- 
land,  the  land  of  woods ;  now  they  went  still 
farther  south  for  two  days  and  then  touched 
at  an  island,  probably  Nantucket,  and  sailing 
through  a  bay  between  this  island  and  the  main- 
land, they  passed  up  a  river  and  landed.  Here 
they  built  rude  huts  and  prepared  to  pass  the 
winter.  It  was  about  the  middle  of  autumn,  and 
finding  there  wild  grapes  growing,  they  called 
the  country  Vinland.  Leif  and  his  people  were 
much  pleased  with  the  pleasant  climate  and  fruit- 
ful soil  of  the  new  country,  and  stayed  there  con- 
tentedly all  winter.  The  next  spring  they  loaded 
their  ships  with  timber  and  returned  to  Green- 
land. In  the  meantime  Erik  the  Red  had  died, 
and  Leif,  on  his  return,  succeeded  him  in  com- 
mand of  the  Greenland  colony  and  made  no 
more  voyages. 

But  the  next  year  Thorvald,  Leif's  brother, 
went  to  Vinland  and.  spent  the  winter,  and  the 
following  summer  sailed  away  down  the  coast  as 
far  as  the  Carolinas,  coming  back,  however,  in 
the  autumn  to  Vinland.  The  next  summer,  while 
coasting  around  Cape   Cod,   they  saw  on  the 


THE   NORTHMEN.  35 


sandy  shore  of  the  bay  three  small  elevations ; 
these  proved  to  be  three  boats  made  of  skin, 
with  three  men  under  each  ;  they  seized  all  the 
men  but  one,  who  ran  away  with  his  boat,  and 
they  killed  all  those  they  had  taken.  Immedi- 
ately, from  a  small  bay,  hundreds  of  small  skin 
boats  were  seen  coming  toward  them  all  filled 
with  these  strange  people.  Thorvald  told  his 
men  to  set  up  their  battle-shields  and  guard 
themselves  as  well  as  possible,  but  to  fight  little 
against  them,  which  they  did,  and  the  Skrael- 
lings,  as  they  called  them,  shot  at  the  Norsemen 
for  a  time,  but  at  last  fled  away ;  but  they  had 
wounded  the  brave  Thorvald  with  an  arrow  so 
that  he  died,  and  his  companions  becoming  dis- 
couraged returned  the  next  spring  to  Green- 
land, after  an  absence  of  three  years. 

But  Vinland  was  now  well  known,  and  there 
were  many  voyages  made  there,  chiefly  for  the 
timber,  of  which  there  was  a  great  want  in 
Greenland.  The  children  of  Erik  the  Red  were 
always  ready  to  go  on  these  voyages,  for  they 
inherited  their  father's  bold  and  roving  disposi- 
tion.    There  is  one  story  which  tells  of  a  voy- 


36  THE   NORTHMEN. 


age  to  Vinland  made  by  Freydis,  Erik's  daugh- 
ter, a  cruel,  hard-hearted  woman,  who,  during 
the  voyage,  killed  her  husband's  brothers  and 
seized  the  ship ;  but  for  this  she  was  punished 
by  Leif  on  her  return.  Then  there  is  another 
story  of  Gudrid,  a  beautiful  woman  who  had 
married  Thorstein,  Erik's  youngest  son,  who 
died  while  getting  ready  to  go  to  Vinland.  Gud- 
rid married  after  this  a  man  by  the  name  of 
Thorfinn,  who  took  her  to  Vinland  to  live,  and 
here  was  born  their  son  Snorri,  who  was  per- 
haps the  first  white  child  born  in  America. 

While  they  were  in  Vinland,  Thorfinn  and 
his  companions  had  many  battles  with  the  na- 
tives, or  Skraellings,  and  once  Freydis,  being 
with  them,  fought  fiercely,  killing  many  natives 
with  her  own  hand.  After  spending  three  years 
in  Vinland,  Thorfinn  and  Gudrid  went  to  Ice- 
land, and  remained  there  the  rest  of  their  lives, 
and  the  little  boy,  Snorri,  lived  and  grew  to 
manhood,  and  among  his  descendants  was  the 
great  Danish  sculptor,  Thorwaldsen. 

There  are  many  other  tales  of  these  visits  of 
the  Vikings  to  the  New  World,  but  they  cannot 


THE  NORTHMEN.  37 

be  written  here  ;  but  you  must  remember  that 
hundreds  of  years  before  anything  was  known 
of  America  to  the  rest  of  Europe,  the  bold  Norse 
sea-kings  came  here — Erik  the  Red,  Leif  the 
Lucky,  Biarni,  Thorvald,  and  Thorfinn — and  that 
Greenland,  Newfoundland,  Cape  Cod,  Nova 
Scotia,  and  Rhode  Island  were  well  known  to 
the  Northmen  at  a  time  when  the  rest  of  the 
world  had  never  dreamed  of  a  country  lying  on 
the  other  side  of  the  great  Atlantic. 


CHAPTER  V. 

COLUMBUS  AND  THE  DISCOVERY  OF  AMERICA. 

If  you  will  look  at  your  map  you  will  see  on 
the  western  shore  of  Italy  a  city  which  has  be- 
come celebrated  as  the  birthplace  of  a  great 
man.  It  is  called  Genoa,  the  Superb,  and  in 
this  city  was  born,  over  three  hundred  years 
ago,  the  man  who  was  to  make  it  immortal. 
Genoa  is  a  beautiful  city.  It  looks  from  the  sea 
like  a  great  picture.  Its  churches,  palaces,  prom- 
enades, and  gardens  stretch  in  terraces  from  the 
Mediterranean  up  to  the  slopes  of  the  Apen- 
nines, and  behind  are  seen  the  ice-covered  peaks 
of  the  Alps.  It  has  a  mild  and  healthy  cli- 
mate, and  on  the  mountains  around  grow  grain, 
grapes,  oranges,  figs,  almonds,  chestnuts,  etc. 
The  streets  of  the  city  are  mostly  narrow,  ir- 
regular, and  sometimes  so  steep  that  carriages 
cannot  be  used  in  them,  although  there  are  a 
few  that  arc  straight  and  handsome.     Genoa  is 


YOUNG  COHTMISPS. 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY    OF   AMERICA.         39 

famed  for  its  palaces  and  for  its  great  works  of 
sculpture  and  painting.  But  its  narrow,  crooked 
streets  are,  after  all,  the  most  interesting  thing 
about  it,  for  in  them  Columbus,  when  a  boy, 
walked  and  played.  Of  course,  having  been 
born  near  the  sea,  he  was  naturally  very  fond  of 
it,  and  doubtless  spent  many  hours  standing  on 
the  wharves  watching  the  ships  enter  and  leave 
the  harbor,  and  while  yet  a  boy  he  determined 
that  he  would  be  a  sailor  and  spend  his  life  on 
the  great  sea  which  he  loved  so  well.  At  ten 
years  of  age  he  was  sent  by  his  father  to  the 
university  of  Pavia  to  study  navigation  and 
other  things,  as  it  was  considered  necessary 
that  seamen  should  be  well  educated,  although 
at  that  time  very  few  people,  even  among  the 
nobles,  knew  how  to  write.  He  stayed  in  Pavia 
nearly  four  years,  and  then  returned  to  Genoa 
and  entered  his  father's  workshop.  But  here 
he  remained  but  a  short  time,  for  at  the  age  of 
fourteen  he  went  to  sea  in  a  vessel  under  com- 
mand of  his  granduncle,  Colombo.  For  twenty 
years  he  followed  the  sea,  during  which  time 
he  was  in  many  battles,  always  appearing  brave, 


40        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY    OF   AMERICA. 

and  often  encouraging  his  sailors  by  his  exam- 
ple. During  this  time  he  visited  nearly  all  the 
ports  that  were  then  known,  but  still  he  was 
not  satisfied. 

You  must  remember  that  at  that  time  no  one^ 
knew  the  real  shape  of  the  earth  ;  they  had  no 
idea  that  it  was  round,  but  supposed  it  to  be  a 
flat  plane,  with  the  ocean  lying  around  its  edges. 
What  strange  things  might  be  found  on  the 
other  side  of  the  ocean  they  did  not  know. 
Some  said  that  this  ocean,  which  they  called  the 
"  Sea  of  Darkness,"  and  which  was  supposed  to 
stretch  away  to  the  end  of  the  world,  had  many 
large  islands  lying  in  it,  one  of  which  had  been 
visited  by  some  bishops  who  were  flying  from 
the  Moors,  and  who  built  seven  large  cities 
there — one  for  each  bishop ;  but  that,  having 
burned  their  ships,  they  could  not  send  back 
any  tidings  to  the  world  they  had  left.  A  great 
many  people  believed  this,  and  there  were  even 
some  ships  sent  out  to  try  and  find  the  island, 
but  of  course  they  never  did. 

Another  story  which  they  were  very  fond  of 
telling  was,   that   a   giant  called    Mildum    had 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA,        41 

actually  seen  in  the  western  sea  an  island  of 
gold,  with  walls  of  crystal,  and  offered  to  swim 
to  it  with  a  ship  in  tow ;  but  a  storm  came  up, 
and  the  giant  went  ashore  and  died,  and  no  one 
ever  found  the  golden  island. 

But  there  were  some  thinofs  which  made  it 
seem  as  though  there  really  might  be  land 
somewhere  out  in  the  Atlantic.  For  instance, 
Columbus'  brother-in-law  had  seen  a  piece  of 
curiously  carved  wood  which  had  been  washed 
ashore  in  a  westerly  gale,  and  an  old  pilot  had 
picked  up  a  carved  paddle  very  far  west  of 
Portugal.  These  things  were  very  unlike  any- 
thing that  the  Europeans  had  ever  seen  before, 
and  they  of  course  supposed  that  they  must 
have  been  made  by  some  unknown  race  of  men. 
Then,  besides,  cane-stalks  of  tropic  growth  had 
been  washed  on  the  Madeiras,  and  great  pine- 
trees  on  the  Azores  ;  and  once,  strangest  thing 
of  all,  two  drowned  men,  of  different  dress  and 
looks  from  any  they  had  ever  known,  had  been 
found  on  the  island  of  Flores.  All  these  had 
come  from  the  West — that  great,  curious,  un- 
known West !     Can  you   not  imagine  how  the 


42        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OP^   AMERICA. 

little  children  would  go  down  to  the  shore  and 
look  across  the  sea,  and  wonder  and  wonder 
what  lay  beyond  it  ?  They  had  heard  such 
strange  stories  of  giants  and  monsters  and  cruel 
beasts,  who  were  said  to  live  away  off  there  out 
of  the  sight  of  land,  and  it  all  seemed  so  curious 
to  them.  They  could  not  believe  that  there 
was  really  land  out  beyond  that  blue  sea,  on 
which  sometimes  they  could  not  even  see  a  sail. 
It  only  looked  to  them  like  a  great  empty  stretch 
of  water,  and  they  felt  just  as  you  would  feel  if 
you  looked  up  to  the  sky  some  cloudless  day. 
You  would  see  nothing  but  the  empty  blue 
stretching  away  and  away  and  away. 

Would  you  not  laugh  if  some  one  said  to 
you,  "Come,  let  us  take  a  boat  and  sail  away 
into  the  sky,  and  find  a  new  country  that  some 
one  says  is  there  ?  " 

Well,  in  those  days,  almost  every  one  thought^ 
it  was  just  as  silly  to  suppose  there  was  land  on 
the  other  side  of  the  Atlantic. 

But  there  were  some  people  who  really  be- 
lieved there  was  land  lying  across  the  great  sea, 
and  one  of  those  persons  was  Columbus. 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        43 


He  was  a  very  wise  man,  and  had  learned 
all  that  was  then  known  of  geography,  and 
he  felt  sure  from  many  things  that  the  earth 
was  round  in  shape,  and  that  if  he  sailed  west 
across  the  Atlantic,  he  would  come  to  land. 
He  did  not  dream  of  finding  a  new  country,  but 
he  thought  that  the  world  was  much  smaller 
than  it  really  is,  and  that  by  sailing  westward 
he  would  come  to  India  much  sooner  than  by 
going  the  usual  way. 

At  that  time  India  was  a  very  important 
country.  Very  rare  and  beautiful  things  were 
brought  from  there,  such  as  silks,  gold,  pearls, 
ivory,  diamonds,  rare  woods,  and  many  other 
costly  and  useful  things.  Great  companies  of 
men  were  all  the  time  going  and  coming  over- 
land to  and  from  India,  and  it  took  a  long  time, 
and  was  a  very  expensive  way  of  going.  The 
merchants  travelled  part  of  the  way  on  horses 
and  part  of  the  way  on  camels,  and  the  long 
caravan  would  go  winding  across  the  desert,  and 
through  mountain  passes,  over  the  plains,  guided 
by  the  stars,  or  resting  at  night  around  great 
fires  ;  and  if  you  could  see  such  a  sight  now  you 


44        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY    OF   AMERICA. 

would  think  it  was  a  great  gypsy  camp.  Then, 
oftentimes,  people  who  wished  to  travel  to  In- 
dia, or  to  the  places  on  the  way  thither,  would 
join  these  caravans,  as  it  was  much  the  cheaper 
and  safer  way,  and  so  there  would  be  found 
every  kind  of  people  travelling  together — Jews, 
Arabs,  Spaniards,  Dutch,  and  many  others^all 
on  their  way  to  obtain  those  wonderful  and 
beautiful  things  from  the  East ;  if  you  had  lived 
at  that  time,  and  had  started  on  a  journey 
to  India,  it  would  have  been  as  different  from 
such  a  journey  now  as  you  can  imagine.  Then, 
after  leaving  Europe  you  would  have  travelled 
all  the  way  on  the  back  of  a  camel ;  and  although 
these  caravans  sometimes  moved  during  the  day, 
resting  at  night,  still,  much  the  greater  part  of 
the  travelling,  owing  to  the  heat  of  the  sun, 
was  done  in  the  nio^ht-time.  About  ten  o'clock 
at  night  you  would  have  heard  the  sound  of  the 
trumpets.  This  was  to  tell  you  that  the  cara- 
van was  about  to  move  on.  Then  the  tents  were 
folded  up,  the  camels  loaded  with  the  merchan- 
dise, the  travellers  mounted  on  their  horses  or 
camels,  and  about  midnight,  after  the  third  blast 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF  AMERICA.        45 

from  the  trumpets,  the  march  would  bec^in. 
Great  kettles  of  burning  pitch  would  send  their 
flames  flashing  over  the  desert,  and  the  men 
and  beasts  travelled  onward  throuMi  the  nieht 
by  this  ruddy  gleam.  Sometimes,  in  the  earlier 
part  of  the  journey,  the  line  of  march  would  lay 
along  the  sea,  and  then  the  thunder  of  Its  waves 
would  be  heard  minoflingf  with  the  sones  of  the 
slaves  and  the  bells  of  the  camels.  Ridine 
across  a  desert  is  much  like  sailing  across  the 
sea.  There  is  very  little  variety.  You  see  the 
same  thing  day  after  day.  In  sailing,  you  see 
the  sea  and  sky,  and  occasionally  a  ship's  sail ; 
in  journeying  across  a  desert  you  see  the  sand 
and  sky,  sometimes  an  Arab  or  two  looking 
wonderingly  at  the  caravan  before  darting  off  to 
their  hidden  retreats,  and  more  often  only  the 
bones  of  camels  and  elephants  scattered  on 
either  side  of  the  route,  and  dazzling  the  sight 
with  their  white  gleam.  The  only  thing  that 
would  break  in  upon  the  sameness  would  be 
the  stops  at  the  springs  for  water  and  rest, 
when  the  sacks  of  food  and  wine  were  un- 
packed   from    the    camels,    and    the    travellers 


46        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA. 

would  alight  and  stay  until  the  heat  of  the 
day  was  past. 

Of  course,  you  little  American  boys  and  girls 
have  never  travelled  in  this  way,  but  it  was  the 
usual  way  at  that  time,  and  much  labor  and 
time  and  money  it  cost ;  and  so  it  was  consid- 
ered that  it  would  be  a  great  gain  to  the  world 
if  people  could  find  a  shorter  way  of  going  to 
India,  and  this  was  one  reason  why  Columbus 
wished  to  see  if  the  world  were  really  round. 
For,  of  course,  if  it  were  round,  India,  they  said, 
must  be  riofht  on  the  other  side  of  the  Atlantic. 
You  see  they  had  no  idea  that  this  big  America 
lay  in  the  way  between  them  and  India.  They 
thought  that,  at  the  most,  there  were  only  some 
larcje  islands  there. 

And  so  _  Columbus  thought  it  all  over  and 
decided  to  try  for  himself,  and  see  if  he  could 
reach  India  by  sailing  across  the  ocean.  But 
he  was  to  have  many  disappointments  before  he 
started  off.  In  the  first  place,  very  few  people 
thought  as  he  did  about  the  shape  of  the  earth, 
and  the  different  countries  were  unwillinor  to  risk 
men  and  money  in  an  undertaking  which  they 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        47 


were  sure  would  amount  to  nothing.  Columbus 
tried  to  obtain  help  from  his  own  people ;  first, 
from  the  republic  of  Genoa,  then  from  the  repub- 
lic of  Venice,  and  the  court  of  Portugal,  and  for 
seven  years  he  tried  to  get  help  from  Ferdinand 
and  Isabella,  the  king  and  queen  of  Spain.  And 
at  last,  after  ten  years  of  waiting  and  seeking, 
the  wished-for  help  came.  Isabella,  queen  of 
Spain,  listened  to  Columbus'  plans,  and  liked 
them  so  much  that  she  said  she  would  send  the 
expedition  out  at  the  expense  of  her  own  king- 
dom of  Castile,  and,  if  necessary,  would  pawn 
her  jewels  to  get  enough  of  money ;  but  this  last 
she  did  not  have  to  do. 

It  was  hard  work  to  find  sailors  willinof  to  q-q 
on  this  long  voyage  across  the  unknown  seas, 
and  many  of  the  men  had  to  be  forced  into  the 
service ;  but  after  three  months'  delay  the  expe- 
dition was  ready,  and  on  August  3,  1492,  the 
three  ships,  the  Santa  Maria,  the  Pinta,  and 
the  Nina,  left  the  port  of  Palos  on  the  most  won- 
derful voyage  that  has  ever  been  undertaken — 
the  voyage  which  ended  in  the  discovery  of  the 
great  New  World. 


48        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA. 

And  so  Columbus  sailed  away  toward  the 
sun  setting.  In  about  a  month  he  reached  and 
passed  the  Canary  Islands,  the  farthest  known 
land.  This  was  on  Sunday,  September  6,  1492. 
And  then  the  voyage  really  began.  The  day 
passed,  and,  as  the  sky  and  the  sea  grew  dark, 
the  sailors  became  terrified,  and  when  at  last 
night  fell,  and  they  lost  sight  of  the  land  which 
bordered  the  great  sea  of  darkness,  they  wept 
from  fear,  and  said  they  should  never  return  to 
their  homes.  Columbus  had  a  hard  time  to  quiet 
their  fears,  but  finally  they  grew  calm  and  lis- 
tened to  his  descriptions  of  the  beautiful  country 
toward  which  they  were  sailing.  And  so  they 
went  on,  sometimes  hopeful  and  sometimes  de- 
spairing, and  once  they  made  a  plot  to  throw 
Columbus  overboard  and  then  turn  the  ships 
about  and  go  home,  but  happily  this  was  not  car- 
ried out.  As  they  advanced,  the  oldest  sailors 
were  deceived  by  frequent  signs  of  land.  On  the 
26th  they  entered  into  a  region  where  the  air 
was  soft  and  balmy,  and  fields  of  sea-weed  began 
to  appear.  "  This  day  and  the  day  after,"  said 
Columbus,  "  the  air  was  so  mild  that  it  wanted 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        49 

but  the  song  of  the  nightingales,  to  make  it  like 
the  month  of  April  in  Andalusia." 

One  evening,  just  as  the  sun  was  going  down 
there  came  a  cry  of  ''Land!''  from  the  Pinta, 
which  was  leading  the  other  ships.  Columbus 
had  promised  a  reward  to  him  who  should  first 
see  land,  and  Martin  Alonzo  Pinzon,  who  was 
ahead  in  the  Pinta,  now  claimed  the  reward. 
He  said  that  he  saw  land  in  the  west ;  they  all 
looked  and  saw  a  dark,  cloudy  mass  about 
twenty-five  leagues  away.  Columbus  and  the 
sailors  knelt  and  sang  Gloria  iit  Excelsis  Deo  / 
but  in  the  morning,  when  they  looked  again  for 
the  hoped-for  land,  they  saw  nothing  but  the 
wide  sea  stretching  away  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
see.  The  land  which  Martin  Pinzon  had  seen 
from  the  stern  of  the  Pinta  had  been  but  a 
cloud,  which  had  disappeared  in  the  night. 

But  Columbus  sailed  on  with  hope  and  faith 
in  his  heart.  Again  and  again  they  thought  they 
saw  land,  and  again  and  again  they  were  disap- 
pointed ;  but  at  last  they  saw  land-birds  flying 
around,  a  piece  of  carved  wood  was  picked  up 
by  the  Pinta,  and  the  Nina  secured  a  branch  of 
3 


50        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA. 

thorn  with  red  berries,  which  was  drifting  by, 
and  Columbus  felt  sure  that  they  were  near  their 
journey's  end.  The  men  were  called  to  even- 
ing prayer,  and  the  vesper  hymn  to  the  Virgin 
floated  out  over  the  waves  of  the  Atlantic,  the 
first  time  probably  that  a  Christian  hymn  had 
ever  been  sung  upon  that  darkening  sea.  Then 
Columbus  ordered  a  double  watch  to  be  set. 
"  We  shall  see  land  in  the  morning,"  said  he. 
He  spent  the  entire  night  on  the  deck ;  no  one 
slept ;  they  were  all  too  much  excited  at  the  pros- 
pect of  seeing  land.  Can  you  not  imagine  how 
rejoiced  Columbus  must  have  been  to  think  that 
at  last  his  long  and  weary  voyage  was  nearly 
over,  and  that  he  had  been  right  in  saying  that 
the  world  was  round,  and  that  there  was  land 
across  the  ocean  ?  Ah  !  no  one  can  understand 
how  he  felt,  for  no  one  before  or  since  ever 
started  out  on  such  a  voyage  as  that.  A  voy- 
age across  the  great,  mysterious,  unknown  sea, 
which  was  supposed  to  extend  to  the  ends  of 
the  earth,  and  on  whose  farther  borders  demons 
and  terrible  beasts  were  thought  to  live. 

At  ten  o'clock  that  night  Columbus,  looking 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        5 1 

wistfully  seaward,  saw  a  light ;  he  called  to  two 
of  the  sailors,  one  of  whom  saw  the  light  and 
one  did  not.  At  two  o'clock  the  next  morning, 
being  Friday,  October  12,  1492,  the  Pinta  fired 
a  gun,  the  signal  for  land.  Rodrigo  Triana,  a 
sailor  of  the  Pinta,  was  the  first  who  saw  the 
New  World.  The  ships  lay  to,  and  all  waited 
impatiently  for  morning. 

The  day  broke,  and  the  New  World  lay  be- 
fore them.  About  six  miles  away  they  saw  an 
island  thickly  covered  with  trees  and  with  crowds 
of  natives  running  up  and  down  its  shores. 
At  sunrise  the  small  boats  were  lowered,  and 
Columbus,  bearing  the  royal  standard  of  Cas- 
tile, and  Martin  Pinzon  and  his  brother,  each 
bearing  a  flag  with  a  green  cross,  were  rowed 
to  the  shore  to  the  sound  of  music.  Columbus 
first  stepped  on  the  beach,  the  others  followed, 
and  all  knelt  and  kissed  the  ground  with  tears 
and  thanks  to  God.  Then  Columbus  rose, 
shook  out  the  gorgeous  red  and  gold  flag  of 
Spain,  and  drawing  his  sword,  took  possession 
of  the  island  in  the  name  of  the  crown  of  Cas- 
tile, calling  it  San  Salvador, 


52        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA. 

The  wondering  natives  looked  on  in  silence  ; 
they  thought  their  visitors  were  gods  who  had 
come  down  from  heaven,  whereas  the  Span- 
iards thought  they  had  never  seen  a  place  so 
much  like  heaven  as  this  beautiful  island.  Birds 
of  gorgeous  plumage  hovered  above  them, 
while  others  made  the  place  sweet  with  their 
music.  The  air  was  soft  and  pleasant,  and  flow- 
ers and  fruits  were  abundant.  After  their  long 
sea  voyage  they  found  it  a  most  pleasant  spot, 
and  would  gladly  have  remained  there  for  a 
long  time. 

But  Columbus  did  not  consider  that  his 
work  of  discovery  was  yet  done.  Some  of  the 
natives,  who  wore  ornaments  of  gold,  told  him 
of  a  country  in  the  south  from  which  it  had 
come  ;  so  Columbus,  taking  seven  of  the  natives 
with  him,  started  off  to  find  this  land  of  gold, 
which  he  supposed  to  be  Cipango  (Japan).  He 
did  not  find  the  gold  which  he  sought,  but  he 
did  find  something  else — the  island  of  Cuba — 
which  he  first  thought  was  Cipango,  but  after- 
ward concluded  it  was  the  mainland  of  India.  He 
then  sailed  on,  discovering  the  island  of  Hayti, 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        53 

which  he  thought  was  Ophir,  that  land  of  gold 
from  which  had  been  brought  the  cfold  and 
jewels  for  Solomon's  Temple.  He  called  this 
island  Hispaniola,  or  Little  Spain,  and,  building 
a  fort  there  of  the  timbers  of  the  Santa  Maria, 
and  leaving  in  it  thirty-nine  men,  he  sailed  for 
Spain,  in  the  Nina,  taking  with  him  several 
natives.  Martin  Pinzon  had  in  the  meantime 
started  off  gold-hunting,  on  his  own  account,  in 
the  Pinta. 

During  the  voyage  back  to  Spain  a  fearful 
storm  arose,  and  it  was  thought  that  the  ship 
must  go  down ;  of  course,  if  this  happened  the 
people  in  Europe  would  never  know  what  had 
become  of  Columbus  and  his  sailors ;  so  he 
wrote  an  account  of  his  voyage  and  discoveries, 
and,  sealing  it  up  in  a  cask,  threw  it  overboard. 
But  the  storm  at  last  ceased  and  they  reached 
the  Azores  in  safety,  where  the  crew  attended 
mass  and  gave  thanks  for  their  preservation. 
In  March,  six  months  from  the  time  of  their 
sailing,  the  Nina  entered  the  harbor  of  Palos. 
Columbus  was  received  with  great  honors  by 
Ferdinand  and  Isabella.     He  was  allowed  to  sit 


54        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA. 

in  their  presence  while  he  told  the  story  of  his 
wonderful  adventures.  The  Spanish  are  a  peo- 
ple very  fond  of  romances  and  tales  of  daring, 
but  never  before  had  they  listened  to  such  a 
story  as  this.  A  story  that  told  them  that 
Spain  would  forever  stand  in  history  as  the  dis- 
coverer of  a  new  world.  No  fairy  tale  was  so 
marvellous  as  this.  Aladdin's  wonderful  lamp 
and  the  vale  of  diamonds  in  the  Arabian  Nights 
were  not  to  be  compared  to  the  riches  of  this 
new  country,  where  the  sands  of  every  river 
sparkled  with  gold,  where  the  stones  and  rocks 
shone  with  its  glittering  light,  where  the  walls 
of  the  houses  were  studded  with  jewels,  and 
where  the  poorest  native  wore  ornaments  that 
kings  might  envy.  And  in  addition  to  these 
dazzling  splendors  they  spoke  of  the  mild  and 
healthful  climate,  of  the  rare  and  delicious  fruits 
that  grew  so  abundantly,  of  the  beautiful  flow- 
ers, of  the  birds  with  sweetest  songs  and  the 
most  gorgeous  plumage,  of  the  rivers  whose 
waters  were  health-giving,  and  of  a  wonderful 
fountain  which  gave  immortal  youth  to  all  who 
mioht  drink  of  it. 


COLUMBUS  AND    DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        55 

And  so  Columbus  had  no  difficulty  in  fitting 
out  a  second  expedition  ;  men  were  eager  to  go, 
eager  for  gold,  and,  what  was  perhaps  better, 
eager  for  glory  ;  they  did  not  have  to  be  pressed 
into  the  service  this  time.  In  September,  1493, 
Columbus  sailed  from  Cadiz  with  a  fleet  of 
seventeen  ships  and  fifteen  hundred  men.  But 
he  had  left  his  good  fortune  behind  him  ;  never 
again  would  such  bright  skies  bend  above 
him  ;  never  again  would  he  sail  under  such  be- 
nignant stars ;  henceforth  his  life  was  to  be 
saddened  by  disappointment,  and  made  bitter 
by  the  envy  and  hatred  of  those  whom  he  had 
served. 

Many  of  the  men  who  took  ship  with  him 
on  this  second  voyage  were  led  to  do  so  from 
the  love  of  gold,  and  when  they  reached  the 
New  World  and  did  not  find  the  gold  they 
sought,  they  grew  angry  and  mutinous  and 
quarrelsome,  throwing  the  blame  on  Columbus, 
who,  they  said,  had  deceived  them.  It  was  not 
pleasant  to  govern  such  a  lot  of  unruly,  discon- 
tented men  ;  but  Columbus  was  a  man  who  never 
flinched  in  the  face  of  danc^er,  no  matter  of  what 


56        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY    OF   AMERICA. 

kind;  he  kept  on  his  way  in  spite  of  the  mur- 
murings  of  his  men,  and  was  rewarded  by  the 
discovery  of  the  Windward  Islands,  Jamaica 
and  Porto  Rico — then  he  founded  a  colony  in 
Hayti,  and  leaving  his  brother,  Bartolomme6, 
to  govern  it,  sailed  for  Spain,  reaching  Cadiz 
about  three  years  after  his  departure  from  it. 

Here  he  soon  cleared  himself  of  the  com- 
plaints made  against  him,  and  silenced  those 
who  were  jealous  of  his  fame.  Once,  while 
sitting  at  table,  a  courtier  said  that,  after  all,  it 
was  not  such  a  great  thing  to  have  discovered 
the  new  world,  any  one  else  could  have  done  it. 
For  answer  Columbus  asked  him  to  make  an 
egg  stand  on  its  end ;  the  courtier  tried,  but 
could  not  do  it.  Columbus  then  struck  the  egg 
on  the  table,  breaking  the  shell  a  little,  and  then 
stood  it  on  the  table. 

"  Any  one  can  do  that,"  said  the  courtier. 

"  When  I  have  shown  you  the  way,"  replied 
Columbus. 

The  courtier  was  silent,  he  knew  well  what 
Columbus  meant. 

And  now  there  was  to  be  still  another  Voy- 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        57 

age  made.  In  1498  Columbus  left  Spain  with 
six  ships,  and  sailed  across  the  Atlantic,  taking 
a  route  more  southerly  than  he  had  before  done. 
This  time  he  discovered  the  mouth  of  the  Ori- 
noco, which  he,  still  supposing  that  the  country 
he  had  discovered  to  be  Asia,  thought  was  the 
river  Gihon,  which  rose  in  the  garden  of  Eden. 
He  then  skirted  along  the  coast  of  South  Amer- 
ica, passing  the  islands  of  Trinidad  and  Mar- 
garita, and  then  turned  toward  Hispaniola, 
where  he  hoped  to  recruit  his  health.  He  found 
the  colony  in  a  sad  state,  and  while  trying  to 
restore  peace  he  again  became  the  object  of 
jealousy  and  malice.  A  commissioner  named 
Francisco  de  Bobadilla  was  sent  from  Spain  to 
settle  the  trouble,  and  his  first  act  was  to  put 
Columbus  and  his  brother  in  chains  and  send 
them  to  Spain. 

"  Are  you  taking  me  to  death,  Vallejo  ?  " 
asked  Columbus,  sadly,  when  the  officer  came 
to  lead  him  from  his  cell. 

The  officers  of  the  ships  wanted  to  take  off 
his  chains,  but  Columbus  replied,  "  I  will  wear 

them  as  a  memento  of  the  gratitude  of  princes." 

3* 


58        COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF  AMERICA. 

When  he  arrived  in  Spain,  the  people  were 
very  indignant  at  the  treatment  which  he  had 
received ;  and  the  king,  in  order  to  quiet  them, 
said  that  he  had  not  ordered  Cokmibus  to  be 
put  in  chains.  But  the  real  reason  why  he  had 
allowed  him  to  be  thus  insulted  was  that  he  was 
disappointed  at  finding  that  the  New  World, 
after  all,  was  not  rich  in  gold  and  silver,  and 
after  nine  months  of  waiting  Columbus  only  saw 
a  new  governor  appointed  over  Hispaniola,  and 
no  notice  taken  of  his  injuries.  One  more  voy- 
age and  then  Columbus'  work  would  be  over. 
In  1502  he  received  command  to  sail  in  search 
of  a  passage  leading  westward  from  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico,  which  was  then  supposed  to  be  a  sea. 
He  believed  he  should  find  a  strait  somewhere 
near  where  the  isthmus  of  Panama  now  is,  and 
that  by  passing  through  this  strait  he  would 
reach  the  continent  of  Asia.  On  his  way  out  he 
stopped  at  his  colony  at  Hispaniola,  where  he 
hoped  to  refit,  but  was  refused  permission  ;  he 
sailed  alone  the  south  side  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
but  did  not  find  the  strait  for  which  he  M-as  look- 
ing, and  after  much  suffering  from  famine  and 


COLUMBUS   AND   DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA.        59 

Other  hardships,  he  returned  home.  Here  he  lay 
sick  for  some  months  ;  his  old  friend  Queen  Isa- 
bella was  dead,  and  King  Ferdinand  refused  to 
give  him  any  reward  for  his  long  and  faithful 
service.  He  was  seventy  years  old,  poor,  and 
in  ill  health.  To  quote  his  own  words,  he  had 
"  no  place  to  go  to  except  an  inn,  and  often  with 
nothing  to  pay  for  his  food."  And  so  the  dis- 
coverer of  the  New  World,  suffering,  neglected, 
deserted  by  those  he  had  spent  his  life  in  serv- 
ing, died  while  repeating  the  Latin  words, 
"  Lord,  into  thy  hands  I  commend  my  spirit." 
They  are  the  last  words  of  a  great  man  ;  a  man 
who  lived  a  noble  life,  and  who  met  death  as 
bravely  and  fearlessly  as  he  met  the  unknown 
terrors  which  lay  in  his  way  when  he  sailed  for 
the  first  time  across  the  great  "  sea  of  dark- 
ness." Seven  years  after  his  death  the  people, 
for  very  shame's  sake,  placed  a  marble  tomb 
over  his  remains,  with  the  inscription  : 

"  A  Castilla  y  a  Leon, 
Nuevo  mondo  did  Colon." 


6o        COLUMBUS   AND    DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICy\. 

("  To  Castile  and  Leon,  a  new  world  gave 
Colon.") 

Afterward  his  remains  were  taken  to  St. 
Domingo  and  placed  in  a  cathedral  in  that  city. 
And  nearly  two  hundred  years  later  they  were 
removed  with  great  pomp  to  the  cathedral  at 
Havana,  where  they  rest  within  sound  of  the 
waves  of  the  sea,  in  that  beautiful  city,  where 
the  air  is  indeed  "like  the  spring  in  Andalusia," 
balmy  and  soft,  perfumed  with  flowers,  and  made 
musical  with  the  songs  of  birds. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE    CABOTS. 

About  the  time  of  the  discovery  of  America, 
there  was  living  in  England  an  old  man,  who 
loved  the  sea  better  than  anything  else  in  the 
world.  He  was  not  an  Englishman,  but  a  Vene- 
tian, and  many  years  before  he  had  left  his 
home  in  beautiful  Venice  to  seek  a  home  in 
England.  The  name  of  this  old  man  was  John 
Cabot,  and  he  was  considered  one  of  the  great- 
est sailors  living.  He  had  guided  his  ships 
among  the  islands  of  the  Mediterranean,  and 
had  sailed  up  the  Atlantic  coast  to  the  British 
Isles,  and  then,  not  satisfied,  he  had  gone  on 
into  the  frozen  regions  of  the  North,  and  had  sat 
by  Iceland  firesides  listening  to  the  tales  of  the 
Norsemen  and  their  wonderful  voyages  across 
the  sea  to  a  New  World.  And  while  he  list- 
ened he  thought  what  a  fine  thing  it  would  be 
if  he  too  should  sail  away  some  day  to  visit  this 


62  THE   CABOTS. 


Strange  country ;  so  after  returning  to  England, 
he  asked  permission  of  the  king  to  fit  out  some 
ships  and  go  on  a  voyage  of  discovery.  He 
had  heard  of  the  voyage  of  Columbus,  and  he 
thought  that  by  sailing  far  to  the  north  he 
might  find  new  lands  as  rich  and  beautiful  as 
those  which  Columbus  had  discovered.  So 
about  the  year  1494,  or  1497,  he  sailed  from 
England,  taking  with  him  his  son  Sebastian. 

Very  different  was  their  voyage  from  that  of 
Columbus ;  keeping  ever  to  the  north,  the 
waters  of  the  Atlantic  showed  them  no  genial 
skies,  or  islands  adorned  with  waving  forests 
and  beautiful  flowers,  but  instead,  they  found 
fog  and  mist,  cold,  chilling  winds,  and  great, 
glittering  icebergs.  The  first  land  seen  by  them 
was  Cape  Breton,  which  they  called  Prima  Vista, 
^meaning  first  seen.  They  found  the  country 
cold  and  dismal,  covered  with  ice  and  snow. 
As  this  new  land  was  no  farther  north  than 
England,  they  were  surprised  to  see  instead  of 
green  meadows,  shady  trees,  and  flowing  rivers, 
only  fields  of  snow,  and  while  they  knew  the 
birds  were  singing  in   England,  they  saw  here 


THE   CABOTS.  63 


great  white  bears,  which  prowled  around  seek- 
ing their  prey. 

Cabot  did  not  remain  long  in  America,  he 
soon  sailed  again  for  England,  which  he  reached 
three  months  from  the  time  he  had  left.  His 
voyage  is  important,  as  he  was  the  first  Eu- 
ropean, after  the  Northmen,  to  touch  the  main- 
land of  North  America. 

On  his  return  he  was  received  with  great 
honor  by  the  king.  He  went  about  dressed  in 
silk  and  velvet,  and  everywhere  great  crowds 
would  follow  him  and  point  him  out  as  the  Great 
Admiral. 

In  1498  Sebastian  Cabot  sailed  with  another 
expedition  from  England  and  reached  the  coast 
of  Labrador.  He  tried  to  find  a  northwest 
passage  to  Asia,  but  the  climate  was  so  cold 
that  he  gave  up  the  idea  and  sailed  down  the 
coast  as  far  as  Virginia,  claiming  the  whole 
country  for  the  King  of  England.  He  made 
still  another  voyage  and  explored  Hudson's 
Bay,  but  the  accounts  which  he  gave  of  the 
country  were  not  very  pleasing,  and  no  English- 
man was  willing  to  leave  his  own  pleasant  home 


64  THE   CABOTS. 


to  seek  another  in  the  New  World,  and  for 
many,  many  years  after  this  the  EngHsh  paid 
Uttle  heed  to  the  great  continent  which  Cabot 
had  discovered. 

Sebastian  Cabot  Hved  to  be  an  old  man,  and 
was  always  greatly  honored  by  the  English. 
He  was  called  the  Great  Seaman,  and  as  long 
as  he  lived  he  loved  the  ocean  over  whose 
waters  he  had  sailed  to  honor  and  fortune. 


VESI'UCIUS   r.ANDINO   TO  CHASTISE  THE   CANNIBALS. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

AMERICUS    VESPUCIUS. 

As  soon  as  it  became  known  in  Europe  that 
there  really  was  land  across  the  Atlantic,  all  the 
nations  wished  to  send  ships  and  men  to  gather 
the  gold  which  they  supposed  to  be  there.  The 
Spaniards,  of  course,  thought  that  they  had  the 
best  right  to  the  new  country,  but  the  English 
and  French  sent  out  expeditions,  and  soon  there 
arose  a  great  quarrel  as  to  whom  the  New 
World  should  belong.  One  of  the  most  inter- 
esting voyages  made  at  that  time  was  that  of 
Americus  Vespucius.  Like  Columbus,  he  was 
an  Italian,  having  been  born  in  the  beautiful 
city  of  Florence,  but  at  the  time  of  the  discovery 
of  the  western  world  he  was  living  in  Spain. 
Vespucius  sailed  across  the  sea,  and  in  the  sum- 
mer of  1499  (the  year  after  Columbus  discov- 
ered the  Orinoco),  he  landed  on  the  coast  of 
Venezuela.     Here  he  saw  a  queer  little  village 


66  AMERICUS   VESPUCIUS. 

which  looked  as  if  some  children  had  been  try- 
inor  to  build  a  "make-believe"  Venice.  The 
village  was  built  on  piles  driven  into  the  water, 
and  the  houses,  which  were  of  such  a  shape 
that  they  looked  like  big  bells,  could  only  be 
entered  by  means  of  drawbridges.  Each  house 
had  its  own  bridge,  and  when  the  owner  wished 
he  could  draw  the  bridge  up  and  no  one  could 
get  in,  and  there  he  was  just  as  safe  as  a  turtle 
when  it  shrinks  into  its  shell. 

Vespucius  and  his  men  had  never  seen  any- 
thing like  it  before  and  looked  at  the  funny  little 
place  in  astonishment.  But  as  soon  as  the  na- 
tives saw  the  Spaniards,  they  drew  up  all  their 
bridges  and  disappeared ;  in  a  few  minutes, 
however,  Vespucius  saw  twenty-two  canoes 
filled  with   these   savages    comingf    toward  his 

o  o 

boats ;  as  soon  as  they  got  near  enough  they 
began  shooting  arrows  at  the  Spaniards,  and 
then  Vespucius,  seeing  that  they  did  not  mean 
to  be  friendly,  ordered  the  guns  to  be  fired. 
The  Indians  were  terribly  frightened  by  the 
noise  and  smoke  of  the  guns ;  they  had  never 
seen   such   things  before,  and  very  soon  they 


AMERICUS   VESPUCIUS.  6/ 

rowed  back  to  the  shore,  and  Vespucius  sailed 
on  farther  south.  When  he  landed  next  he 
found  a  more  friendly  tribe  of  Indians  ;  they 
were  at  first  afraid  of  the  Spaniards,  and  ran 
away  when  they  saw  them  coming.  Vespucius 
and  his  men  went  into  the  wigwams  and  found 
that  the  Indians  had  fires  burning,  upon  which 
young  alligators  were  roasting.  By  and  by  the 
Indians,  seeing  that  the  Spaniards  meant  no 
harm,  came  back  and  treated  their  guests  so 
kindly  that  Vespucius  stayed '  there  nearly  two 
weeks,  visiting,  in  the  meantime,  some  of  their 
villages  which  were  built  back  from  the  sea. 
The  natives  grew  very  fond  of  him,  and  hun- 
dreds of  them  followed  him  back  to  his  ship,  but 
when  he  ordered  the  cannon  fired  they  all 
jumped  back  into  the  water  and  swam  away. 
But  Vespucius  did  not  mean  to  harm  them,  so 
he  called  them  back,  and  then  the  Indians  and 
Spaniards  exchanged  presents  and  Vespucius 
sailed  away.  He  still  kept  to  the  coast  of  Ven- 
ezuela, and  sailing  northwest  entered  the  bay 
of  Cremana.  Here  he  found  the  natives  friendly 
and  remained  with  them  more  than  a  month, 


68  AMERICUS    VESPUCIUS. 

and  they  begged  him  to  help  them  kill  their 
enemies,  who  lived  on  an  island  in  the  sea,  and 
who  were  a  very  great  and  powerful  tribe,  and 
came  every  year  and  took  away  many  of  their 
number  whom  they  killed  and  ate.  Vespucius 
promised  to  help  them,  and  taking  seven  of  them 
with  him  as  guides,  he  started  off  for  the  island. 
As  soon  as  the  cannibals  saw  him  coming 
they  gathered  on  the  shore  ready  for  fight. 
They  were  covered  with  war-paint  and  feathers, 
and  armed  with  arrows,  lances  and  clubs.  At 
first  it  seemed  that  the  Spaniards  would  be 
beaten,  as  the  Indians  pressed  around  them  so 
closely  they  could  not  use  their  swords,  but 
finally  the  cannibals  were  driven  back.  Ves- 
pucius then  tried  to  make  friends  with  them, 
but  they  would  not  do  so,  and  after  a  two  days' 
fight  he  conquered  them,  burned  their  town,  and 
sailed  away  with  two  hundred  and  fifty  of  them 
whom  he  sold  for  slaves  on  reaching  Spain. 
This  seems  a  very  cruel  act  now,  but  in  those 
times  it  was  thought  to  be  quite  right  to  sell 
captives  taken  in  war,  and  so  Vespucius  only  did 
what  he  thought  was  perfectly  fair. 


AMERICUS   VESPUCIUS.  69 

When  Vespucius  got  back  to  Spain,  he 
wrote  a  letter  to  a  friend  of  his  in  Florence,  giv- 
ing an  account  of  his  voyage  and  the  lands  he 
had  visited.  This  letter  was  published  a  year 
or  two  afterward,  and  as  it  was  the  first  printed 
account  of  a  visit  to  the  rnainland  of  the  New 
World,  it  was  read  with  much  wonder  and  in- 
terest by  the  people  who  wanted  to  learn  all 
they  could  of  the  strange  lands  beyond  the 
ocean. 

J  jNo  one  knows  just  how  it  happened  that  the 
new  country  was  called  America.  Some  of  Ves- 
pucius' friends  thought  that  the  New  World 
ought  to  be  called  after  him,  but  it  was  well 
known  that  the  honor  of  the  great  discovery 
belonged  to  Columbus  alone.  At  any  rate  it 
came  about  that  after  reading  Vespucius'  book, 
people  began  talking  about  the  land  of  Americus 
Vespucius,  and  finally  it  came  to  be  called  the 
land  of  Americus,  or  America.  But  although 
the  great  country  itself  is  not  named  after  Co- 
lumbus, yet  mountains,  rivers,  and  towns  bear 
his  name,  and  in  poetry  and  songs,  the  United 
States,  the  greatest  American  country,  is  often 


70  AMERICUS   VESPUCIUS. 

called  Columbia ;  while  in  South  America,  one 
of  the  principal  divisions  is  called  the  United 
States  of  Colombia.  All  of  which  shows  that 
the  people  of  the  New  World  are  very  ready  to 
honor  its  great  discoverer. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


PONCE    DE    LEON. 


Once  upon  a  time  there  was  an  old  man 
who  had  found  Hfe  so  fair  a  thing  that  he  wished 
to  Hve  forever,  and  to  be  forever  young.  He 
was  born  in  Spain,  and  his  childhood  and  youth 
and  early  manhood  were  so  happy  that  when 
he  grew  old  he  was  sad  and  wanted  to  bring 
the  lost  years  back.  Of  course  he  could  not  do 
that ;  new  summers  may  come  and  new  winters, 
but  the  years  themselves  never  come  back  any 
more  than  do  the  same  clouds,  or  the  same  sun- 
set, or  the  same  rainbow.  But  de  Leon,  for 
that  was  the  old  man's  name,  did  not  believe 
this.  When  a  child  he  had  read  many  stories 
and  romances  in  which  wonderful  things  were 
done.  He  had  all  a  Spaniard's  love  for  adven- 
ture, and  he  believed  there  were  things  on  the 
earth  and  in  the  earth  which  possessed  strange 
power  over  the  life  of  man.     As  he  grew  older 


72  PONCE    DE   LEON. 

he  was  taught  to  ride  and  fence,  and  many 
other  things  which  it  was  considered  necessary 
for  a  Spanish  gentleman  to  know,  but  all  the 
time  he  was  dreaming  over  these  marvellous 
things  he  had  heard.  When  he  became  a  man 
he  entered  the  army,  and  was  always  a  brave 
soldier,  and  eager  for  adventure  of  every  sort. 
He  sailed  with  Columbus  on  his  second  voyage, 
and  afterward  was  made  governor  of  the  island 
of  Porto  Rico. 

Here  in  his  island  home  he  was  not  happy, 
although  he  had  power,  and  wealth,  and  fame, 
for  he  sighed  for  the  years  that  were  gone,  and 
dreaded  the  time  to  come  when  life  would  be 
no  longer  pleasant,  for  he  was  growing  old  and 
must  die. 

And  then  he  heard  such  a  wonderful  story, 
that  while  he  listened,  it  seemed  as  if  the  years 
of  his  childhood  came  back  and  smiled  upon 
him.  Among  the  natives  of  Porto  Rico  it  was 
believed  that  somewhere  amono-  the  Bahama 
Islands  there  was  a  fountain  of  eternal  youth ; 
and  that  whoever  should  bathe  in  this  fountain, 
and  drink  of  its  waters,  would  find  his  lost  youth 


PONCE    DE   LEON.  73 


again  and  be  forever  young.  The  Spaniards 
believed  this  story  as  well  as  the  Indians,  and 
when  de  Leon  heard  it  he  determined  to  go  in 
search  of  the  wonderful  fountain.  As  he  was 
very  rich,  this  was  not  a  hard  thing  to  do  ;  he 
bought  three  ships  and  fitted  them  out  with  men, 
and  started  off.  He  sailed  for  some  time  amone 
the  Bahamas,  looking  for  the  magic  fountain, 
and  one  day,  Easter  Sunday,  March  27,  15 12, 
he  came  in  sight  of  an  unknown  shore.  He 
thought  he  had  discovered  another  island  more 
beautiful  than  any  of  the  rest.  Never  before 
had  he  seen  anything  so  delightful  as  this  new 
land ;  the  ground  was  covered  with  the  most 
gorgeous  flowers,  and  above,  great  trees  spread 
out  their  green  boughs  and  waved  them  in  the 
soft  air,  and  sweet-voiced  birds  sang  among 
the  fragrant  blossoms.  It  seemed  as  if  he  had 
sailed  into  a  world  where  there  was  nothing-  but 
beauty,  the  native  home  of  bird  and  blossom, 
the  land  of  eternal  summer.  De  Leon  named 
the  new  country  Florida,  partly  because  he  dis- 
covered it  on  Easter  Sunday,  which  is  called  by 
the  Spaniards  Pascua  Florida  (flowery  Easter), 


74  PONCE    DE   LEON. 


and  partly  because  it  was  indeed  a  Land  of 
Flowers.  After  a  few  days  he  landed  a. little 
north  of  the  place  where  the  city  of  St.  Augus- 
tine now  stands,  and  took  possession  of  the 
country  in  the  name  of  the  King  of  Spain.  He 
then  began  again  his  search  for  the  wonderful 
fountain,  feeling  sure  that  here  where  the  flow- 
ers forever  bloomed,  and  the  birds  ceased  not 
to  sing,  he  should  drink  the  waters  of  immor- 
tal youth.  But  though  he  wandered  through 
the  forest,  sailed  up  the  silent,  shady  rivers,  and 
searched  eagerly  along  the  coasts,  never,  save 
in  his  dreams,  did  he  hear  the  music  of  the  foun- 
tain, or  see  its  waters  shining  in  the  sunlight. 

He  returned  to  Porto  Rico,  and  the  king 
made  him  governor  of  the  new  country  and  sent 
him  back  there  to  found  a  colony.  But  when  he 
landed  he  found  that  the  Indians  were  all  ready 
for  war ;  there  was  a  dreadful  battle,  many  of 
the  Spaniards  were  killed,  and  the  rest  had  to 
go  back  to  the  ships  for  safety.  De  Leon  him- 
self was  mortally  wounded  by  a  poisoned  arrow, 
and  was  taken  to  Cuba,  where  he  died ;  and  al- 
though many  people  still  believed  that  the  won- 


PONCE   DE   LEON.  75 

derful  fountain  would  some  day  be  found,  it 
never  was,  for  the  flowers  that  close  at  night 
will  open  again  in  the  morning,  and  the  little 
stream  that  starts  from  the  mountain  and  goes 
down  to  the  sea,  will  have  its  waters  carried 
back  by  the  clouds  to  the  mountains  again,  but 
the  years  that  we  leave  behind  us  come  not 
again,  they  have  gone  away  forever  with  the 
daisies  and  buttercups  and  violets  that  shone  in 
the  meadow  last  year. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

VASCO  NUNEZ  DE  BALBOA,  THE  DISCOVERER  OF 
THE  PACIFIC  OCEAN. 

Among  the  many  adventurers  who  found 
their  way  to  the  New  World  after  its  discovery 
was  one  named  Balboa.  He  was  a  very  bold, 
brave  man,  always  ready  for  adventure  and 
eager  for  gold  and  fame,  as  were  all  the  Span- 
iards of  that  time.  But  Nunez  de  Balboa, 
besides  being  bold  and  brave,  was  also  very 
cruel  when  he  had  the  chance,  and  sometimes 
dishonest.  Whenever  he  could  he  robbed 
the  Indians  of  their  gold,  and  often  cruelly 
murdered  them ;  and  if  he  thought  he  could 
steal  from  his  fellow-soldiers  and  friends,  he  was 
ready  to  do  that,  too.  So,  altogether,  he  was 
a  man  not  very  much  liked  among  the  people 
with  whom  he  lived  in  Hispaniola,  and  because 
of  this,  and  also  because  he  owed  a  great  deal 
of  money  that   he    did    not   wish   to   pay,    he 


VASCO   NUNEZ  DE   BALBOA.  'J'] 

thought  it  would  be  a  fine  thing  to  run  away 
and  let  his  friends  get  back  the  money  they  had 
lent  him  as  best  they  might. 

There  were  always  ships  touching  and  leav- 
ing Hispaniola,  and  Balboa  thought  nothing 
would  be  easier  than  to  go  on  one  of  these 
ships  some  fine  day  and  sail  away  to  some  new 
place  where  he  would  have  better  chances  for 
borrowing  and  stealing  than  where  he  was  so 
well  known.  But  he  found  it  much  harder  to 
get  away  from  Hispaniola  than  he  had  thought. 
Either  he  had  no  money  to  pay  for  his  passage, 
or  the  captain  would  not  take  such  a  trouble- 
some character  on  his  ship,  or  the  people  whom 
he  owed  would  not  let  him  go  without  their 
money,  or  all  three  of  these  reasons  together, 
for  at  any  rate  at  the  last  moment  he  slipped  on 
board  a  vessel  that  was  just  going  to  sail,  and 
hid  himself  in  a  big  empty  cask,  and  had  to  lie 
there  hardly  daring  to  breathe  lest  he  should  be 
heard  and  put  on  shore  again.  But  every  one 
was  busy  trying  to  get  the  ship  under  way,  and 
no  one  thought  of  looking  into  empty  casks  to 
see  if  there  were  men  hiding  there,  and   it  was 


78  VASCO   NUNEZ  DE   BALBOA. 

not  until  they  were  far,  far  from  land  that  Bal- 
boa ventured  to  put  his  trembling  head  out  of 
the  cask  and  look  fearfully  around.  All  the 
sailors  and  passengers  crowded  around,  very 
much  surprised  to  see  a  man's  head  sticking 
out  of  what  they  had  supposed  to  be  an  empty 
cask,  and  the  captain  was  very  angry  indeed  at 
the  cheat  that  had  been  practised  upon  him, 
and  vowed  he  would  stop  the  ship  at  the  first 
desert  island  he  came  to  and  put  Balboa  ashore 
and  leave  him  there  to  starve  to  death. 

And  then  the  bold  runaway  quite  lost  his 
brave  heart  and  fell  upon  his  knees  and  begged 
with  tears  that  the  captain  would  not  treat  him 
so  cruelly,  quite  forgetting  that  he  himself  had 
often  done  things  just  as  cruel,  and  the  cap- 
tain, moved  by  the  wretched  man's  tears  and 
prayers,  or  perhaps  because  there  was  no  desert 
island  in  sight,  or  even  a  passing  ship  that 
might  be  hailed  to  take  the  runaway  back,  said 
that  he  might  finish  the  voyage  with  them. 
Balboa  thanked  the  captain  and  promised  good 
behavior,  but  in  his  heart  he  was  very  angry 
because  of  the  threat  to  put  him  on  a  desert 


BALBOA  IN  SEARCH  OF  THE  UNKNOWN  SEA. 


VASCO   NUNEZ   DE   BALBOA,  79 

island,  and  determined  to  be  revenged  on  the 
captain  if  possible. 

Before  very  long  his  chance  came.  A  ter- 
rible storm  came  up  and  the  vessel  was  dashed 
to  pieces  upon  a  strange  coast.  Encisco,  the 
captain,  felt  very  glad  now  that  he  had  kept 
Balboa  on  the  ship,  for,  although  the  country 
was  unknown  to  the  captain  and  his  crew,  it 
was  not  unknown  to  Balboa.  He  had  been 
there  before,  and  said  that  he  knew  of  an  In- 
dian village  not  far  away,  where  they  could  find 
food  and  shelter.  Encisco  was  very  glad  to 
hear  this,  and  they  all  started  off  under  the 
leadership  of  Balboa  to  find  the  river  Darien, 
on  which  the  Indian  village  stood. 

They  had  been  wrecked  on  the  coast  of  Da- 
rien, and  although  neither  Encisco  nor  any  of  his 
men  had  ever  been  there  before,  yet  other  Span- 
iards had,  and  had  treated  the  natives  cruelly 
and  unjustly,  as  was  their  usual  way  of  dealing 
with  them.  So  when  Encisco  and  his  followers 
tried  to  march  through  this  strange  country 
they  found  it  very  hard  work,  as  the  natives 
attacked  them  at  all  times,  day  and  night,  kill- 


80  VASCO   NUNEZ   DE   BALBOA. 

ing  some,  wounding  others,  and  keeping  them 
all  from  getting  food.  But  Balboa  was  a  skilful 
leader  and  knew  how  to  deal  with  Indians,  and 
after  a  time  they  reached  the  village,  though 
weary  and  foot-sore  and  almost  starved. 

Balboa's  boldness  made  him  very  much  ad- 
mired by  some  of  the  shipwrecked  sailors,  and 
soon  a  large  party  of  them,  attracted  by  his 
stories  of  bravery  and  adventure,  declared  that 
they  would  much  rather  have  him  for  a  captain 
than  Encisco.  This  was  just  what  Balboa 
wanted,  and  as  his  party  grew  larger  and  larger, 
and  Encisco's  friends  fewer  and  fewer,  Balboa 
at  last  declared  that  Encisco  should  no  longer 
govern  the  little  colony,  as  he  himself  was  much 
more  fit  to  be  governor.  Most  of  the  party 
agreed  to  this,  and  so  Balboa  became  governor, 
and  a  very  cruel,  bloody  tyrant  he  proved.  All 
the  Indians  around  feared  and  hated  him,  and 
even  his  own  men  could  not  love  him,  and  only 
respected  his  courage. 

One  day  the  son  of  an  Indian  chief  came  to 
Balboa  and  told  him  that  some  days'  journey 
away  there  lay  a  great  sea,  and  on  the  other 


VASCO   NUNEZ  DE   BALBOA. 


side  of  it  a  country  so  rich  that  the  people  ate 
and  drank  out  of  gold  and  silver  dishes.  The 
Spaniards  in  those  days  were  ready  to  believe 
anything  that  the  Indians  said,  and  if  Balboa 
had  heard  that  the  new  sea  was  full  of  golden 
islands,  and  that  the  clouds  rained  diamonds 
and  rubies  into  its  depths,  and  that  its  waves 
threw  pearls  and  corals  on  its  beach,  he  would 
almost  have  believed  it  all ;  and  when  he  heard 
this  wonderful  news  he  immediately  gathered 
his  men  together  and  started  off  to  find  the  new 
sea. 

Again  they  had  to  fight  tribe  after  tribe  of 
Indians,  who  constantly  tried  to  make  them 
turn  back,  but  the  Spaniards  pushed  on,  and 
after  a  hard  journey,  which  took  them  quite 
across  the  Isthmus  of  Darien,  came  one  day  to 
a  high  mountain,  from  whose  top  the  guide  said 
the  great  sea  could  be  seen. 

Balboa  ordered  all  his  men  to  stay  below, 
while  he  climbed  up  the  mountain  alone,  as  he 
wished  to  be  the  first  Spaniard  to  look  upon  the 
great  ocean  that  so  many  brave  adventurers  had 
tried  to  find.     So  Balboa  went  alone  up  on  the 


82  VASCO   NUNEZ   DE   BALBOA. 

mountain  peak,  and,  looking  down  on  the  other 
side,  saw  a  vast  body  of  water  stretching  away 
and  away.  The  Indian's  story  had  been  true. 
Here  was  a  great  new  ocean  that  no  European 
had  ever  looked  upon  before.  Balboa  looked 
north  and  south  and  west,  and  saw  only  this 
blue  sea,  shining  and  peaceful,  as  if  its  waves 
had  gone  to  sleep. 

Balboa  knelt  down  on  the  mountain-top  and 
thanked  God  that  he  had  been  permitted  to 
make  this  great  discovery,  and  then  he  beck- 
oned to  his  followers,  who  came  rushing  up  and 
stood  looking  in  wonder  at  the  great  sight  be- 
neath them. 

The  men  piled  up  heaps  of  stone  in  token 
that  they  had  taken  possession  of  the  country 
and  ocean,  and  as  they  went  down  the  slopes  of 
the  mountain,  Balboa  carved  the  name  of  Fer- 
dinand upon  the  trunks  of  trees.  Then  twelve 
men  were  sent  on  ahead  to  find  the  shortest 
path  to'  the  shore,  and  Balboa,  cruel  as  ever, 
gave  orders  that  all  the  natives  they  should 
meet  should  be  tortured  and  killed  unless  they 
would  tell  them  where  their  stores  of  gold  were 


VASCO   NUNEZ  DE  BALBOA.  83 

hidden.  The  twelve  men  went  on,  and  reaching 
the  shore,  saw  two  Indian  canoes  that  had  been 
washed  up  on  the  beach  by  the  waves,  and  as 
the  tide  crept  up  and  floated  them  off,  two  of  the 
men — Alonzo  Martin  and  Blaze  de  Atienza — - 
stepped  into  them,  thus  being  the  first  Spaniards 
to  sail  upon  the  new  ocean  which  Balboa  had 
named  the  South  Sea.  A  few  days  after,  Bal- 
boa arrived  at  the  shore,  and  wading  into  the 
water,  waved  his  sword  solemnly,  and  took  pos- 
session of  all  the  great  ocean,  and  the  islands 
that  might  be  in  it,  and  the  countries  that  bor- 
dered it,  in  the  name  of  the  King  of  Spain,  and 
vowed  to  defend  them  against  all  other  Eu- 
ropean adventurers. 

This  was  in  the  year  15 13,  one  year  after  the 
discovery  of  Florida.  And  so  Spain  claimed 
the  Pacific  as  well  as  the  Atlantic  coast  of 
North  America. 

The  news  of  this  great  discovery  at  once 
made  Balboa  famous.  All  over  Europe  men 
talked  of  the  bold  man  who  had  been  the  means 
of  adding  still  more  glory  to  the  Spanish  name, 
and  as  a  reward  for  his  services,  the  king  made 


84  VASCO   NUNEZ   DE   BALBOA. 

him  Adelantado,  or  chief  ruler,  over  all  the  great 
sea  he  had  discovered. 

But  among  the  Spaniards  in  Darien,  Balboa 
was  very  much  feared,  and  now  that  he  was  in 
such  great  favor  at  the  Spanish  court,  every  one 
dreaded  that  he  would  be  more  cruel  and  heart- 
less than  before,  because  he  had  so  much  more 
power.  And  besides,  his  companions  were  jeal- 
ous of  his  fame,  and  thought  that  the  honor  of 
discovering  the  South  Sea  belonged  quite  as 
much  to  them  as  to  him,  quite  forgetting  that 
but  for  his  courage  and  perseverance  they  would 
have  turned  back  long  before  the  sea  came  in 
sight. 

The  man  who  disliked  and  feared  Balboa 
the  most  was  Peter  Anias,  the  Governor  of 
Darien,  and  about  five  years  after  the  great  dis- 
covery, he  managed  to  get  Balboa  into  his 
power,  and  ordered  him  to  be  beheaded. 

This  was  done,  and  thus  perished  one  of  the 
greatest  of  the  Spanish  discoverers. 


CHAPTER  X. 

CABECA    DE     VACA. 

And  now  that  Florida  had  been  discovered, 
and  the  great  South  Sea  added  to  the  posses- 
sions of  the  Spanish  crown,  it  was  thought  it 
would  be  a  wise  thinor  to  settle  as  much  of  the 
New  World  as  possible,  so  that  when  all  its  treas- 
ures were  found  they  would  already  be  in  the 
hands  of  the  Spaniards  and  there  would  be  no 
trouble  about  it.  And  so  many  expeditions  were 
sent  out  from  Spain.  These  expeditions  always 
had  two  objects  in  view.  First,  to  get  what  gold 
and  silver  might  be  found  in  America,  and  sec- 
ond, to  find  a  short  passage  to  the  East.  Peo- 
ple had  never  given  up  believing  that  there 
must  be  a  short  way  of  getting  from  the  east- 
ern coast  of  America  to  India,  and  ship  after 
ship  was  sent  to  seek  the  strait  which  was  sup- 
posed to  lead  across  the  continent.  For,  impor- 
tant as  the  discovery  of  a  new  world  seemed,  it 


S6  CABECA  DE   VACA. 

was  considered  just  as  important  to  find  a  short 
way  to  the  East,  and  when  once  the  passage 
was  found,  to  sail  through  it  with  Spanish  ships 
and  make  its  wealth  a  part  of  Spain.  Very 
wonderful  stories  were  told  of  the  countries  in 
the  East — of  Cathay,  and  Mangi,  and  Cipango 
— which  had  been  visited  by  the  great  traveller, 
Marco  Polo,  and  the  man  who  could  find  the 
shortest  way  thither,  would,  of  all  men,  receive 
the  highest  honor  from  the  King  of  Spain. 
And  so  every  one  who  sailed  from  Spain  looked 
first  toward  America  and  then  beyond  it  to  the 
East.  And  no  wonder,  for  these  countries  were 
richer  than  Mexico  and  Peru,  more  fertile  than 
Florida,  and  more  beautiful  than  Fairyland 
itself.  There  was  nothing  in  the  world  that 
one  mio-ht  want  that  could  not  be  found  within 
the  borders  of  these  lands.  For  ages  and  ages 
this  kingdom  had  been  ruled  by  the  great  race 
of  Kublai  Khan,  and  these  monarchs  had  no 
other  thought  than  to  make  their  kingdom  the 
most  beautiful  and  glorious  of  the  whole  earth. 
They  had  built  great  cities,  and  strong  forts, 
and  extensive  highways ;  it  was  said  that  within 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  8/ 

the  Province  of  Mangi  alone  were  twelve  thou- 
sand cities,  all  within  a  short  distance  of  one  an- 
other. Chief  of  these  cities  was  Quinsai,  which 
covered  a  hundred  miles  of  ground.  On  one 
side  of  it  was  a  river,  and  on  another  side 
a  lake,  and  through  it  flowed  clear,  winding 
streams  spanned  by  twelve  thousand  beautiful 
bridges,  which  were  so  lofty  that  ships  passed 
under  them  with  ease.  The  streets  were 
wide  and  bordered  with  palm  trees,  and  fra- 
grant flowers  bloomed  all  the  year  round  in 
the  gardens  and  parks.  All  the  dwellings 
were  of  marble,  and  the  temples  and  palaces 
were  ornamented  with  precious  stones.  Ware- 
houses of  stone  stood  in  different  parts  of  the 
city,  filled  with  costly  merchandise,  silks  and 
velvets,  and  cloth  of  gold,  and  all  manner  of 
rare  articles  made  of  gold  and  silver  and  moth- 
er-of-pearl, curiously  and  beautifully  beaten  and 
engraved.  And  crystal  fountains  kept  the  air 
pure  and  fresh,  and  great  birds  with  gold  and 
silver  wings  flew  lazily  from  tree  to  tree,  and 
one  could  not  tell  whether  the  city  was  more 
beautiful  by  day,  when   the  sun    shone    down 


88  CABECA   DE   VACA. 

upon  it  and  brightened  the  marble  roofs  and 
charming  gardens,  or  by  night,  when  the  moon 
and  stars  were  reflected  in  the  lakes  and  rivers, 
and  when  the  fountains  glistened  white  in  the 
moonlight,  and  the  great  squares  and  lofty 
palaces  were  illumined  with  a  million  crystal 
lamps. 

Most  beautiful  of  all  the  palaces  was  that  of 
the  king,  which  stood  in  the  centre  of  the 
city  on  a  hill  overlooking  all  the  country 
round.  It  was  so  large  that  it  covered  ten 
acres,  and  its  wide,  lofty  corridors,  beautified 
with  groups  of  magnolia  and  palm,  seemed 
like  magnificent  avenues  stretching  from  one 
palace  to  another. 

Within  the  enclosure  were  groves  of  pine 
and  oak  and  many  rare  trees,  and  gardens 
filled  with  choicest  flowers,  and  lakes  on  which 
swans  floated,  and  in  whose  waters  rainbow- 
hued  fishes  darted  hither  and  thither.  The 
palace  itself  was  of  the  purest  white  marble, 
its  roof  was  wrought  in  gold  and  supported  by 
hundreds  of  pillars  of  pure  gold,  wonderfully 
adorned   in    azure   arabesque,    and  having  the 


CABECA  DE   VAC A.      '  89 

capitals  studded  with  precious  stones ;  and  all 
the  air  was  sweet  with  perfumed  fountains,  and 
ever)'where  it  was  continual  summer  from  the 
abundance  of  flowers  and  the  songs  of  birds. 

And  the  king  and  all  his  people  enjoyed 
their  beautiful  city  as  much  as  possible,  for  they 
were  so  rich  they  had  to  work  very  little,  and 
spent  the  greater  part  of  every  day  in  pleas- 
ant amusements.  At  any  hour  one  might  see 
pleasure  parties  on  the  lakes  and  rivers,  which 
were  always  covered  with  gilded  boats,  and 
barges  with  silken  awnings,  under  which  ta- 
bles were  prepared  for  banquets.  And  every- 
where through  the  city  were  scattered  invit- 
ing bowers,  where  the  people  sat  when  tired 
with  walking,  and  watched  the  long  proces- 
sion of  elegant  chariots,  luxuriously  fitted  up 
with  cushions  of  silks  and  velvet  and  drawn  by 
richly  caparisoned  horses.  And  besides  these 
every^-day  amusements  there  were  a  great  many 
days  held  sacred  to  the  gods,  when  there  were 
great  feasts  lasting  ten  or  twelve  days,  and 
when  ten  thousand  guests  were  entertained  at 
a  time. 


90  CABECA   DE   VACA. 


And  the  health  and  comfort  of  the  people 
were  provided  for  as  well  as  their  amusement, 
for  there  were  elegant  marble  baths,  and  a  num- 
ber of  fine  hospitals  for  the  care  of  the  sick,  and 
a  wonderful  system  of  lighting  the  houses  and 
palaces,  so  that  the  night  seemed  almost  turned 
into  day  again,  and  a  well-trained  fire-depart- 
ment, always  ready  to  act  at  any  moment,  and 
in  fact,  everything  that  could  be  done  to  make 
the  people  healthy  and  happy,  and  to  protect 
their  lives  and  property,  was  done.  And  all  the 
children  went  to  school  in  the  public  parks  and 
gardens,  for  in  that  beautiful  climate  it  never 
rained  or  was  cold,  and  so  there  was  no  need 
of  school-houses,  and  the  boys  and  girls  studied 
botany,  and  geology,  and  astronomy  out  of 
doors,  and  no  doubt  found  it  very  pleasant. 

And  Marco  Polo,  summing  up  his  descrip- 
tion of  the  wonderful  place,  says,  "And  this 
city,  for  the  excellence  thereof,  hath  the  name 
of  the  city  of  Heaven ;  for  in  the  world  there  is 
not  the  like,  or  a  place  in  which  are  found  so 
many  pleasures,  that  a  man  would  think  he 
were  in  Paradise." 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  9I 

And  all  the  other  countries  ruled  by  the 
great  Khan  were  as  rich  as  Mang-i.  In  Armenia 
were  tens  of  thousands  of  beautiful  cities  filled 
with  works  of  art,  and  out  in  the  open  country- 
were  wonderful  hot  springs  which  cured  all 
manner  of  diseases,  and  on  the  top  of  one  of  the 
high  mountains  Noah's  ark  still  rested.  And 
Cathay  also  held  many  rich  towns.  Among 
them,  Cambalu,  where  the  king  had  a  marble 
palace  with  a  roof  of  gold,  as  in  Quinsai.  And 
here,  ten  thousand  soldiers  guarded  the  palace, 
and  the  royal  stables,  wherein  stood  five  thou- 
sand elephants.  Great  public  roads  led  out 
from  Cambalu  to  all  the  other  cities  in  the  em- 
pire, and  along  these  roads  were  stationed  post- 
houses  where  the  king's  messengers  could  find 
rest  and  refreshment,  and  where  there  were  ele- 
gant apartments  in  which  the  king  himself  might 
rest  when  on  his  journey  through  the  empire. 
All  the  king's  errands  were  done  by  swift 
messengers,  who  ran  from  one  post-house  to 
another.  These  messengers  wore  belts  from 
which  hung  gold  and  silver  bells,  and  as  soon 
as  one  station  was  reached,  the  letters  and  mes- 


92         •  CABECA   DE   VACA. 


sages  were  given  to  another  messenger  and 
carried  on  to  the  next  station,  and  so  on,  the 
tinkhng  of  the  bells  notifying  the  waiting  mes- 
senger to  be  in  readiness.  And  so,  not  a  mo- 
ment was  lost ;  the  messengers  ran  swiftly  over 
the  fine  roads,  scarcely  noticing,  in  their  haste, 
the  beautiful  scenery  or  the  many  works  of 
art  that  adorned  the  way,  which  led  through 
deep,  shady  forests,  and  wide,  pleasant  mead- 
ows, and  over  the  numerous  rivers  and  canals, 
spanned  by  lofty  bridges  built  of  rare  stone  and 
costly  marble,  and  ornamented  with  rows  of  pol- 
ished columns  and  great  stone  lions,  and  curious- 
ly graven  images  of  gods,  and  men,  and  animals. 
The  roads  extended  from  one  great  city  to 
another,  joining  the  most  distant  places  to- 
gether, and  the  Khan  spent  a  summer  in  one 
place  and  a  winter  in  another,  and  every  city 
tried  to  outshine  the  rest.  In  the  summer 
months  the  Khan  spent  much  of  his  time  in 
his  palace  at  Ciandu,  which  was  as  magnificent 
as  Cambalu.  Here  the  palace  extended  over 
sixteen  miles,  and  ten  thousand  white  horses 
stood  in  the  king's  stables. 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  93 

All  this  country  was  guarded  by  soldiers, 
who  were  like  the  sands  of  the  sea  for  number, 
and  the  great  generals  were  held  in  such  esteem 
by  the  king  that  they  were  allowed  to  live  in  the 
most  magnificent  style.  They  all  sat  in  golden 
chairs,  and  rode  on  milk-white  horses,  and  trav- 
elled in  gorgeous  chariots,  or  in  beautiful  barges 
with  silk  and  velvet  awnings  to  keep  off  the 
heat  of  the  sun.  And  so  mighty  was  the  Khan, 
and  so  great  were  his  generals,  that  all  the 
other  countries  round  were  very  glad  to  live 
peaceably,  and  try  in  every  way  to  please  such 
a  powerful  monarch.  The  riches  of  this  coun- 
try were  beyond  description  ;  mountains  of 
turquoises  reached  to  the  clouds ;  the  lakes 
were  full  of  pearls ;  everywhere  were  gold  and 
silver  mines ;  the  rivers  sparkled  with  gold, 
and  the  valleys  were  rich  in  diamonds.  And 
everywhere,  too,  there  was  an  abundance  of 
choice  fruits  and  nuts,  and  rare  spices  which 
grew  in  the  gardens  all  the  year  round,  so 
there  was  no  lack  of  them  summer  or  winter. 
And  the  people  dressed  in  the  richest  stuffs, 
silk   and   velvet,    and    cloth    of  gold,  embroid- 


94  CABECA   DE   VACA. 

ered  with  pearls  and  turquoises  and  dia- 
monds. 

And  in  Cipango,  too,  which  lay  east  of 
Mangi,  out  in  the  sea,  could  be  found  the 
same  magnificence.  Here  were  palaces  and 
temples,  with  roofs  covered  with  golden  plates 
and  floors  paved  with  gold  and  silver,  and  here 
also  the  people  were  rich  and  prosperous  and 
happy. 

And  when  the  news  of  all  this  wealth 
reached  Europe  it  was  at  once  determined  to 
seek  those  far  lands,  and,  if  possible,  to  bring 
the  gold  and  pearls  and  diamonds  to  Spain  and 
France,  and  other  European  countries,  and 
many  expeditions  were  sent  out ;  but  none  of 
them  ever  reached  Cathay,  for  all  the  American 
Continent  and  the  great  Pacific  Ocean  lay  in 
the  way,  and  the  short  passage  to  the  East  was 
never  seen  except  in  the  dreams  of  some  daring 
adventurers.  But  it  was  years  and  years  before 
men  gave  up  searching  for  it.  France  and 
Spain  sent  many  men  to  look  for  it,  and  if  they 
did  not  find  Cathay  they  at  least  found  many 
curious   and  wonderful   things  in  America,  and 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  95 

SO  it  came  about,  after  a  while,  that  America 
itself  was  pretty  well  known,  and  many  at- 
tempts were  made  to  settle  it.  Spain  tried 
very  hard  to  establish  her  colonies  in  the  New 
World,  and  expedition  after  expedition  was 
sent  across  the  sea.  With  one  of  these  expe- 
ditions sailed  Cabeca  de  Vaca,  a  Spanish  noble- 
man, and  his  account  of  the  trials  and  misfor- 
tunes of  the  settlers  shows  how  very  difficult  it 
was  to  establish  a  Spanish  colony  in  America. 

The  expedition  was  commanded  by  Narvaez, 
who  landed  his  men  at  Tampa  Bay,  two  days 
before  Easter,  1528.  They  immediately  deter- 
mined to  leave  the  coast  and  go  into  the  inte- 
rior of  the  country  in  search  of  gold,  although 
De  Vaca  tried  very  hard  to  persuade  the  cap- 
tain to  remain  near  the  ships.  But  here  the  In- 
dians were  not  friendly,  and  the  country  farther 
away  was  said  to  be  rich  in  gold;  and  so  a  short 
time  after  landing,  a  part  of  them  started  off  to 
find  the  gold  region  which  the  Indians  said  was 
up  in  the  Appalachian  Mountains.  But  they 
found  travelling  through  this  strange  country 
very  hard  work.      Soon  after    their  arrival  at 


q6  cabeca  de  vaca. 

s 

Tampa  Bay  they  had  angered  the  Indians  by 
burning  the  bodies  of  some  chiefs  that  they  had 
found  in  a  Httle  village,  and  the  natives  now- 
tried  in  every  way  to  show  their  hatred.  They 
refused  to  act  as  guides,  and  the  Spaniards  had 
to  toil  through  swamps  and  rivers  and  forests, 
often  losing  their  way  and  always  in  danger  of 
attack  from  the  Indians.  At  length  their  food 
gave  out,  and  then  they  had  to  depend  upon 
the  fruit  that  could  be  found,  and  so  at  last, 
when  they  reached  the  little  Indian  village  of 
Apalachen,  they  were  quite  heart-sick,  and  glad 
to  find  shelter  and  rest.  They  found  no  one  in  . 
the  village  excepting  women  and  children ;  all 
the  men  had  fled  to  the  woods.  The  village 
was  built  in  the  fnidst  of  a  great  swamp,  and 
although  it  held  some  maize  and  other  pro- 
visions, they  soon  found  there  was  no  gold 
there,  and  that  all  their  long  journey  had  been 
in  vain.  And  then,  too,  the  Indians  kept  lurk- 
ing around,  and  not  only  attacked  them  and 
burned  the  wigwams  in  which  they  were  living, 
but  made  it  very  unsafp  for  the  Spaniards  to 
leave  shelter  at  all.     A  man  could  not  lead  his 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  97 

horse  to  water  without  being"  in  danger  of 
death,  and  as  this  kept  growing  worse  and 
worse,  they  decided  to  leave  Apalachen  and  go 
back  to  the  sea.  But  many  days  and  nights 
passed,  and  the  sea  seemed  as  far  off  as  ever. 
They  were  without  food,  and  had  to  depend 
upon  getting  maize  from  the  Indians,  and  as  this 
could  only  be  done  by  force,  many  battles  were 
fought  and  many  lives  were  lost,  and  besides 
this  trouble  many  fell  sick  and  died  from 
starvation  and  hardship.  But,  hard  as  it  was 
to  go  on,  it  would  have  been  harder  still  to  re- 
main, for  that  would  mean  certain  death  at  the 
hands  of  the  Indians  ;  so  they  toiled  on,  discour- 
aged and  hopeless,  and  at  the  end  of  fifteen 
days  found  themselves  at  last  at  the  sea-coast. 
But  it  was  not  Tampa  Bay,  and  no  Spanish 
ships  appeared  in  sight  on  which  they  might 
embark  and  sail  back  to  Spain  again.  And  the 
men,  quite  worn  out,  laid  down  on  the  sands  in 
despair,  and  doubted  if  they  should  ever  see 
their  homes  and  friends  aeain. 

But  after  a  little  while  their  courage  came 
back,   and  they  tried  to   think  of  some  way  of 


98  CABECA   DE   VACA. 

getting  back  to  the  ships  or  of  reaching  some 
Spanish  settlement.  It  was  impossible  to  think 
of  travelling  by  land,  and  at  length  they  de- 
cided that  they  would  have  to  make  boats  and 
put  out  to  sea  with  them.  But  how  hard  it 
seemed  to  undertake  boat-making  without  tools 
and  materials  !  It  was  thought  impossible  at 
first  to  do  more  than  make  some  large  rafts,  but 
by  and  by  they  discovered  that  their  spurs  and 
cross-bows  and  stirrups  could  be  beaten  out 
into  nails  and  axes  and  saws  and  other  tools, 
and  that  cordage  could  be  made  from  the 
manes  and  tails  of  the  horses,  and  that  the 
seams  could  be  caulked  with  palmetto  fibre 
and  pitched  with  pine  rosin ;  and,  in  fact,  with 
time  and  patience,  they  managed  to  build  five 
very  good  boats,  living  in  the  meantime  on 
horse  flesh  and  shell-fish  and  the  maize  which 
they  could  get  from  the  Indians.  When  at  last 
they  were  ready  to  start,  forty  of  the  men  had 
already  died  of  sickness  and  hunger  besides 
those  that  had  been  killed  by  the  Indians. 
They  kept  along  the  coast  for  some  weeks, 
hoping  to  reach  a  Spanish  settlement  on   the 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  99 


western  coast  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  but  they 
could  not  find  this  place,  and  as  it  was  not  safe 
to  land  anywhere  else  on  account  of  the  Indi- 
ans, they  had  a  most  wretched  voyage,  suffer- 
ing from  cold  and  hunger  and  drenched  with 
rain,  and  finally  separated  from  one  another  by 
a  fearful  storm  which  drove  the  boats  far  apart. 
De  Vaca's  boat  was  thrown  upon  an  island, 
and  so  hard  was  it  to  get  it  off  again  into  the 
sea  that  the  men  had  to  take  off  their  clothing 
and  wade  into  the  water  to  dio-  the  boat  out  of 
the  sand,  and  in  doing  this  many  of  them  lost 
their  lives ;  for  no  sooner  did  the  boat  touch  the 
water  than  it  was  upset  in  the  surf,  and  not 
only  were  some  of  the  men  drowned,  but  every- 
thing in  the  boat  was  lost,  and  De  Vaca  and 
his  friends  found  themselves  on  this  strange 
island  with  no  boat  or  food  or  clothing.  But, 
as  it  happened,  the  Indians  on  this  island  were 
kind  and  pitiful.  They  built  fires  to  warm 
the  sufferers  and  gave  them  food,  and  when 
after  a  few  days,  they  were  joined  by  some  men 
from  the  other  boats,  they  found  that  their  suf- 
ferings had  been  no   worse  than  their  friends', 


lOO  CABECA   DE   VACA. 

for  all  had  met  with  the  same  hard  fate.  They 
stayed  here  many  months,  and  one  after  an- 
other of  the  company  died,  until  only  De  Vaca 
and  three  others  were  left. 

These  four  remained  many  years  among  the 
Indians,  wandering-  from  one  tribe  to  another, 
always  trying  to  hear  of  some  Spanish  set- 
tlement where  they  might  meet  friends.  Some- 
times the  Indians  were  kind  to  them,  but  oftener 
they  were  treated  very  cruelly.  Several  times 
it  happened  that  they  were  taken  captive  and 
held  as  slaves,  and  then  their  lives  would  have 
been  most  miserable,  had  it  not  been  that  the 
Indians  grew  to  respect  them  because  they 
knew  so  many  things  that  they  themselves 
were  ignorant  of.  De  Vaca  and  his  compan- 
ions really  thought  that  they  had  the  power  of 
curing  disease  by  making  the  sign  of  the  cross, 
or  repeating  pater  nosters,  and,  as  in  some 
cases  the  sick  got  well,  the  Indians  grew  to  rev- 
erence the  white  men  and  hold  them  in  great 
esteem.  But  De  Vaca  and  his  friends  could  not 
grow  fond  enough  of  the  Indians  to  be  willing 
to  remain  among  them.    Their  thoughts  were  al- 


CABECA   DE   VACA.  lOI 

ways  with  the  land  of  their  birth,  and  so  they 
pushed  on  through  the  unknown  country,  Hving 
on  roots  and  nuts  and  the  fruit  of  the  prickly 
pear,  suffering  from  the  cold  and  heat,  from 
which  they  had  no  clothing  to  protect  them,  and 
always  in  danger  of  death  from  hostile  Indians. 
In  this  way  they  travelled  through  forests  and 
swamps,  across  prairies  and  deserts,  over  moun- 
tains and  rivers,  for  six  years,  and  at  last  their 
courage  was  rewarded.  They  came  one  day  to 
the  sea,  and  they  found  there  a  Spanish  settle- 
ment. Their  countrymen,  who  had  come  there 
for  gold  and  emeralds,  received  them  with  great 
kindness,  and  listened  with  wonder  to  the  story 
of  their  wanderings.  De  Vaca  learned  that  they 
were  now  on  the  coast  of  the  Gulf  of  California, 
and  that  they  had  travelled  from  Tampa  Bay, 
through  the  country  bordering  on  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico,  and  through  Mexico  itself  to  the  sea 
coast  on  the  other  side,  having  passed  over 
more  territory  in  North  America  than  any  other 
travellers  had  yet  done. 

De  Vaca  and  his  three  friends  returned  to 
Spain  as  speedily  as  possible,  where  they  were 


I02  CABECA   DE   VACA. 

received  as  heroes  of  adventure,  whose  romantic 
story  passed  from  place  to  place,  and  instead  of 
discouraging  others,  only  made  them  the  more 
eager  to  visit  those  strange  lands  themselves, 
for  every  one  felt  sure  that  if  he  had  been  in  De 
Vaca's  place  he  would  surely  have  discovered 
the  gold  and  silver  and  precious  stones  that 
were  supposed  to  be  hidden  away  in  the  ever- 
glades of  Florida,  or  in  the  mountains  of  Apa- 
lachen,  or  in  the  rivers  and  valleys  of  Mexico. 


THE    MESSENGERS  OF  MONTEZUMA. 


CHAPTER  XL 

HERNANDO  CORTEZ  AND  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MEXICO. 

High  on  the  table-land  of  Mexico  there 
was  once  a  beautiful  city  which  was  built 
partly  around  the  shores  of  a  lake  and  partly 
on  islands  within  the  lake.  It  had  broad 
streets  and  fine  buildings,  and  its  temples 
were  among  the  most  beautiful  in  the  world, 
the  principal  one,  that  which  was  devoted  to 
the  worship  of  the  sun,  being  ornamented 
with  gold  and  silver  and  precious  stones ;  here 
and  there  were  great  public  squares  around 
which  splendid  temples  were  built,  and  in 
the  centre  of  the  city  in  one  of  these  great 
squares  stood  the  temple  of  the  god  of 
war.  The  people  who  lived  in  this  city  were 
Aztecs,  a  tribe  of  Indians  very  different  from 
those  of  the.  Atlantic  coast.  They  worshipped 
the  sun  and  the  moon,  and,  above  all,  they 
worshipped  the  terrible  god  of  war,  in  whose 


104  HERNANDO   CORTEZ. 

honor  they  burned  the  bodies  of  the  enemies 
they  captured  in  battle.  The  temples  were  at- 
tended by  priests,  who  were  held  in  great  honor 
by  the  people,  and  in  every  temple  there  were 
little  boys  who  were  being  trained  to  the  priest- 
hood. On  great  festival  days  the  priests  and 
boys  and  all  the  people  would  form  a  grand 
procession  and  march  all  around  the  city,  sing- 
ing and  playing  on  instruments.  The  lake  on 
which  the  city  was  built  was  one  of  the  finest 
in  the  world,  and  the  Aztecs  were  fond  of 
building  floating  gardens  on  its  waters  ;  these 
gardens  were  very  beautiful,  with  flowers  of  all 
kinds,  and  vegetables  were  also  cultivated  in 
them.  The  palaces  of  the  king  and  nobles 
were  built  of  stone  and  of  great  size,  and  very 
elegant,  being  ornamented  sometimes  with  gold 
and  silver.  The  Aztecs  were  a  very  powerful 
people,  and  all  the  nations  around  them  were 
afraid  of  them  and  acknowledged  the  Aztec 
king  as  theirs  ;  and  everywhere  from  the  Pa- 
cific to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  were  great  roads 
leading  from  the  city  down  to  the  coasts,  so  that 
the  king  could  send  messages  at  any  time  from 


HERNANDO   CORTEZ.  IO5 

one  part  of  his  kingdom  to  another ;  all  over 
the  country  outside  the  city  were  great  fields, 
where  cotton,  corn,  wheat,  sugar,  coffee,  and 
other  thinofs  were  raised.  The  Aztecs  did  not 
dress  in  skins,  as  did  the  Indians  farther  north, 
but  they  wove  cotton  into  cloth  and  made  gar- 
ments of  that.  They  also  had  a  written  lan- 
guage and  wrote  their  history  down  in  books. 
The  name  of  the  king  was  Montezuma,  and  all 
his  people  loved  and  worshipped  him  as  a  god, 
and  when  he  looked  over  the  city  and  saw  the 
turrets  and  spires  of  the  palaces  and  temples 
glittering  in  the  sunlight,  and  the  floating 
gardens,  filling  the  lakes  with  beauty  and  fra- 
grance, and  the  fields  rich  with  harvest,  and 
the  green  forests,  stretching  away  to  the  base 
of  the  great  volcano  whose  snowy  peak  shone 
in  the  golden  light  of  the  sun,  he  felt  that  his 
was,  indeed,  a  great  and  fair  kingdom,  beautiful 
and  strong  and  happy. 

But  the  riches  of  this  great  city  had  been 
heard  of  across  the  sea,  and  the  Spaniards,  as 
ever  eager  for  gold,  resolved  to  make  its  wealth 

their  own.     So  an  army  was  sent  from  Cuba  to 

s* 


I06  HERNANDO    CORTEZ. 

conquer  Mexico,  and  Hernando  Cortez  was 
made  its  leader.  Cortez  was  a  brave  soldier, 
but  a  cruel  and  treacherous  man.  In  the  year 
1 5 19  he  landed  his  troops  at  Tabasco  on  the 
southern  coast  of  Mexico;  he  found  the  natives 
prepared  for  war,  but  they  were  soon  glad  to 
fly  from  the  Spaniards,  leaving  many  of  their 
number  killed.  Cortez  then  went  on  to  Vera 
Cruz,  where  Montezuma  had  sent  messengers 
to  meet  him ;  these  messengers  brought  with 
them  magnificent  presents  of  gold  and  jewels 
which  they  gave  to  the  Spaniards,  at  the  same 
time  trying  to  persuade  them  to  go  away  from 
their  country.  But  Cortez  would  not  go  away ; 
he  said  he  was  going  to  the  City  of  Mexico  to 
see  Montezuma  himself,  as  the  King  of  Spain 
had  ordered  him  to  do,  and  for  fear  his  soldiers 
would  not  go  with  him,  he  burned  all  his  ships 
so  they  could  not  go  back  to  Cuba  if  they 
wanted  to. 

The  Aztecs  returned  to  Montezuma  and 
told  him  that  the  Spaniards  were  on  their  way 
to  his  city.  Montezuma  did  not  know  what  to 
do  ;  for  although  he  was  a  good  and  kind  king, 


HERNANDO    CORTEZ.  107 

he  was  not  a  great  soldier.  He  sent  other 
messengers  and  more  presents,  and  command- 
ed Cortez  to  go  back,  but  Cortez  pressed  on. 
Now  among  the  Aztecs  there  was  a  tradition 
that,  hundreds  of  years  before,  their  country- 
had  been  visited  by  a  glorious  stranger  from 
the  East,  a  child  of  the  sun,  who  had  taught 
them  how  to  till  the  ground,  and  all  the  arts 
of  peace  and  war ;  and  he  lived  with  them 
many  years,  and  they  loved  him  and  wor- 
shipped him  as  a  god,  and  the  stranger  was 
very  beautiful  to  look  upon,  with  hair  like  the 
sunlight  and  eyes  as  bright  as  the  stars,  and 
his  skin  was  as  white  as  the  snow  which  glis- 
tened on  the  tops  of  the  volcanoes.  And  one 
day  he  called  the  Indians  around  him  and  told 
them  that  he  must  go  away  forever,  but  that 
some  time  in  the  years  to  come  a  race  would 
come  from  the  East,  children  of  the  sun  like 
himself,  and  that  they  would  demand  the  Aztec 
Kingdom  for  their  own,  and  that  it  would  do 
no  good  for  the  Indians  to  fight  these  stran- 
gers, for  they  were  the  children  of  the  sun 
and   could   conquer    all   before    them ;   and  so 


I08  HERNANDO   CORTEZ. 

saying,  the  stranger  from  the  East  vanished 
from  their  sight,  and  they  saw  him  no  more, 
though  they  mourned  for  him  many  days  ;  for 
he  had  gone  into  the  mysterious  West,  whence 
the  sun  goes  at  night,  for  all  things  that  come 
from  the  East  find  a  home  at  last  in  the  land  of 
the  sunsetting,  but  save  the  sun  himself,  noth- 
ing ever  comes  back  from  that  land,  but  all 
things  remain  forever  hidden  by  the  shadows 
which  lie  on  its  borders. 

And  so  when  Montezuma  heard  that  the 
Spaniards,  who  were  faired-skinned  and  light, 
compared  with  the  Indians,  were  resolved  to 
come  on  to  his  city,  he  thought  that  perhaps 
they  might  be  the  children  of  the  sun,  and  if  so, 
it  would  be  of  no  use  to  try  and  repel  them  ;  and 
when  at  last  Cortez  came  up  to  the  city,  he  went 
out  to  meet  him  and  gave  him  a  courteous  wel- 
come. 

The  Spaniards  were  rejoiced  when  they  saw 
the  beautiful  city,  for  they  thought  that  its  splen- 
did palaces  and  treasures  would  soon  be  theirs.. 
Montezuma  led  Cortez  into  the  city  and  gave 
him  a  large  and  elegant  building  for  his  quar- 


HERNANDO   CORTEZ.  IO9 

ters,  and  to  every  soldier  in  the  army  magnifi- 
cent presents  were  made.  The  army  was  quar- 
tered in  the  great  central  square,  near  the 
temple  of  the  god  of  war ;  it  was  in  the  winter, 
and  for  a  month  Cortez  remained  quiet ;  he  and 
his  soldiers  were  allowed  to  go  about,  and  were 
even  permitted  to  enter  the  temples  and  exam- 
ine the  altars  and  shrines,  where  the  Mexicans 
offered  up  human  beings  every  day  as  sacrifices 
to  their  gods.  But  the  thing  that  interested  the 
Spanish  general  most  were  the  vast  treasures 
of  gold  and  silver,  the  huge  storehouses  filled 
with  provisions,  and  the  great  arsenals  filled 
with  bows  and  arrows.  He  saw  that  the  Aztecs 
were  well  prepared  for  war,  and  began  to  grow 
a  little  alarmed  for  his  own  safety.  He  knew 
that  by  lifting  his  finger  Montezuma  could  fill 
all  the  squares  with  armed  soldiers,  and  prevent 
the  Spaniards  from  leaving  the  city,  and  he 
knew  also  that  the  Indian  warriors  were  no 
longer  afraid  of  his  men,  as  they  were  at  first, 
when  they  thought  them  immortal ;  so  thinking 
over  all  these  things,  Cortez  resolved  upon  a 
bold  plan.     He  knew  that  if  he  could  get  pos- 


no  HERNANDO   CORTEZ. 

session  of  Montezuma  the  people  would  be 
afraid  to  make  war  on  him ;  so,  one  day,  he 
asked  Montezuma  into  his  quarters,  and  then 
refused  to  let  him  go  out  again,  saying  that  he 
would  kill  him  if  the  people  should  attack  the 
Spaniards. 

Cortez  was  now  obliged  to  leave  Mexico  for 
a  short  time  to  oppose  a  force  that  had  been 
sent  aofainst  him  from  Cuba.  While  he  was 
gone,  Alvarado,  the  general  he  left  in  com- 
mand, attacked  the  Mexicans  one  day  when 
they  were  celebrating  a  great  feast,  and  killed 
five  hundred  of  their  priests  and  leaders.  The 
Aztecs  became  furious,  and  attacked  the  palace 
where  Alvarado  and  his  men  were,  and  they 
would  soon  have  conquered  the  Spaniards  had 
not  Cortez  come  back  just  in  time. 

Cortez  tried  to  make  peace,  but  the  Mexi- 
cans would  not  listen  to  him.  In  a  few  days 
the  fighting  began  all  over  the  city,  and  the 
streets  were  stained  with  the  blood  of  tens  of 
thousands.  Then  Cortez  compelled  Monte- 
zuma to  go  upon  the  top  of  the  palace,  in  front 
of  the  great  square,  and  ask  his  people  to  make 


HERNANDO    CORTEZ.  Ill 

peace  with  the  Spaniards.  The  Aztecs  wor- 
shipped Montezuma  as  a  god,  and  when  they 
saw  him  standing  on  the  palace  roof,  they 
dropped  their  weapons  on  the  ground,  and  ev- 
ery head  was  bowed  with  reverence.  But  when 
he  asked  them  to  make  peace  with  the  Span- 
iards, they  grew  very  angry  and  immediately 
began  fighting  again.  Montezuma  was  wounded 
twice  by  their  arrows,  which  so  alarmed  the  Az- 
tecs, that  they  stopped  fighting  again  ;  but  soon 
the  battle  re-commenced,  and  in  a  few  days 
Cortez  was  compelled  to  leave  the  city.  In  the 
meantime,  Montezuma  had  died  in  the  Spanish 
camp  ;  the  Spaniards  had  treated  him  kindly  to- 
ward the  end,  and  had  nursed  his  wounds,  but  he 
refused  to  take  any  food,  and  died  at  last  from 
a  broken  heart.  Cortez  now  saw  that  there 
would  have  to  be  a  great  battle  fought,  so  he 
made  ready  his  men.  On  the  morning  of  the 
battle  he  looked  out  from  his  camp  and  saw  the 
Mexican  soldiers  extending  as  far  as  the  eye 
could  reach  ;  he  trembled  when  he  saw  this 
great  army  of  men,  knowing  that  his  own  troops 
were  few,  but  he  resolved  to  conquer  or  die. 


112  HERNANDO   CORTEZ. 

Without  giving  his  men  time  to  think,  he  began 
to  attack  the  enemy ;  at  first  the  Aztecs  gave 
way,  but  others  came  in  their  stead,  for  the 
whole  valley  was  lined  with  armed  Indians.  The 
Spaniards  gave  up  hope,  and  prepared  to  die, 
but  just  then,  Cortez  advanced  to  the  Mexican 
standard-bearer  and  snatched  the  sacred  stand- 
ard from  his  hand.  The  Mexicans  believed  that 
on  this  standard  depended  the  fate  of  every  bat- 
tle, and  that  if  it  were  captured,  there  was  no 
use  in  fighting  any  longer.  Cortez  knew  this, 
and  when  they  saw  it  in  his  hands,  they  threw 
down  their  arms  and  fled  to  the  mountains,  and 
thus  the  Spaniards  won  the  battle. 

And  so  Cortez  conquered  Mexico,  and  all  its 
vast  wealth  passed  into  the  hands  of  the  Span- 
iards ;  its  fertile  valleys  and  rich  plains,  its 
beautiful  capital  and  prosperous  villages,  its 
great  mines  of  gold  and  silver,  its  thousands 
and  thousands  of  inhabitants,  all  became  the 
property  of  the  King  of  Spain,  a  man  who 
cared  nothing  for  the  conquered  people,  but 
thought  only  of  the  great  wealth  that  had  so 
unjustly    become    his.       The    gold    and    silver 


HERNANDO   CORTEZ.  II3 

mines  of  Mexico  were  then  the  richest  in  the 
world,  and  the  conquered  Aztecs  were  obhged 
to  work  in  these  mines  as  slaves,  but  the  gold 
and  silver  was  no  longer  used  to  ornament 
their  temples  and  palaces  ;  it  was  sent  across 
the  sea  to  Spain,  who  thought  more  of  gold 
than  she  did  of  honor  or  justice. 

It  was  in  the  year  1521  that  Cortez  con- 
quered Mexico,  and  for  three  hundred  years  it 
was  ruled  by  Spain  ;  at  the  end  of  that  time  it 
became  again  free.  The  Mexicans  of  to-day 
are  partly  Indians  and  partly  Spanish  in  race, 
but  there  are  some  who  remember  with  pride 
that  they  are  the  descendants  of  the  ancient 
Aztecs,  and  they  point  to  the  ruins  of  the  great 
temples,  which  may  still  be  seen  in  the  new  Cap- 
ital, as  an  instance  of  the  wealth  and  power  of 
their  nation  when  the  Aztecs  ruled  from  ocean 
to  gulf,  and  when  from  mountain  peak  to  lowest 
valley  every  heart  beat  with  pride  in  thinking  of 
the  glory  of  the  kingdom  which  Montezuma 
called  his  own. 


CHAPTER   XII. 

PIZARRO  AND  THE  CONQUEST  OF  PERU. 

Francisco  Pizarro  was  a  little  Spanish 
boy  who  was  very  poor  and  very  miserable. 
Living  in  a  beautiful  valley  where  the  climate 
was  agreeable,  and  where  one  might  gather 
grapes  and  chestnuts  and  oranges  at  will,  it 
might  have  been  quite  possible  for  him  to  be 
poor  and  happy,  too,  but  there  were  many 
things  about  Francisco's  lot  that  were  harder 
to  bear  than  poverty.  Many  other  children 
dwelt  in  this  pleasant  valley,  some  of  them  as 
poor  and  wretched  and  ragged  as  Francisco, 
and  others  who  were  rich  and  well  clothed  and 
happy.  Not  far  from  the  little  hut  that  was 
Francisco's  home  was  a  stately  castle,  where  a 
great  duke  lived,  and  the  little  boy  would  often 
go  and  stand  by  the  stone  wall  that  enclosed 
the  grounds,  and  wonder  how  it  would  seem  to 
live  in   that  splendid  mansion,  and  be   allowed 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        II5 

to  walk  in  its  beautiful  parks.  Once  in  a  while, 
when  the  gates  were  opened  to  let  in  a  crowd 
of  gaily-dressed  visitors,  or  when  the  duke,  at 
the  head  of  a  laughing  party,  went  forth  on  a 
merry  hunting  expedition,  he  would  catch  a 
glimpse  of  the  velvet  lawns  and  shady  trees  and 
gorgeous  flowers,  and  could  see  children  dressed 
in  dainty  garments,  and  sometimes  wearing  beau- 
tiful jewels,  playing  on  the  grass  or  swinging 
under  the  trees.  And  Francisco  would  look 
and  look  with  eyes  big  with  wonder  till  the  gay 
party  had  passed  and  the  gates  swung  back  in 
his  face,  and  he  was  left  out  there  in  the  dusty 
road  alone.  And  then  he  would  turn  and  watch 
the  hunting  party  until  the  brilliant  scene  faded 
quite  away  in  the  distance,  and  he  was  once 
more  left  alone.  It  always  seemed  to  him  that 
no  matter  how  gay  or  happy  this  bit  of  the 
world  might  seem,  it  always  ended  in  his  being 
left  outside  of  that  gray  stone  wall,  alone  and 
hungry  and  ragged,  and  that  in  fact  these 
glimpses  of  another,  happier  life  were  only  after 
all  just  like  his  dreams,  which  were  sure  to  fade 
away  when  morning  came.     He  could  not  help 


Il6        PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

sighing  sometimes  and  wishing  that  the  dream 
would  go  on  for  him  just  as  it  did  for  the  other 
children  inside  the  stone  wall.  Once  it  did  go 
on  just  a  moment  or  two,  for  one  day  as  he 
stood  dejectedly  by  the  gates,  they  opened,  and 
a  beautiful  child  came  out  who  spoke  to  him 
kindly.  He  was  dressed  in  a  suit  of  velvet,  and 
his  long  hair  fell  in  curls  over  his  shoulders,  and 
in  his  cap  was  a  little  pearl  ornament  which 
fastened  a  bird's  wing.  And  Francisco,  as  he 
looked  at  the  wing,  thought  he  had  never  in  his 
life  seen  anything  so  wonderful,  for  the  feath- 
ers were  soft  like  velvet,  but  glowed  and  burned 
in  the  sunlight  like  the  rubies  in  the  ring  on  the 
child's  hand. 

He  raised  his  hand  and  touched  the  lovely 
object,  and  the  wearer  of  the  cap,  being  as 
kind-hearted  as  he  was  beautiful,  began  to  tell 
Francisco  the  story  of  the  wing — how  it  had 
been  given  to  him  by  a  great  soldier,  who  had 
brought  it  from  a  long  way  off,  farther  than  he 
himself  had  ever  been  ;  farther  than  the  moun- 
tains or  the  sea  even. 

Francisco   wondered  at  this,  and  when  the 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU,        11/ 

child  passed  on  he  stood  still  thinking  a  long 
time ;  it  seemed  so  strange  to  hear  that  there 
were  other  places  and  countries  besides  this  quiet 
little  valley  where  he  had  always  lived.  Then 
he  went  back  to  his  work,  disagreeable  work 
it  was,  very,  for  he  had  to  watch  the  swine  and 
keep  them -from  straying  off;  but  that  night  his 
dreams  were  brighter  than  ever,  for  he  dreamed 
that  he  had  visited  those  strancre  lands  that  he 
had  heard  of  from  the  child,  and  that  he  had 
found  enouQfh  treasures  there  to  make  him  rich 
and  o-reat.  The  morninof  came  and  the  dream 
was  gone,  but  it  left  behind  a  thought  that  did 
not  go  away.  And  always  after  the  boy  Fran- 
cisco carried  with  him  the  resolve  to  make  his 
dream  come  true.  But  for  many  years  there 
seemed  no  hope  of  anything  beyond  the  mean 
life  he  was  living,  and  sometimes  he  quite  de- 
spaired. He  was  very  proud  and  ambitious, 
too,  and  his  lowly  lot  in  life  seemed  all  the  more 
bitter  when  he  compared  it  with  that  of  the 
more  fortunate  boys  who  had  good  comfortable 
homes  and  could  go  to  school.  He  thought 
that  he   should   have  a  good  home  and  go   to 


Il8       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

school  too,  for  his  father  was  a  man  of  wealth 
and  of  good  birth  ;  but  his  mother  was  only  a 
peasant,  and  it  was  with  her  he  had  always 
lived,  and  the  poor  woman  could  not  afford  to 
bring  up  her  child  in  comfort,  or  even  to  have 
him  taught  to  read  and  write.  And  so  Fran- 
cisco grew  to  be  a  big  boy,  and  still  watched  the 
pigs  from  morning  till  night,  and  still  sighed 
restlessly  to  get  away  from  his  distasteful  life, 
and  find  one  fairer  and  nobler. 

One  day,  when  he  was  quite  a  big  lad,  a 
stranger  came  to  the  little  valley ;  he  was  an 
old,  weather-beaten  sailor,  and  had  sailed  across 
distant  seas  and  journeyed  through  many 
strange  lands,  and  at  night,  when  the  peasant 
boys  were  through  with  their  day's  work,  they 
all  eathered  around  him  and  listened  to  his  tales 
of  the  great  world  that  lay  beyond  the  moun- 
tains that  shut  in  their  quiet  little  valley,  just  as 
the  stone  wall  shut  in  the  duke's  palace. 

Francisco  listened  with  the  others,  but  his 
heart  beat  wildly,  for,  as  the  old  man  talked,  it 
seemed  that  he  was  again  in  the  land  of  his 
dreams.     And  no  wonder,  for  the  sailor's  stories 


PIZARRO    AND   THE   CONQUEST    OF    PERU.        I  I9 

were  very  wonderful  and  quite  true,  for  he  was 
one  of  the  men  that  sailed  across  the  ocean  with 
Columbus  on  his  first  great  voyage.  He  had 
seen  with  his  own  eyes  that  far-off,  beautiful 
land,  where  the  air  was  always  soft  as  the 
spring  in  the  valleys,  and  where  the  flowers 
bloomed  forever,  and  the  trees  bore  delicious 
fruits  ;  he  had  heard  the  reports  of  its  moun- 
tains of  gold  and  mines  of  precious  stones,  and 
rivers  whose  waves  tossed  gleaming  pearls  upon 
the  beach.  And  it  was  all  true,  and  all  this 
wealth  and  beauty  lay  there  waiting  for  bold 
hearts  and  brave  hands  to  claim  and  keep,  for 
the  people  of  that  far  country  were  only  poor 
savaofes,  knowinsf  nothincr  of  the  value  of  the 
gold  and  gems  they  wore,  and  were  so  ignorant 
that  they  thought  the  Spaniards  were  the  chil- 
dren of  some  great  god,  and  were  ready  to  fall 
down  and  worship  their  beauty  and  strength 
and  courage. 

And  the  old  man  talked  till  the  stars  came 
out,  and  the  moon  had  climbed  far  up  the  sky, 
for  never  before  had  there  been  told  such  won- 
derful news  as  this,  for  all  the  stories  of  the  fab- 


120       riZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

ulcus  wealth  of  the  East  had  come  true  at  last, 
and  no  one  could  doubt  any  more.  By  and  by, 
as  the  days  passed,  the  sailor  told  other  stories 
of  other  countries,  where  the  soldiers  of  Spain 
were  winning  great  victories,  and  although  his 
words  were  forgotten  by  most  of  the  boys,  yet 
Francisco  and  one  or  two  others  thought  of 
them  often  and  pondered  over  them,  and  thought 
what  a  fine  thing  it  must  be  to  be  a  soldier 
fighting  for  honor  and  glory.  And  as  time 
went  on  they  talked  more  and  more  about  this, 
and  at  last  they  resolved  to  leave  their  old  mis- 
erable life  behind  them  forever,  and  go  out  into 
the  world  and  seek  their  fortune.  But  they  had 
to  be  very  careful  and  secret,  for  they  meant 
to  run  away ;  the  summer  was  gone  and  the 
autumn  had  come  to  the  valley  before  the  three 
boys  found  a  chance  to  carry  out  their  plan, 
and  one  morning  when  Francisco  and  his  friends 
were  called  to  go  to  their  distasteful  work,  they 
did  not  answer,  for  they  were  far  on  their  way 
up  the  mountains,  and  had  said  farewell  to  the 
valley  forever.  It  was  pleasant  travelling 
through  the  hospitable  country  roads,  and  after 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        121 


they  had  gone  so  far  that  they  had  no  fear  of 
being  overtaken,  they  went  on  merrily  enough. 
Francisco's  heart  was  the  Hghtest  and  bravest. 
He  had  most  detested  his  old  life,  and  now  he 
most  rejoiced  that  it  was  past. 

So  the  boys  journeyed  on  and  crossed 
the  mountains  and  passed  through  the  fertile 
valleys  and  then  climbed  other  mountains,  and 
everywhere  the  kind  country  folk  gave  them 
food  and  drink  and  shelter,  and  the  young 
travellers  thought  they  had  never  had  grapes 
and  chestnuts  and  goat's  milk  taste  as  good  be- 
fore, as  they  ate  and  drank  under  the  trees  by 
the  road-side  or  in  some  peasant's  cottage ; 
and  by  and  by  the  journey  was  over,  and  they 
were  in  Seville.  And  now  the  runav/ays  found 
they  were  out  in  the  world  indeed.  No  one  in 
all  that  great,  splendid  city  cared  in  the  least 
whether  they  lived  or  died,  whether  they  suf- 
fered from  hunger  or  thirst,  or  whether  they 
had  a  place  to  lay  their  heads  at  night.  But 
they  kept  brave  hearts,  got  what  they  could  to 
eat,  slept  where  they  could  at  night,  and  spent 
the  days  in  wandering  through  the  streets  and 


122       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

getting  acquainted  with  the  hfe  of  a  great  city. 
And  although  they  were  not  sure  where  bread 
and  cheese  were  to  come  from  and  where  they 
were  to  He  down  at  night,  still  the  wonderful 
sights  of  this  new  life,  the  magnificent  houses, 
splendid  palaces,  costly  dresses,  and,  above  all, 
the  companies  of  mounted  soldiers  that  were  con- 
tinually parading  the  streets,  all  drove  thoughts 
of  home  from  their  minds,  and  they  did  not  re- 
gret in  the  least  that  they  had  exchanged  the 
village  of  Truxillo  for  the  glitter  and  show  of 
Seville. 

In  a  few  days  Francisco  decided  that  he 
would  join  the  army  and  go  to  Italy,  where- 
the  Spaniards  were  then  fighting,  and  as  the 
king  wanted  all  the  soldiers  he  could  get,  and 
as  he  was  large  and  well  developed  for  his  age, 
he  had  no  trouble  in  enlisting  in  one  of  the 
regiments,  and  when  he  put  on  the  gaudy  uni- 
form and  began  to  live  in  camp,  he  felt,  indeed, 
that  his  old  life  was  over  and  that  Francisco 
Pizarro  was  quite  a  different  person  from  the 
ragged  little  urchin  that  tended  pigs  at  Trux- 
illo. 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 23 


But  there  was  one  sad  thing  about  it,  and 
that  was  the  parting  from  his  two  friends,  for 
Pizarro's  regiment  sailed  very  soon  for  Italy, 
and  it  was  with  great  sorrow  that  he  said  fare- 
well to  the  two  companions  who  had  shared  the 
excitement  and  danger  of  his  escape  from  home. 
However,  the  noise  of  war  soon  drove  sad 
thoughts  from  his  mind,  and  so  eagerly  did  he 
enter  into  his  new  life  that  he  soon  became  one 
of  the  best  soldiers  in  the  regiment,  and  so  re- 
nowned for  bravery  that  by  the  time  the  war 
was  over  and  the  army  ready  to  return  to  Spain 
he  had  been  made  a  lieutenant.  This  only  made 
him  more  ambitious,  and  as  he  found  life  in  the 
city  very  stupid  for  the  next  few  years,  because 
there  was  no  fighting  to  be  done,  he  was  very 
glad  when  he  heard  one  day  that  a  great  expe- 
dition was  to  be  sent  out  to  America,  and  that 
any  one  who  was  brave  and  daring  might  join 
it  and  so  have  a  chance  of  gaining  riches  and 
fame.  He  hastened  to  Cadiz  at  once,  and  as 
his  courage  and  bravery  were  well  known,  had 
no  trouble  in  being  made  one  of  the  company ; 
and  when,  in  a  few  days,  the   ships   left  Cadiz 


124       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

and  started  on  their  long  voyage  across  the  At- 
lantic, Pizarro  thought  with  great  joy  that  he  was 
on  his  way  to  those  strange  lands  at  last,  and 
that  perhaps  his  old  dreams  might  come  true. 

The  voyage  was  a  stormy  one,  but  at  last 
they  came  safely  to  Hispaniola,  and  there  Pi- 
zarro learned,  what  all  newly-arrived  Spaniards 
were  not  slow  to  learn,  that  of  all  restless,  rov- 
ing lives,  those  of  Spanish  adventurers  were 
the  most  so.  They  were  never  content  to  re- 
main in  one  place,  but  went  hither  and  thither 
in  their  mad  search  for  gold,  always  hoping  to 
find  something  better,  and  always  ready  to  risk 
their  lives  for  the  sake  of  bettering  their  for- 
tunes. And  so,  no  sooner  had  Pizarro  become 
a  little  acquainted  with  the  country  at  Hispani- 
ola than  he  straightway  caught  the  mad  fever 
for  moving  on  to  some  new  place ;  and  as  there 
were  constant  reports  of  the  wealth  of  the  coun- 
tries of  Central  America  and  Mexico,  he  de- 
cided that  those  places  would  suit  him  better 
than  Hispaniola,  and  he  accepted  an  offer  to 
go  to  Darien,  meaning  to  explore  the  country 
and  see  for  himself  what  riches  it  contained. 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        125 

At  that  time  Balboa  was  also  living  in  Da- 
rien,  and  Pizarro  was  one  of  the  company  who 
went  with  him  across  the  isthmus  to  discover 
the  Pacific.  In  this  expedition  Pizarro  noted 
the  country  well,  and  was  rejoiced  to  see  the 
gold  and  gems  which  were  bestowed  upon  him 
by  the  friendly  chiefs,  and  when  he  returned  to 
Darien  he  was  very  willing  to  become  the  leader 
of  an  expedition  that  the  governor  of  the  colony 
was  fitting  out,  to  conquer  lands  on  the  Pacific. 
The  party  reached  the  ocean  in  safety,  and 
Pizarro  immediately  resolved  to  get  all  the 
treasure  he  could  before  any  other  Spaniards 
should  have  a  chance  to  come  there.  On  his 
former  visit  he  had  heard  from  the  natives  that 
there  were  great  quantities  of  pearls  to  be  found 
on  some  islands  lying  out  from  the  land,  and 
now  he  at  once  called  part  of  his  men  together, 
and  leaving  the  rest  on  the  shore,  started  out  in 
canoes  to  reach  the  islands.  The  sea  was 
heavy,  and  the  canoes  were  capsized  more  than 
once,  but  they  reached  the  islands  at  last,  only 
to  find  that  the  natives  were  thronging  the 
beach  ready  to  drive  them  off  as  quickly  as  they 


126       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

should  land.  But  Pizarro  was  not  to  be  driven 
back,  and  after  a  hard  fight,  the  Indians  re- 
treated to  the  woods  and  left  the  Spaniards  in 
peace.  They  began  their  search  for  pearls  at 
once,  and  found  them  in  such  quantities  that 
Pizarro  named  the  spot  the  "  Isle  of  Pearls," 
and  after  gathering  a  great  store  of  these  pre- 
cious gems,  and  securing  also  a  great  deal  of 
o-old,  he  went  back  to  Darien  with  his  treasures 
and  reported  that  the  country  was  as  rich  as 
Cathay  or  Mexico. 

The  governor  of  Darien,  on  hearing  this 
news,  thought  it  would  be  a  very  good  plan  to 
move  his  capital  from  Darien  across  the  isthmus 
so  that  he  would  be  nearer  the  riches  of  the  land, 
and  in  a  short  time  the  greater  part  of  the  col- 
ony were  living  in  Panama,  and  eagerly  watch- 
ing for  opportunities  of  gathering  gold  and 
gems. 

Here  Pizarro  lived  like  a  great  man.  He 
had  a  fine  house  and  a  long  train  of  Indian  ser- 
vants, and  flocks,  and  fields,  and  was  looked 
upon  as  a  rich  man  and  a  brave  soldier.  But 
he  was  not  quite  satisfied.     Often,  as  he  walked 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        12/ 

in  his  broad  fields,  he  would  look  toward  the 
north,  where  lay  the  land  of  Montezuma,  the 
land  that  Cortez  had  conquered,  thus  winning 
for  himself  lasting  honor  and  glory,  besides 
great  wealth,  greater  than  Pizarro  could  ever 
expect  to  gain  in  his  quiet  home  in  Panama. 
And  then  he  sometimes  looked  southward,  too, 
and  wondered  what  lay  there  beyond  the  blue, 
misty  horizon.  It  could  not  be  possible,  he 
thought,  that  Cortez  and  Balboa  had  made 
all  the  great  discoveries ;  perhaps  there  were 
other  lands  away  there  in  the  south  as  rich 
and  great  as  Mexico.  Perhaps  it  might  be 
his  good  fortune  some  day  to  discover  an  em- 
pire as  boundless  and  wonderful  as  that  of 
Montezuma.  So  he  pondered,  day  after  day, 
over  what  the  future  might  bring,  and  al- 
ways listened  eagerly  for  tales  of  the  lands 
to  the  southward,  where  lay  the  great  ocean 
that  Balboa  had  discovered.  And  one  day  a 
visitor  came  to  his  home,  who  told  him  just 
what  he  wanted  to  hear,  that  there  zvas  a  very 
great  and  powerful  empire  far  south  of  Panama, 
and  that  with  a  good  band  of  resolute  soldiers, 


128       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

and  a  brave  leader,  it  might  be  easily  conquered. 
And  as  Pizarro  listened  he  resolved  that  he 
would  be  the  leader  if  he  could  only  find  men 
enough  to  follow  him  on  his  perilous  under- 
taking. 

Very  wonderful  things  did  the  traveller  tell 
of  this  new  country,  for  a  very  wonderful  coun- 
try it  was,  and  as  Pizarro  heard  the  accounts 
of  its  wealth  and  prosperity,  it  seemed  to  him 
that  the  old  stories  of  Cathay  and  the  realms  of 
Kublai  Khan  were  actually  true.  And,  indeed, 
this  country  that  lay  to  the  south,  protected  on 
one  side  by  the  ocean,  and  on  the  other  by  its 
giant,  snow-capped  mountains,  was  more  like 
the  old  dreams  of  Cathay  than  any  land  that 
had  yet  been  seen  by  the  Europeans. 

The  empire  of  Peru,  like  that  of  the  Aztecs, 
had  existed  for  hundreds  and  hundreds  of  years, 
and  its  ruler,  the  mighty  Inca,  like  the  great 
Montezuma,  was  a  descendant  of  the  Sun.  He 
•was  therefore  held  in  great  reverence  by  his 
subjects,  as  a  child  of  their  great  god.  For  the 
sun  was  the  principal  deity  of  the  Peruvians. 
In  his  honor  were  built  the  most  splendid  tern- 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 29 

pies  that  the  world  has  ever  seen.  In  Cuzco, 
the  capital  of  Peru,  was  a  temple  of  the  sun  that 
was  so  magnificent  it  was  called  the  "  Place 
of  Gold."  The  walls  were  covered  with  solid 
plates  of  burnished  gold,  and  on  one  side  was 
the  image  of  the  sun,  made  of  purest  gold,  its 
face  glittering  with  diamonds  and  emeralds  and 
rubies,  and  the  long  golden  rays  reaching  from 
the  ceiling  to  the  floor. 

In  Cuzco,  also,  was  the  Temple  of  the  Moon, 
adorned  with  silver,  and  with  an  image  repre- 
senting the  goddess  of  night ;  and  all  the  ser- 
vice of  the  temples  was  of  the  purest  gold  and 
silver,  curiously  wrought  and  beaten,  and  the 
great  altars  were  ornamented  with  great  golden 
lilies  set  with  pearls  and  diamonds,  and  the 
lamps  were  brilliant  with  pendant  emeralds  and 
rubies  and  sapphires. 

The  Peruvian  empire  extended  from  Cuzco 
to  Quito,  and  everywhere  throughout  the  do- 
minion were  splendid  cities,  in  which  were  great 
palaces  and  temples,  all  glittering  with  gold  and 
silver,  and  all  showing  the  wealth  and  power  of 
the  Inca^     These  cities  were  connected  by  great 


I30       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

public  roads  that  led  from  one  end  of  the  empire 
to  the  other,  and  it  is  said  that  in  no  country  in 
the  world  were  there  such  fine  highways  as 
those  in  Peru.  The  roads  were  very  wide  and 
covered  with  a  substance  that  hardened  and  be- 
came very  smooth  and  even,  so  the  messengers 
could  run  easily,  and  on  either  side  were  mass- 
ive walls,  built  of  great  blocks  of  stone,  while 
inside  thenvalls  ran  clear  streams  of  water,  bor- 
dered with  beautiful  trees.  The  principal  road 
ran  from  Cuzco  to  Quito,  straight  on  through 
mountains  which  had  been  cut  away,  and  over 
rocky  precipices,  across  which  suspension 
bridges  were  thrown,  and  through  valleys  that 
had  been  filled  up  to  the  level  with  lime  and 
stones.  A  day's  journey  apart  on  the  roads 
stood  the  king's  palaces,  beautifully  furnished 
and  fitted  up  with  everything  that  a  traveller 
might  need,  and  so  pleasant  was  travelling  in 
this  country  that  a  long  journey  seemed  only  a 
succession  of  pleasant  trips  through  delightful 
forests  and  amid  grand  mountain  scenery.  And 
all  day  long,  up  and  down  these  roads,  passed 
the  servants  of  the  Inca,  carrying  messages  and 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        131 

burdens  from  one  part  of  the  empire  to  the 
other,  and  all  over  the  country  the  people  were 
busy  and  happy,  working  for  the  emperor  whom 
they  loved  and  revered.  There  were  no  poor 
people  in  Peru,  for  the  Inca  owned  all  the  land 
and  mines  and  palaces,  and  he  gave  to  each 
family  enough  to  support  them  comfortably, 
while  they  in  return  worked  for  him,  and  for  the 
weak  and  sick,  who  could  not  care  for  them- 
selves. The  men  worked  in  the  gold  and  silver 
mines,  and  on  the  public  roads,  and  built  the 
temples  and  palaces,  and  tilled  the  fields,  and 
raised  the  sheep,  the  wool  from  which  was  spun 
and  woven  by  the  women  into  beautiful  cloth, 
dyed  with  rare  colors,  and  interwoven  some- 
times with  threads  of  gold  and  silver.  And  al- 
though some  of  the  laws  were  very  strict,  yet 
for  the  most  part  they  were  just  and  merciful ; 
and  so  the  whole  empire  seemed  liked  one  great 
family,  of  which  the  Inca  was  the  loved  and 
trusted  head. 

On  great  festival  days  the  great  public 
squares  in  the  cities  were  thronged  with  the 
people  who  came  in  from  the  country  to  take 


132       PIZARRO   AND    THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

part  in  the  celebration.  And  there  were  many 
festival  days  during  the  year,  and  so  the  Peru- 
vians had  a  great  deal  of  pleasure,  for  on  a 
holiday  no  one  ever  thought  of  working.  The 
reason  of  this  was  that  most  of  the  festivals 
were  of  a  religious  nature,  and  it  would  have 
been  considered  a  sin  not  to  observe  them. 
The  most  splendid  festival  of  all  the  year  was 
the  Feast  of  the  Sun.  This  was  always  held 
at  Cuzco,  and  from  every  part  of  the  empire 
the  people  came  flocking  to  the  capital,  and  for 
days  and  days  before,  the  roads  were  filled  with 
travellers  on  their  way  to  the  great  feast.  The 
celebration  began  with  the  dawn,  and  as  soon 
as  it  became  light  the  inhabitants  began  to 
pour  into  the  great  central  square,  or  to  throng 
the  balconies  and  housetops  which  overlooked  it. 
All  the  city  was  gorgeously  decorated,  flags  and 
banners  floated  from  the  columns  and  roofs  of 
the  temples  and  palaces,  and  rich  cloths  of  daz- 
zling hues,  embroidered  in  gold  and  silver  and 
precious  stones,  hung  from  the  windows  and 
balconies,  while  everywhere  were  great  urns  of 
gold  and  silver  and  stone,  filled  with  flowers. 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF  PERU.        1 33 


and  rare  shrubs  and  plants  brought  from  the 
surrounding  country.  On  this  day  the  Inca 
appeared  in  his  greatest  glory  and  state.  Clad 
in  a  robe  of  the  softest  and  most  beautiful  ma- 
terial, embroidered  with  leaves  and  flowers  of 
gold,  and  with  a  collar  of  emeralds  around  his 
neck,  wearing  on  his  head  a  glittering  dia- 
dem from  which  floated  the  gorgeous  plumes  of 
some  rare  tropical  bird,  he  appeared  in  the 
midst  of  his  people  seated  on  a  throne  of  solid 
gold,  and  surrounded  by  all  his  great  nobles, 
whose  magnificent  appearance  added  still  more 
glory  to  his  own.  His  litter  was  borne  by  cour- 
tiers wearing  coronets  of  gold  and  silver,  and 
near  him  sat  the  principal  men  of  his  kingdom, 
whose  litters  were  carried  by  soldiers  dressed 
in  rich  and  showy  uniforms.  Behind  the  Inca 
and  his  nobles  came  the  soldiers,  wearing  hel- 
mets of  skin  studded  with  jewels,  and  clothed 
in  white  or  blue  tunics,  the  ofificers  bearing 
the  royal  standards  of  the  country,  which  were 
embroidered  with  gold  and  silver,  and  close  be- 
side the  Inca  walked  a  standard-bearer  holding 
the  imperial  banner,  upon  which  was  wrought 


134       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

a  rainbow,  the  symbol  of  royalty;  and  as  the 
great  procession  advanced  into  the  square  amid 
waving  of  banners  and  nodding  plumes  and  to 
the  sound  of  warlike  music,  the  people  all  fell 
on  their  knees  and  bowed  their  heads  and  paid 
homage  to  the  Inca,  the  child  of  the  sun.  And 
then  all  was  silent,  for  they  awaited  the  coming 
of  the  god  whose  day  they  celebrated,  but  as 
soon  as  his  first  rays  touched  the  snowy  heights 
of  the  lofty  Cordilleras,  a  great  shout  of  joy 
went  up  from  the  multitude,  who  welcomed  with 
hymns  of  praise  the  coming  of  the  mighty  god. 
Then  the  Inca  would  rise  from  his  throne,  and 
raising  high  in  the  air  a  golden,  jewelled  goblet, 
pour  out  a  libation  to  the  sun,  after  which  the 
procession  wound  slowly  to  the  temple,  where 
sacrifices  were  offered  of  sheep  and  birds  and 
flowers,  and  sometimes,  when  there  had  been  a 
great  victory  in  battle,  even  young  maidens  and 
beautiful  children  were  offered  up,  and  then 
after  many  other  ceremonies  the  people  left  the 
temples  and  passed  the  rest  of  the  day  in  sing- 
ing and  eating  and  drinking,  and  all  kinds  of 
merry-making.     There  were  many  other  festival 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 35 

days,  but  the  Feast  of  the  Sun  was  the  great- 
est, and  was  held  in  summer  when  the  days 
were  longest  and  the  god  remained  for  many 
hours  above  the  horizon. 

And  it  was  these  happy  and  contented  Peru- 
vians that  Pizarro  had  determined  to  conquer, 
and  it  was  their  beautiful  country  that  he  meant 
to  take  possession  of  But  much  as  he  desired 
to  do  this,  it  would  have  been  impossible  with- 
out* the  aid  of  two  good  friends,  who  helped 
him  with  money  and  influence.  One  of  these 
friends  was  a  bold  cavalier  by  the  name  of  Al- 
magro  ;  the  other  was  a  very  rich  priest  named 
Luque  ;  and  it  was  agreed  between  the  three 
that  Almagro  should  get  the  ships  ready  and 
enlist  the  men,  that  Luque  should  furnish  the 
money,  and  that  Pizarro  should  command  the 
expedition  and  conquer  Peru,  and  then  divide 
the  riches  of  the  conquered  country  equally  be- 
tween his  two  partners.  By  this  arrangement 
the  hardest  part  of  the  work  fell  to  Pizarro ; 
but  he  did  not  mind  that  at  all,  and,  in  fact, 
would  have  been  dissatisfied  had  it  been  other- 
wise,   while,    on    the    contrary,    Almagro    and 


136       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU". 

Luque  were  equally  willing  to  remain  in  Pana- 
ma ;  and  so  everybody  was  satisfied,  and  the 
preparations  began  at  once. 

Only  the  bravest  and  strongest  men  were 
chosen,  and  when  the  little  company  assembled, 
they  only  numbered  one  hundred  and  twelve ; 
but  this  did  not  discourage  Pizarro,  for  he  was 
determined  to  be  discouraged  at  nothing,  and  on 
the  17th  of  November,  1524,  after  an  imposing 
service  in  the  cathedral,  where  Luque  blessed 
the  commander  and  his  soldiers,  and  bade  them 
God-speed,  the  little  fleet  sailed  from  Panama 
and  started  southwest  on  its  voyage  of  con- 
quest. 

But  many  misfortunes  happened  to  Pizarro 
before  he  saw  the  coast  of  Peru.  The  way 
was  new  and  strange,  and  he  did  not  know 
how  far  off  Peru  was,  and  he  landed  many 
times  along  the  coast  in  hope  of  finding  a  path 
that  would  lead  to  the  great  empire,  but  found 
instead  only  marshes  and  deserts  and  tangled 
underbrush,  where  his  men  were  bitten  by 
poisonous  serpents,  and  where  they  suffered 
from  hunger  and  thirst  and  disease ;  and  years 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 3/ 

passed,  and  all  that  he  knew  of  the  coveted 
land  he  heard  from  some  Indians  dwelllnor 
along  the  coast,  who  wore  heavy  golden  orna- 
ments, and  said  that  a  great  and  rich  country- 
lay  back  from  the  sea,  governed  by  a  mighty 
ruler.  But  this  news  only  made  Pizarro  more 
eager  than  ever  to  carry  out  his  plan.  Al- 
magro  had  come  from  Panama  with  men  and 
provisions,  or  long  before  the  whole  party 
would  have  died  of  hunger  and  disease,  and 
then  Pizarro  sent  him  back  for  more  men,  feel- 
ing sure,  from  a  visit  that  he  had  paid  to  an  In- 
dian village  near  the  coast,  that  he  was  near 
Peru ;  but  the  Governor  of  Panama  refused  to 
let  Almagro  return,  and  instead  sent  an  order 
for  Pizarro  and  his  party  to  come  back,  as  he 
would  no  longer  allow  them  to  risk  money  and 
life  in  an  undertaking  that  promised  nothing 
but  failure.  It  was  three  years  since  Pizarro 
had  first  sailed  from  Panama.  Many  of  his 
men  had  died,  while  the  rest  had  suffered  cruel- 
ly from  hunger  and  exposure,  and  when  they 
heard  that  the  governor  had  ordered  them  to 
return  home  they  were  very  willing  to  do  so, 


138        PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

and  were  glad  enough  to  give  up  the  idea  of 
conquering  Peru.  But  Pizarro  himself  would 
not  give  up.  He  was  angry  and  indignant  that 
the  governor  should  command  him  to  give  up 
his  plan  at  the  very  moment  that  success  seemed 
certain,  and  he  said  that  he  would  stay  in  spite 
of  the  governor's  orders.  Then  he  drew  a  line 
in  the  sand  and  stepped  across  it,  and  said  that 
all  the  men  who  were  willing  to  stay  with  him 
and  go  on  to  Peru  should  step  across  the  line, 
too.  At  first  no  one  moved  ;  the  danger  seemed 
so  great  and  the  thought  of  home  so  pleasant ; 
but  at  last,  Luiz,  the  pilot,  who  had  always 
trusted  in  Pizarro's  luck,  stepped  across  the 
line,  and  others  followed  until  thirteen  were 
standing  by  Pizarro's  side.  They  were  few  in 
number,  but  their  hearts  were  brave,  and  the 
bold  leader  knew  that  their  courage  was  equal 
to  his  own. 

Then  the  rest  of  the  company  returned  home 
to  Panama,  and  Pizarro  and  his  little  band  were 
left  alone  on  the  Island  of  Gallo  without  even 
a  ship  to  take  them  on  their  journey.  The  island 
was  not  fit  to  stay  upon,  as   it  offered  neither 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 39 

food,  nor  shelter  from  the  frequent  storms 
that  burst  over  it,  and  Pizarro  thought  the 
better  plan  would  be  to  leave  it  at  once.  So 
he  gave  orders  for  the  men  to  build  a  raft,  and 
in  a  few  hours  they  had  finished  a  large,  strong 
one,  upon  which  they  placed  their  arms  and 
stores,  and  then  stepping  cheerfully  upon  it 
themselves,  pushed  away  from  the  island  out 
into  the  sea.  A  few  days'  sailing  in  this  way 
brought  them  to  another  island,  larger  and 
pleasanter  than  the  Island  of  Gallo,  and  here  Pi- 
zarro decided  to  land  and  wait  for  the  arrival  of 
the  ships  which  he  knew  Almagro  would  send 
to  his  aid.  The  Indians  were  friendly,  and  the 
island  was  well  watered  with  clear,  running 
streams.  The  men  built  huts  of  logfs  and  bark 
beside  one  of  these  pleasant  streams,  and  for  a 
time  they  were  very  comfortable.  Wild  cocoa- 
nuts,  pheasants,  and  rabbits  were  abundant, 
and  furnished  strengthening  food,  and  if  the 
pleasant  weather  had  continued  they  would 
have  been  quite  content  with  their  situation ; 
but,  after  a  few  weeks,  tempests  began  to  blow 
over  the  island,  beating  down  their  huts  and 


140       riZARKO  AND  THE   CONQUEST  OF  PERU. 

drenching  the  men  to  the  skin.  And  even  when 
it  did  not  rain  they  suffered  so  much  from  the 
intense  heat  of  the  sun  and  from  the  swarms  of 
mosquitoes  and  other  poisonous  insects,  that 
they  were  almost  in  despair,  when,  after  seven 
months  of  waiting,  the  ship  that  Almagro  sent 
appeared  in  sight.  The  vessel  brought  pro- 
visions, but  no  soldiers,  for  those  the  governor 
refused  to  send,  and  so,  without  waiting  for 
further  help,  Pizarro  started  with  the  ship  and 
eleven  of  his  brave  companions,  and  with  a  fear- 
less heart  turned  southward  ajjain. 

In  three  weeks  he  reached  the  Gulf  of  Guay- 
aquil which  washes  the  shores  of  a  lovely  and 
fertile  country,  and  pointing  across  the  waters, 
the  Indian  interpreters  that  Pizarro  had  brought 
from  the  North,  told  him  that  there  lay  a  part 
of  the  great  empire  of  Peru,  which  he  had  so 
long  been  seeking.  Here  he  found,  the  next 
morning,  a  large  and  prosperous  town,  very 
different  from  any  he  had  yet  seen  on  the  South 
American  coast.  This  town,  the  name  of  which 
was  Tumbez,  was  within  the  Inca's  dominions, 
and  was  therefore  as  fine  and  wealthy  as  many 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        14I 

of  those  farther  from  the  coast.  Pizarro  was 
surprised  to  see  such  magnificent  temples  and 
palaces,  such  fine  houses  and  well-kept  roads, 
and,  above  all,  such  intelligent  and  fine-looking 
people.  They  came  fiocking  down  to  the  shore 
to  see  the  curious  ship  that  the  strangers  had 
come  in,  and  the  Spaniards  noticed  that  they 
wore  garments  of  finely  woven  material,  and 
were  adorned  with  rings,  bracelets,  and  chains 
of  gold,  and  wore  large  and  brilliant  gems  in 
their  ears.  Pizarro  made  friends  with  the  In- 
dians by  means  of  his  interpreters,  and  sent  a 
message  to  the  o-overnor  of  the  town,  askine 
for  provisions  and  for  leave  for  one  of  his  men 
to  visit  the  town. 

Both  of  these  wishes  were  granted  ;  the  gov- 
ernor sent  immediately  a  large  store  of  ban- 
anas, pineapples,  and  other  fruits,  besides 
meats  and  fish,  with  permission  to  Pizarro  to 
send  one  of  his  men  to  visit  the  town.  The 
governor  also  sent  one  of  the  chief  men  to  wel- 
come the  strangers,  and  thus  Pizarro  saw  for 
the  first  time  one  of  the  nobles  of  the  empire  he 
had  come   to  conquer.     He   saw  at  once   that 


142       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

these  people  were  very  different  from  the  sav- 
ages of  the  West  Indies,  or  Atlantic  coast,  and 
that  this  courteous  stranger,  with  his  noble 
bearing  and  rich  dress,  belonged  to  a  far  higher 
race  than  the  half-clothed  Indians  of  Panama. 
So  he  resolved  to  be  as  friendly  as  possible  with 
these  people,  and  not  let  them  imagine  for  a 
moment  that  he  had  come  on  a  hostile  errand. 
He  received  the  nobleman  very  politely  and  in- 
vited him  to  dinner,  and  on  his  departure,  gave 
him  handsome  presents.  But  the  next  morning, 
when  the  Spaniard  Molino  went  on  shore, 
Pizarro  told  him  to  notice  carefully  everything 
about  the  town,  its  size  and  wealth  and  means 
of  defence,  for  he  was  more  determined  than 
ever  to  be  called  the  Conqueror  of  Peru. 

Molino  was  accompanied  by  a  negro  servant 
who  carried  some  presents  for  the  governor, 
and  as  the  Indians  had  never  seen  a  negro  be- 
fore, they  looked  at  him  very  curiously,  and  tried 
to  rub  the  black  off  with  their  fingers.  And 
they  also  looked  very  curiously  at  the  white 
man,  for  he  was  as  strange  to  them  as  the  ne- 
gro ;  and  they  thought  that  the  people  from  be- 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        143 

yond  the  sea,  Ayith  their  white  skin  and  fair  hair, 
must  belonof  to  a  fjreat  and  wonderful  race. 
MoHno  was  well  received  by  the  governor, 
whom  he  found  living'  in  a  fine  mansion,  guarded 
by  soldiers  in  handsome  uniforms,  and  attended 
by  servants  in  livery,  who  served  his  meals 
upon  golden  dishes.  Everywhere  the  Spaniard 
saw  riches  and  prosperity,  and  his  account  of 
the  splendid  temples  and  palaces  made  Pizarro's 
heart  beat  high  with  hope.  The  next  day  he 
sent  another  Spaniard,  Candia,  to  visit  the  town, 
and  his  report  was  as  satisfactory  as  that  of 
Molino.  Pizarro  was  satisfied  that  he  had 
reached  the  empire  of  Peru  at  last,  and  taking  a 
friendly  farewell  of  the  inhabitants  of  Lumbez, 
sailed  alonsf  down  the  coast  to  see  still  more  of 
this  marvellous  country.  Everywhere  he  landed 
he  was  delighted  to  find  the  country  as  rich  and 
prosperous  as  at  Tumbez,  and  at  length  turned 
his  vessel  homeward,  well  supplied  with  pro- 
visions for  the  voyage,  and  with  a  large  quan- 
tity of  gold  and  jewels,  which  he  intended  to 
show  his  friends  in  Panama  in  proof  that  he  had 
really  discovered  the  land  of  his  dreams.    Stop- 


144       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

ping  at  Tumbez  again,  he  left  Molino,  and  one 
or  two  more  of  his  men  there,  and  taking 
two  of  the  inhabitants  with  him,  sailed  away, 
carrying  the  good  wishes  of  the  people  with 
him,  and  with  high  hope  of  a  speedy  return. 

But  on  his  arrival  at  Panama  he  found  the 
governor  still  unwilling  to  let  another  fleet  be 
fitted  out  for  the  conquest  of  Peru,  and  Alma- 
gro,  and  Luque,  and  Pizarro,  after  talking  it 
over,  decided  that  the  best  thing  to  do  would 
be  to  get  permission  of  the  king  himself,  and 
then  the  governor  could  not  hinder  them.  So 
Pizarro  sailed  off  to  Spain,  which  he  reached 
safely  after  a  quick  voyage,  and  as  his  name 
was  now  well  known  in  Spain,  the  emperor  sent 
for  him  to  come  to  court,  so  that  he  might  hear 
his  adventures. 

Spain  was  at  that  time  the  greatest  country 
in  the  world;  the  emperor,  Charles  V.,  son  of 
Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  ruled  over  Spain,  Ger- 
many, and  the  Netherlands  ;  a  Spanish  adven- 
turer had  discovered  the  Pacific  Ocean  and 
added  its  shores  and  islands  to  the  possessions 
of  the  mother  country ;   Cortez  had  conquered 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        145 

Mexico  and  made  it  a  Spanish  province,  and 
everywhere  the  Spanish  name  was  renowned 
for  wealth  and  power ;  and  Pizarro,  when  he 
arrived  at  the  court  of  Charles  V.,  knew  well 
that  he  would  meet  there  some  of  the  most 
famous  soldiers  and  adventurers  in  the  world, 
and  he  felt  very  proud  of  the  honor  done  him, 
and  rejoiced  to  think  that  in  the  future  his  own 
name  would  shine  as  brightly  as  those  of  the 
famous  men  he  was  about  to  meet.  The  em- 
peror received  him  kindly  and  listened  atten- 
tively while  he  told  of  his  visit  to  Peru  and 
described  its  wealthy  cities  and  intelligent  in- 
habitants ;  and  when  he  added  that  the  principal 
cities,  which  he  had  not  seen,  were  even  richer 
and  finer  than  those  near  the  coast,  the  emperor 
readily  gave  his  consent  to  his  returning  there 
with  ships  and  men  and  everything  necessary 
for  the  conquest  of  such  a  great  empire.  And 
then  Pizarro  showed  the  king  and  his  nobles 
the  chests  of  gold,  and  caskets  of  precious 
stones,  and  beautifully  dyed  and  woven  cloths, 
and  the  llamas  and  Indians  he  had  brought  with 
him,  and  they  all  exclaimed  in  wonder  at  the 


146        PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

^ -i 

sight,  and  Cortez  said  that  just  such'  riches  had 
he  found  in  Mexico,  and  doubted  not  that  this 
new  land  was  as  wealthy  as  the  country  of  Mon- 
tezuma. And  so  no  time  was  lost  in  fitting  out 
a  fleet,  and  while  this  was  being  done  Pizarro 
took  the  time  to  ^o  to  Truxillo  and  see  his  old 
home  again.  He  found  all  the  country  people 
ready  to  welcome  him  and  do  him  honor,  for  he 

ft 

was  known  throughout  Spain  as  a  bold  soldier 
and  adventurer,  and  he  entered  his  old  village 
with  very  different  feelings  from  those  he  had 
when  he  ran  away,  barefoot  and  ragged,  some 
thirty  years  before.  The  old  castle  was  still  there, 
and  little  peasant  boys  still  watched  the  pigs  out 
in  the  fields  ;  but  with  him  all  was  different. 

His  father  and  mother  were  dead,  and  his 
four  younger  brothers  were  very  desirous  of 
going  to  America  with  him  and  seeking  their 
fortunes  in  that  wonderful  country;  and  as  he 
consented  to  this  they  all  went  with  him  to 
Seville,  where  the  fleet  was  being  fitted  out, 
and  when  the  ships  started  across  the  Atlantic 
the  bold  commander  knew  that  he  had  four 
men,  at  least,  that  he  could  trust  to  the  end,  and 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        14/ 

who  would  never  desert  him,  no  matter  how 
hard  his  fortune  might  be. 

Panama  .was  reached  without  any  mishap, 
and  then  all  was  bustle  and  confusion  until  ships 
and  men  were  ready  for  the  start.  Three  ves- 
sels were  bought,  and  with  about  one  hundred 
and  eighty  soldiers,  some  thirty  horses,  and  a 
good  supply  of  arms  and  ammunition,  the  little 
fleet  was  at  last  ready,  and  after  a  solemn  reli- 
gious service  in  the  cathedral  the  company  em- 
barked, and  Pizarro  found  himself  at  last  on  his 
way  to  conquer  Peru. 

It  was  in  the  winter  of  1531,  seven  years 
since  the  time  of  his  first  voyage  to  the  South ; 
then  he  was  ignorant  of  the  country  and  its 
dangers,  but  now  he  knew  the  coast,  years  of 
experience  had  taught  him  how  to  overcome 
its  dangers,  and  above  all,  he  had  friends  in 
the  inhabitants  of  Tumbez,  who  would  welcome 
him  gladly,  and  who  were  ready  to  believe  that 
he  was  as  great  and  powerful  as  he  wished 
them  to  think.  It  did  not  trouble  him  at  all 
that  he  meant  to  repay  their  kindness  and  trust 
with  treachery  and  murder. 


148        PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

In  two  weeks  they  came  to  a  pleasant  land- 
ing-place some  distance  north  of  Tumbez,  and 
after  sending  the  ships  back  to  Panama  they 
began  marching  southward.  The  way  was 
often  difficult,  and  they  had  to  cross  rivers  and 
pass  through  swamps  and  thickets,  but  Pizarro 
always  led  them  on,  cheering  his  men  and  hop- 
ing for  better  things.  On  their  way  they  passed 
an  Indian  village,  which  they  captured  without 
resistance  from  the  natives,  who  fled  in  dismay 
from  the  sight  and  sound  of  the  guns  ;  here 
they  found  a  great-  many  large  emeralds,  as 
well  as  much  gold  and  silver,  and  a  good  store 
of  corn  and  other  food,  and  after  plundering 
the  village  they  went  on  with  light  hearts, 
cheered  with  the  prospect  of  still  greater  wealth 
and  good  fortune  in  the  near  future.  The  char- 
acter of  the  country  now  changed  and  they 
found  themselves  passing  through  beautiful 
groves,  and  over  roads  bordered  with  trees 
bearing  delicious  fruits  ;  and  so  they  went  pleas- 
antly along  until  they  reached  the  gulf  of 
Quayaquil  and  saw  once  more  the  domes  and 
towers  of  Tumbez.     But  now  Pizarro  did  not 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 49 

come  as  a  friend,  but  as  a  foe,  and  his  only- 
thought  was  to  take  possession  of  Tumbez  and 
rob  it  of  its  wealth.  There  was  a  tribe  of  In- 
dians living  on  the  island  of  Puna,  just  opposite 
Tumbez,  who  were  bitter  enemies  of  the  peo- 
ple of  that  city,  and  as  soon  as  these  Indians 
saw  the  arrival  of  the  Spaniards  on  the  other  side 
of  the  bay,  they  seiit  a  party  over  to  ask  Pizarro 
and  his  followers  to  come  over  to  the  island  and 
stay  with  them.  Pizarro  knew  that  these  people 
were  unfriendly  to  those  of  Tumbez,  and  he 
thought  it  would  be'a  good  plan  to  make  friends 
of  them,  so  they  would  help  him  when  he 
attacked  the  city ;  so  he  accepted  the  chief's 
offer,  and  in  a  little  while  the  Indians  had  built 
some  large  rafts  upon  which  the  whole  party- 
was  taken  over  to  the  island  of  Puna,  whose 
chief  stood  on  the  shore  to  welcome  them. 
Here  they  were  given  pleasant  quarters  and  en- 
tertained with  choice  fruits  and  vegfetables,  and 
very  glad  indeed  were  they  to  have  this  chance 
of  resting  after  their  long  and  weary  march. 

But  one  day  one   of  the  Indian  interpreters 
that   Pizarro    had    brought   with   him  came  to 


I50        PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

him  and  said  that  the  natives  of  the  island  were 
planning-  to  attack  him.  This  at  once  raised 
Pizarro's  anger,  and  as  several  men  that  he 
sent  around  to  spy  upon  the  Indians  came  back 
and  said  that  the  story  was  true,  he  immediately 
ordered  his  men  to  fall  upon  the  natives,  and  in 
a  short  time  every  village  on  the  island  was 
plundered  by  the  Spaniards,  and  great  numbers 
of  the  inhabitants  slain.  And  then  Pizarro  de- 
cided to  go  at  once  to  Tumbez  ;  so  he  sent  the 
rafts  ahead  loaded  with  booty,  and  getting  as 
many  boats  as  he  could,  embarked  for  the  main- 
land. 

But  during  all  these  days  of  fighting  the 
people  of  Tumbez  had  made  up  their  minds 
that  the  Spaniards  had  come  back  as  foes  in- 
stead of  friends,  and  as  soon  as  the  rafts  came 
to  shore  they  seized  the  plunder  and  dragged 
the  men  to  the  woods  and  murdered  them  ;  then, 
in  great  alarm  lest  they  should  suffer  worse 
things  at  the  hands  of  the  Spaniards  than  the 
natives  of  Puna  had,  they  gathered  together  all 
the  valuables  they  could  carry  and  fled  to  the 
woods,  and  when  Pizarro  came  to  Tumbez  he 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        151 

found  its  streets  deserted,  its  treasures  carried 
off,  and  many  of  its  handsome  buildings  utterly- 
destroyed.  And  so  he  was  able  to  take  posses- 
sion of  the  city  without  losing  a  single  man  in 
battle,  and  when  after  a  few  days  his  scouts 
came  in  bringing  the  runaway  chief  with  them, 
Pizarro  decided  to  pardon  the  chief  for  killing 
the  Spaniards  who  had  been  on  the  rafts,  and 
to  let  him  collect  his  people  again  and  live 
peaceably  in  his  city  as  before. 

He  did  this  because  he  intended  to  go  at 
once  to  the  capital  of  Peru,  and  he  thought  in 
case  any  disaster  happened  to  his  army  it  would 
be  well  to  have  the  chief  of  Tumbez  friendly  to 
him.  The  chief  was  very  glad  to  gather  his 
people  together  again,  and  promised  eternal 
friendship  to  Pizarro  ;  and  so  one  bright  day 
the  Spanish  army  marched  out  of  Tumbez  and 
took  its  way  toward  Cuzco. 

Before  leaving  the  coast,  Pizarro  had  been 
joined  by  Hernando  de  Soto,  the  same  bold 
cavalier  who  afterward  spent  so  many  weary 
years  in  trying  to  find  on  the  shores  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi an  empire  as  rich  as  Mexico  or  Peru, 


152        riZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

and  as  he  had  brought  with  him  soldiers  and 
horses,  he  promised  to  be  of  great  use  to  Piz- 
arro.  Their  way  now  led  through  pleasant 
valleys  and  thriving  villages,  and  everywhere 
Pizarro  found  himself  warmly  greeted  by  the 
natives  ;  often  in  the  larger  towns  the  governors 
entertained  him  with  splendid  banquets,  and 
many  times  he  lodged  in  the  very  palaces  that 
were  prepared  for  the  Inca's  visits.  Pizarro 
made  friends  with  all  the  Indians  they  met,  as 
he  thought  it  best  to  leave  no  enemy  between 
him  and  the  coast,  and  so  they  marched  com- 
fortably day  after  day,  until  they  had  nearly 
reached  the  lofty  ranges  of  the  Cordilleras. 
While  stopping  at  one  of  the  largest  towns  that 
they  had  yet  seen,  Pizarro  heard  that,  some 
distance  ahead,  a  large  Peruvian  army  was  col- 
lected. Fearing  that  he  might  be  attacked  if  he 
went  further,  he  sent  De  Soto  on  ahead  to  find 
out  if  the  Inca  meant  to  receive  him  as  a  friend. 
After  many  days  De  Soto  returned  to  the  camp 
accompanied  by  a  Peruvian  noble,  a  brother  of 
the  Inca,  who  came  with  a  greeting  from  the 
emperor  and  some  presents  of  fruits,  corn,  em- 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 53 

eralds,  and  vases  of  gold  and  silver.  The  noble 
bearing  of  the  messenger  and  his  splendid  cos- 
tume and  heavy  ornaments  of  gold  made  a  deep 
impression  upon  the  mind  of  Pizarro,  and  he 
saw  at  once  that  in  all  his  dealing  with  the  Inca 
he  would  have  to  treat  him  with  the  respect 
due  to  his  great  rank  and  power ;  so  he  received 
the  messenger  very  courteously,  and  expressed 
great  pleasure  at  seeing  a  brother  of  the  great 
Inca.  The  messenger  said  that  the  Inca  had 
sent  him  to  Pizarro  to  say  that  he  welcomed 
the  Spaniards  to  his  land  and  invited  them  to 
visit  him  at  his  camp.  Pizarro  replied  that  he 
would  surely  visit  the  Inca,  and  after  receiving 
a  present  of  a  red  cap  and  some  glass  beads, 
the  nobleman  went  away.  But  Pizarro  felt 
sure  that  the  Inca  had  only  sent  him  to  find  out 
how  large  the  Spanish  army  was,  and  he  list- 
ened a  little  nervously  to  De  Soto's  account  of 
the  cities  he  had  seen,  all  well  fortified,  and 
able  to  hold  out  a  long  time  against  a  besieging 
army.  And  then  De  Soto  told  of  the  riches 
and  greatness  of  Cuzco,  the  capital,  and  said 
that  an  Indian  noble  had   described  to  him  its 


154       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

magnificent  palaces  and  temples,  whose  walls 
were  covered  with  gold  and  silver  and  precious 
stones;  and  at  this  Pizarro  determined  there 
was  no  time  to  be  lost,  and  set  out  immediately 
for  Caxamalca,  where  the  Inca  held  his  camp. 

Caxamalca  was  built  near  a  beautiful  river 
that  flowed  through  the  valley  below,  and  its 
great  stone  fortresses  and  lofty  temples,  its  pal- 
aces and  towers,  its  beautiful  gardens  and  wide, 
well-paved  streets,  and  its  large  public  square 
with  its  fountains  and  flowers,  all  showed  Pizarro, 
on  his  arrival  there,  that  he  had  come  into  a 
land  whose  people  knew  well  how  to  be  com- 
fortable in  peace  as  well  as  to  defend  themselves 
in  war.  He  at  once  marched  his  soldiers  into 
the  great  square,  where  he  pitched  his  tents  as 
if  resolved  to  stay.  The  Inca's  army  lay  upon 
the  slopes  of  the  mountains  three  miles  from 
Caxamalca,  and  there  was  great  excitement  and 
wonder  among  the  troops,  as  Indians  from  the 
town  came  into  camp  describing  the  appearance 
of  the  Spanish  soldiers.  The  Peruvians  had 
indeed  looked  with  surprise  and  awe  upon  these 
invaders,  whose  white  faces  and  long,  brown 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        1 55 

hair,  and  glittering  armor,  were  so  different 
from  anything  they  had  ever  seen  before.  And 
the  greatest  wonder  of  all  was  the  fact  that 
many  of  these  strangers  rode  upon  curious  ani- 
mals that  were  eager  to  rush  into  battle,  and 
that  the  riders  guided  often  with  a  word  or 
motion,  showing  that  the  creatures  understood 
human  speech.  These  were  the  horses  that 
Pizarro  had  brought,  and  they  were  well  calcu- 
lated to  inspire  the  Peruvians  with  terror,  for  as 
the  cavalry  charged  fiercely  in  battle,  the  inno- 
cent natives  thought  that  the  horse  and  man  all 
formed  one  animal ;  and  once,  when  a  man  fell 
from  his  horse,  the  Indians  ran  screaming  away, 
saying  that  the  strange  animal  had  broken  all 
to  pieces.  Even  when  they  had  grown  more 
accustomed  to  seeinof  them  their  fear  did  not 
lessen,  for  the  intelligence  of  the  horse  and  his 
power  to  understand  his  master's  speech  always 
seemed  like  something  half-human  to  the  Pe- 
ruvians, who  had  never  seen  horses  before. 
The  arms  of  the  Spaniards  seemed  very  terrible 
too ;  the  flash  and  smoke  and  noise  of  the  guns 
seemed  to  them  like    something  supernatural, 


156       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

like  the  lightning  or  thunder,  and  frightened 
them  so  that  at  the  first  sound  they  were  ready- 
to  throw  down  their  weapons  and  fly. 

Pizarro  knew  all  this  very  well,  and  the  next 
morning  after  his  arrival  at  Caxamalca,  when 
he  sent  to  the  Inca's  camp  to  ask  if  the  Span- 
iards were  welcome  to  Peru,  the  men  he  chose 
were  De  Soto,  and  his  brother  Hernando,  and 
they  both  rode  on  powerful  milk-white  horses, 
and  had  with  them  an  escort  of  forty  horsemen, 
all  clad  in  glittering  armor  and  with  brilliant 
trappings  on  their  steeds.  The  party  rode  rap- 
idly along,  and  as  they  came  to  the  river  that 
separated  them  from  the  Inca's  camp,  dashed 
boldly  into  the  stream  and  came  swiftly  up  to 
the  line  of  Peruvian  warriors  that  stood  waiting 
to  receive  them  and  conduct  them  to  the  pres- 
ence of  the  emperor.  They  found  the  monarch 
seated  on  a  golden  throne,  surrounded  by  richly 
attired  nobles,  and  attended  by  the  most  beau- 
tiful women  in  the  court.  All  the  courtiers  and 
attendants  stood  with  bowed  heads,  for  no  one 
might  raise  his  eyes  in  the  presence  of  the  Inca. 

The  Spaniards  stood  for  some  moments  in 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF  PERU.       15/ 

silence,  and  then  Hernando  Pizarro  told  the 
Inca,  through  an  interpreter,  that  he  and  his 
countrymen  were  the  subjects  of  a  mighty  mon- 
arch across  the  sea,  who  had  sent  them  to  ask 
the  Inca  to  be  his  friend.  The  Inca  did  not  re- 
ply to  this  speech  in  person,  but  one  of  his  no- 
bles came  forward  and  said  that  the  emperor 
bade  them  welcome,  and  the  next  day  would 
visit  the  Spanish  chief  at  Caxamalca.  The 
Spaniards  had  to-  be  content  with  this,  as  it  soon 
became  evident  that  the  Peruvians  had  no  in- 
tention of  saying  any  more.  De  Soto  now 
thouorht  he  would  show  the  Inca  some  of  the 

o 

good  qualities  of  his  horse,  for  he  well  knew 
that  the  splendid  animal  had  attracted  his  atten- 
tion, so  he  wheeled  his  horse  round  and  round 
and  put  him  through  many  difficult  exercises, 
the  horse  responding  intelligently  to  all  his 
commands,  and  finally  brought  him  down  close 
to  the  Inca's  throne.  The  Peruvians  were  much 
impressed  by  these  exercises,  as  was  likewise 
the  Inca,  but  no  one  showed  it  by  word  or  man- 
ner ;  when  De  Soto  had  finished,  the  party  of 
Spaniards   were   invited  to   a   banquet,  where 


158       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

they  were  served  by  beautiful  women,  who 
brought  them  fruits  on  golden  dishes  and  drink 
in  golden  goblets  studded  with  emeralds. 

And  then  they  went  back  to  Caxamalca  to 
report  the  result  of  their  visit,  and  when  the 
soldiers  heard  of  the  thousands  and  thousands 
of  Peruvians  who  lay  camping  out  on  the  moun- 
tain slopes,  ready  to  defend  the  Inca  and  their 
country  with  their  lives,  and  when  they  remem- 
bered that  all  over  the  great  empire  were  other 
thousands  willing  to  take  the  places  of  those 
who  should  fall,  then,  indeed,  the  conquest  of 
Peru  began  to  look  like  a  very  serious  matter, 
and  many  a  Spanish  soldier  wished  himself  back 
in  Panama. 

The  next  day  the  camp  was  astir  at  an  early 
hour  with  preparations  for  the  Inca's  visit,  for 
Pizarro  had  formed  a  very  bold  plan  in  the 
night,  and  all  his  soldiers  knew  it,  and  had 
pledged  themselves  to  help  him  carry  it  out. 
He  knew  that  there  would  be  very  little  use  in 
fighting  pitched  battles  with  the  Peruvians,  as 
there  were  thousands  of  them  to  every  soldier 
he  had,  so  he  decided  to  overcome  the  enemy 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU,        1 59 

hy  the  same  trick  that  Cortez  had  used  in  con- 
quering Mexico. 

The  Peruvians,  like  the  Mexicans,  held  the 
person  of  their  emperor  sacred,  and  Pizarro 
knew  that  if  he  could  get  possession  of  the  Inca, 
the  Indians  would  be  afraid  of  attackinof  him  for 
fear  of  injuring  their  monarch.  He  would  be 
safe  as  long  as  he  held  the  Inca  captive,  for  the 
Peruvians  would  understand  that  any  harm 
done  to  him  would  be  visited  upon  the  Inca. 

There  was  another  reason,  too,  why  this 
seemed  a  good  plan.  The  Inca  had  a  brother 
who  was  left  part  of  the  kingdom  by  his  father's 
will,  but  Atahualpa,  the  present  Inca,  had  de- 
throned his  brother,  Huascar,  and  now  un- 
lawfully held  his  dominions,  and  Pizarro  knew 
that  the  imprisonment  of  Atahualpa  would  be 
the  means  of  making  Huascar  his  friend,  and 
as  Huascar  was  really  the  lawful  king  of  a  large 
part  of  Peru,  and  had  many  faithful  and  loving 
subjects  among  its  people,  it  would  be  a  good 
thing  for  the  Spaniards  to  be  able  to  count  him 
among  their  friends. 

It  was  on   Saturday,   November   i6,    1532, 


l6o       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

that  this  bold  deed  was  to  be  done.  Pizarro 
concealed  his  soldiers  in  different  places  and 
kept  only  his  officers  around  him,  in  order  to 
deceive  Atahualpa  the  better,  and  when  all  was 
ready,  and  the  watchword,  "  Santiago,"  was 
agreed  upon  as  a  signal,  he  waited  impatiently 
for  the  appearance  of  the  Inca.  It  almost 
seemed  as  if  something  warned  the  emperor  to 
keep  away  from  Caxamalca,  for  he  kept  putting 
off  his  visit  from  hour  to  hour,  and  even  at  one 
time  sent  word  that  he  would  not  come  till  the 
next  day  ;  but  Pizarro  replied  that  he  would  not 
take  his  supper  until  his  visitor  came,  and 
whether  from  fear  of  offending  the  Spaniards, 
or  because  he  thought  there  was  no  use  in 
putting  off  the  visit,  Atahualpa  finally  gave  the 
order  for  the  camp  to  move,  and  was  soon  on 
his  way  to  the  town. 

He  sat  upon  his  golden  throne,  with  his  jew- 
elled diadem  upon  his  head,  and  with  the  royal 
standard,  the  rainbow-hued  banner,  carried  be- 
fore him.  His  litter  was  borne  by  the  great 
nobles,  all  richly  dressed,  and  before  the  throne, 
and  for  a  long  distance  behind,  marched  com- 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF  PERU.        l6l 

pany  after  company  of  Peruvian  soldiers.  As 
they  entered  the  great  square  of  Caxamalca  a 
Spanish  monk  came  forward  and  saluted  the 
emperor  with  great  respect. 

Atahuala  looked  upon  the  fair  faces  and 
glittering  armor  of  the  Spanish  soldiers,  and 
then  upon  the  white  robes  of  the  priest  and  the 
gilded  cross  he  held  in  his  hand,  and  turning 
to  his  attendants,  said  impressively:  "These 
strangers  are  the  messengers  of  the  gods ;  be 
careful  of  offending  them." 

The  priest  now  made  a  long  speech,  in  which 
he  told  the  Inca  that  the  Pope,  as  head  of  the 
Christian  church,  had  given  the  empire  of  Peru 
to  the  king  of  Spain,  and  that  it  was  the  will 
of  God  that  the  Peruvians  should  all  become 
Christians  and  cease  to  worship  the  Sun. 

The  Inca  listened  to  this  speech  very  pa- 
tiently and  asked  the  interpreter  where  the 
priest  had  learned  all  that  strange  news.  The 
priest  answered  that  he  had  learned  it  all  from 
the  Bible  he  held  in  his  hand.  Atahualpa  then 
took  the  Bible,  and,  after  looking  at  it  curiously, 
held  it  up  to  his  ear  as  if  expecting  to  learn  its 


l62       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

secrets  in  that  manner ;  but  as  he  heard  nothing, 
he  threw  it  angrily  from  him  and  exclaimed 
haughtily,  "  I  am  very  willing  to  be  a  friend  of 
the  king  of  Spain,  but  not  his  vassal ;  the  Pope 
must  be  a  very  extraordinary  man  to  give  away 
a  country  that  does  not  belong  to  him.  I  shall 
not  change  my  religion,  and  if  the  Christians 
adore  a  God  who  died  upon  a  cross,  I  worship 
the  Sun,  who  never  dies." 

At  these  defiant  words  the  priest  turned 
angrily  to  Pizarro  and  made  a  sign.  And  then 
shouting  "  Santiago,"  the  terrible  war-cry  of 
the  Spaniards  that  had  so  often  urged  them  on 
to  victory,  Pizarro  seized  the  Inca  and  called 
upon  his  soldiers  to  come  forth  from  their  hid- 
ing-places. In  a  moment  the  place  was  alive 
with  the  excited  Spaniards,  guns  were  fired, 
and  the  terrified  Peruvians,  startled  at  this 
unexpected  attack,  were  trampled  under  the 
horses'  hoofs  and  blinded  by  the  smoke,  and 
although  the  Inca's  guard  tried  in  vain  to  pro- 
tect him,  they  were  all  killed  or  wounded,  and 
of  the  remaining  Peruvians — men,  women,  and 
children — very  few  who  had  entered  the  square 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        163 


left  it  alive,  but  nearly  all  were  murdered  by  the 
relentless  Spaniards.  Then  the  gates  were 
closed  and  guarded,  and  the  Inca  was  taken  to 
Pizarro's  tent,  where  his  robe  and  jewels  were 
taken  from  him,  and  after  being  clothed  in  a 
plainer  dress  he  was  invited  to  take  supper  with 
Pizarro. 

Then  the  conqueror  told  his  prisoner  his 
true  reason  for  coming  to  Peru,  and  Atahualpa 
heard  it  all  with  bowed  head  and  sad  face,  and 
remembered,  as  he  listened,  the  old  legend  of 
his  race — how  from  across  the  seas  fair-haired 
men  were  to  come,  bringing  sorrow  and  destruc- 
tion to  the  children  of  the  Sun.  The  old 
prophecy  had  come  true,  and  the  last  Inca  of 
Peru  was  a  prisoner  in  the  hands  of  a  strange 
man,  with  white  skin  and  long  brown  hair. 
Pizarro  slept  well  after  his  easy  victory,  happy 
in  the  thought  that  that  day's  work  had  made 
his  name  immortal,  for  never  before  in  the  his- 
tory of  the  world  had  there  been  such  a  brill- 
iant conquest  as  this.  Even  the  name  of  Cor- 
tez  would  now  stand  second  to  his  own. 

The  next  morning  Pizarro  saw  that  the  re- 


1 64       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

mainder  of  the  Inca's  army  were  making  hasty 
preparations  for  departure,  and  in  a  short  time 
scarcely  a  sign  remained  of  the  vast  host  that 
had  been  scattered  over  the  slopes  of  the 
mountains.  As  Pizarro's  object  was  simply  to 
get  all  the  treasures  he  could,  he  did  not  take 
any  prisoners,  but  let  the  disheartened  Peru- 
vians go  whither  they  would,  and  devoted  him- 
self to  obtaining  all  the  gold  and  jewels  that 
could  be  found  in  Caxamalca  or  on  the  bodies 
of  the  slaughtered  Indians.  The  Inca  at  once 
noticed  the  Spaniards'  love  of  gold,  and  told 
Pizarro  if  he  would  give  him  his  freedom  he 
would  give  him  a  large  room  full  of  silver,  and 
gold  enough  to  fill  half  a  room.  Pizarro's  eyes 
glistened  at  this  proposal,  which  he  at  once  ac- 
cepted, and  the  Inca  hastily  sent  some  of  his 
servants  to  Cuzco  to  order  the  people  to  bring 
the  gold  and  silver  from  the  temples  and  pal- 
aces. Day  after  day  messengers  arrived  bring- 
ing the  precious  metals — vases,  basins,  goblets, 
table-service  and  temple-service,  all  of  purest 
gold,  besides  golden  fountains,  birds,  fruits,  and 
vegetables,  all  carved  out  of  the  metal  in  the 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        l6$ 

curious  way  known  to  the  Indians.  Two  thou- 
sand men  were  employed  in  bringing  this  treas- 
ure, and  every  day  Atahualpa's  heart  grew 
liofhter,  for  he  thouo-ht  each  niofht  brouo;-ht  him 
nearer  freedom. 

But  one  day  messengers  came  to  the  city 
from  the  Inca's  brother  Huascar,  saying  that  if 
Pizarro  would  set  him  free  from  the  prison 
where  Atahualpa  had  confined  him,  he  would 
give  the  conqueror  twice  as  much  gold  as  the 
Inca  had  promised  him.  Somehow  this  news 
reached  Atahualpa,  and  in  great  fear  lest  Pizarro 
should  accept  his  brother's  offer,  he  sent  In- 
dians to  kill  him  as  he  was  on  his  way  to  Caxa- 
malca.  This  roused  Pizarro's  anger,  for  he  had 
meant  to  get  the  gold  from  both  brothers,  and 
then  decide  to  give  the  kingdom  to  the  one  who 
would  be  likely  to  trouble  him  the  least.  So 
when  the  news  of  Huascar's  death  came  to  him, 
and  he  knew  he  would  not  get  the  gold  that 
he  had  been  promised,  he  determined  that  the 
Inca  should  suffer  for  his  loss.  At  the  same 
time  he  heard  that  the  Peruvians  were  gather- 
ing an  army  under  one  of   their  most  skilful 


l66       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF  PERU. 

generals,  and  intended  attacking  the  Spaniards 
and  rescuing  the  Inca.  No  time  was  to  be  lost, 
Pizarro  called  a  council  of  his  chief  men,  and  it 
was  decided  that  the  Inca  must  be  put  to  death 
and  the  army  march  at  once  to  Cuzco.  Atahu- 
alpa  could  not  believe  the  terrible  news  when  it 
was  brought  to  him ;  in  vain  he  pointed  to  the 
glittering  piles  of  gold  that  his  faithful  subjects 
had  brought  for  his  ransom ;  in  vain  he  re- 
minded Pizarro  of  his  promise.  The  conqueror 
of  Peru  thought  nothing  of  his  honor,  but  only 
of  the  gold  that  he  might  find  in  the  Inca's 
stately  palaces,  and  Atahualpa  learned  to  his 
cost  what  it  meant  to  trust  in  a  Spanish  soldier's 
plighted  word ;  for,  although  all  the  officers  de- 
clared that  the  Inca  must  die,  it  was  Pizarro 
himself  who  acted  as  one  of  the  judges  at  the 
trial,  and  it  was  his  voice  that  condemned  him 
to  death. 

He  was  sentenced  to  be  burned  to  death, 
and  at  night  after  the  trial  was  over  he  was 
led  out  to  the  centre  of  the  square  and  bound  to 
the  stake.  The  Spanish  soldiers  stood,  round 
with   torches    in    hands,  watching  intently  the 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        167 

face  of  the  doomed  monarch,  whose  bearino-  was 
as  proud  and  dignified  as  it  had  been  when  he 
first  came  to  the  Spanish  camp  surrounded  by- 
thousands  of  his  faithful  subjects. 

After  the  fagots  had  been  piled  up  around 
him,  the  same  priest  who  had  first  urged  him  to 
become  a  Christian,  came  to  him  and  said  that 
if  he  would  be  baptized  he  might  be  strangled 
instead  of  burned.  As  this  would  be  a  much 
easier  death,  Atahualpa  consented,  and  the 
priest  baptized  him. 

And  then  they  killed  him  as  he  stood  there 
alone,  with  his  hands  clasped,  and  his  eyes 
lifted  toward  the  heavens  from  which  the  great 
god  had  vanished  many  hours  before,  and  so 
perished  Atahualpa,  the  last  of  the  children  of 
the  Sun,  and  the  empire  of  the  Incas  was  at  an 
end. 

Pizarro  now  determined  to  march  at  once  to 
Cuzco,  and  in  order  to  appease  the  Peruvians, 
who  were  horrified  and  angry  at  the  murder  of 
Atahualpa,  a  younger  brother  of  the  emperor 
was  crowned  Inca,  although  Pizarro  meant  to 
keep  the  real  power  in  his  own  hands.     But  it 


l68       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

would  be  safer  for  the  Spaniards  to  march 
through  the  country  if  they  had  the  person  of 
an  Inca  in  their  power,  and  the  young  Toparca 
had  a  mild  and  gentle  nature,  and  Pizarro  could 
easily  rule  him. 

De  Soto  was  sent  ahead  to  spy  out  danger, 
and  although  his  party,  as  well  as  his  main 
army,  was  attacked  once  or  twice  by  Peruvians, 
the  Spaniards  had  only  to  charge  upon  them 
with  their  fiery  horses,  when  the  Indians  would 
break  ranks  at  once  and  fly  in  terror  to  the 
woods,  and  so  with  but  little  adventure  Cuzco 
was  reached  at  last,  and  Pizarro  found  himself 
in  the  capital  of  the  great  empire  he  had  con- 
quered. 

Toparca  having  died  on  the  way  to  Cuzco, 
another  brother,  Manco,  was  crowned  Inca,  with 
great  ceremony,  in  the  midst  of  thousands  of 
assembled  Peruvians,  and  a  treaty  of  peace  was 
entered  into  between  Manco  and  Pizarro,  and 
eternal  friendship  was  sworn  between  them ;  but 
although  this  satisfied  the  Peruvians,  Manco 
was  really  kept  under  guard  and  was  closely 
watched    all   the   time.     And   now   began    the 


PIZARRO   AND   THE    CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        169 

plunder  of  Cuzco,  and  its  beautiful  temples  and 
royal  palaces  were  soon  despoiled  of  all  their 
treasures ;  it  was  found  when  the  gold  and 
jewels  had  been  divided  that  each  soldier  in  the 
Spanish  army  was  a  rich  man,  and  that  the 
king's  portion  was  immense. 

But  Cuzco  was  too  far  from  the  sea-coast  to 
be  a  suitable  capital  for  the  new  kingdom  that 
Pizarro  meant  to  found,  and  after  its  stores  of 
gold  and  silver  had  been  divided  among  the 
soldiers,  the  conqueror  proposed  to  move  the 
capital  from  Cuzco  to  some  place  nearer  the 
coast,  and  as  there  was  no  large  town  near  the 
sea  that  suited  him,  he  gave  orders  that  a  new 
city  should  be  built,  with  palaces,  temples,  and 
churches,  and  all  things  as  fine  and  beautiful  as 
could  be  found  anywhere  else  in  Peru.  The 
workmen  were  soon  at  work,  and  thousands  of 
Peruvians  were  daily  employed  in  building  the 
bridges  and  walls  and  towers  that  were  to  grace 
this  new  capital,  whose  foundations  were  laid  in 
January,  1535,  and  which  Pizarro  named  "  The 
City  of  the  Kings,"  and  which  is  now  known  as 
Lima. 

8 


I70       PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU. 

But  it  was  only  a  few  years  that  Pizarro  lived 
to  enjoy  all  his  glory  and  prosperity,  for  he  had 
many  bitter  enemies  among-  the  Spaniards.  His 
old  friend  Almagro  had  been  very  dissatisfied 
at  his  share  of  the  treasures  that  had  been  found 
in  Peru,  and  had  even  tried  to  take  Cuzco  away 
from  Pizarro,  and  become  ruler  of  Peru  himself. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  Pizarro  was  unfaithful 
to  his  promise  to  divide  the  spoils  equally  with 
Almagro  and  Luque ;  but  Luque  was  dead,  and 
Almagro  was  obliged  to  take  whatever  Pizarro 
would  give  him,  and  when  he  attempted  to  ob- 
tain more  by  force,  he  was  taken  prisoner  by 
Hernando  Pizarro  and  put  to  death.  But  he 
left  a  son,  Diego,  who  resolved  to  revenge  his 
father's  murder.  He  had  many  friends  in  the 
city,  for  his  father  had  been  very  popular  among 
the  forces  that  he  led  against  Pizarro,  and  a  plan 
was  laid  to  attack  Pizarro  as  he  was  returning 
from  church  on  Sunday  and  kill  him.  But  on 
the  Sunday  appointed,  Pizarro  did  not  go  to 
church  ;  he  had  heard  of  the  plot  and  remained 
at  home.  Diego  and  his  friends  were  not  to  be 
baffled,  however;  they  went  at  once  to  Pizarro's 


PIZARRO   AND   THE   CONQUEST   OF   PERU.        171 


palace,  and  forcing  their  way  to  his  private 
room,  attacked  him  before  his  friends  could 
come  to  his  rescue.  Pizarro  fought  bravely  for 
his  life,  but  the  odds  were  against  him,  and  in 
a  few  moments  he  fell  dead  at  the  feet  of  the 
man  whose  father  had  been  his  old  friend,  and 
whose  help  and  trust  had  been  the  chief  means 
of  his  conquering  the  empire  of  Peru. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

FERDINAND    DE     SOTO,    THE     DISCOVERER     OF    THE 
MISSISSIPPI. 

Ferdinand  de  Soto,  who  was  with  Pizarro 
in  Peru,  was  born  in  Spain,  and  the  first  years  of 
his  Hfe  were  spent  in  a  gloomy  castle  where  it 
was  so  quiet,  that  he  often  grew  lonely  and 
wished  that  he  had  some  playfellow  besides  the 
birds  or  his  dog  or  horse.  His  parents  were  so 
poor  that  they  could  not  afford  to  send  him  to 
school,  and  so  he  grew  to  be  a  big  boy  before 
knowing  how  to  read  or  write  ;  but  his  family 
were  of  noble  blood,  the  noblest  in  Spain ;  and 
although  they  could  not  send  him  to  school,  still 
they  had  him  taught  to  ride  and  fence,  as  it  was 
thought  disgraceful  for  a  Spanish  nobleman  not 
to  have  these  accomplishments.  And  so  the 
boy  learned  to  ride  daringly,  and  at  the  age  of 
twelve  could  use  his  sword  as  easily  as  any 
other    Spanish   boy    of  his    age ;    and    in    the 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  1/3 

meantime,  in  the  halls  of  the  dark  old  castle, 
he  listened  eagerly  to  the  tales  he  heard  of  the 
wonderful  land  which  Columbus  had  discovered, 
and  he  resolved  that  when  he  became  a  man  he 
would  o-o  himself  across  the  sea  and  brino-  back 

o  o 

gold  and  refurnish  up  the  old  castle  and  make 
it  once  more  a  place  fit  for  noblemen  to  live  in. 
When  he  learned  to  read  he  stored  his  mind 
with  stories  of  adventure  and  romance,  and  he 
said  that  he,  too,  would  go  into  the  world  some 
day  and  win  honor  and  fame ;  and  so  the  days 
passed ;  the  sun  brightened  the  castle  walls  in 
the  daytime  and  the  shadows  hung  over  them 
at  night,  and  through  sunlight  and  shadow  the 
boy  dreamed  on  of  the  years  to  come  when  he 
would  be  a  knight  and  a  soldier  and  gain  glory 
and  wealth  under  the  flag  of  Spain. 

One  day  a  very  wealthy  Spanish  nobleman 
named  Don  Pedro  de  Avila  rode  up  to  the 
castle  and  asked  to  see  Ferdinand.  Ferdi- 
nand at  this  time  was  an  unusually  handsome 
youth,  tall  and  graceful,  and  remarkable  for 
his  strength  and  agility.  He  excelled  all  his 
friends    in    fencing   and   riding,   and   all   those 


174  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

active  amusements  which  the  Spanish  youth 
delighted  in. 

Don  Pedro  had  noticed  the  handsome  boy, 
and  as  he  had  no  son  of  his  own  he  offered  to 
adopt  him  and  educate  him  ;  so  Ferdinand  left 
his  home  and  was  sent  to  a  Spanish  university, 
where  he  spent  six  years,  during  which  time  he 
became  renowned  for  his  skill  in  the  chivalric 
entertainments  which  were  all  the  time  going 
on  in  Spain.  He  took  the  prizes  at  all  the  tour- 
naments, and  was  everywhere  praised  and  ad- 
mired. Don  Pedro  became  very  proud  of  him 
and  treated  him  as  though  he  were  his  own 
child. 

Don  Pedro  had  a  daughter,  Isabella;  who 
was  very  beautiful,  and  her  father  wished  her 
to  marry  some  rich  nobleman,  so  that  she  might 
have  a  high  position  at  the  Spanish  court ;  but 
while  her  father  was  away  in  Darien,  where  he 
had  been  appointed  governor,  Isabella  fell  in 
love  with  Ferdinand  de  Soto  and  promised  to 
marry  him.  When  Don  Pedro  came  back  and 
De  Soto  asked  permission  of  him  to  marry  his 
daughter  he  was  very  angry,  and  from  that  time 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  175 

he  became  De  Soto's  bitterest  enemy.  He 
was  going  back  to  Darien  again,  and  thinking 
it  would  be  a  fine  thing  if  De  Soto  were  to 
go  with  him  and  get  killed  by  the  Indians,  he 
offered  to  give  him  a  handsome  outfit  and  ap- 
point him  captain  of  a  company  of  soldiers  if  he 
would  go.  De  Soto  was  very  poor,  his  parents 
were  dead,  and  he  thought  he  might  win  honor 
and  wealth  by  going  with  Don  Pedro,  so  he 
accepted  his  offer. 

At  the  time  that  he  left  Spain,  De  Soto  was 
nineteen  years  of  age ;  he  was  away  fifteen 
years,  during  which  time  he  heard  only  once 
or  twice  from  Isabella  ;  he  wrote  to  her  many 
times  and  she  answered  his  letters,  but  her 
father  always  destroyed  the  letters.  During 
the  years  that  he  was  away  De  Soto  did  in- 
deed become  rich  and  famous ;  he  had  left 
Spain  a  poor  boy,  and  he  returned  a  wealthy 
and  honored  man.  Without  his  help  Pizarro 
would  never  have  been  able  to  conquer  Peru, 
and  the  fame  of  the  crreat  soldier  De  Soto  was 

o  * 

talked  of  from  one  end  of  Spain  to  the  other. 
In  the  meantime  Don  Pedro  had  died,  and 


176  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

as  soon  as  De  Soto  reached  Spain  he  married 
Isabella.  For  two  years  they  lived  in  Seville 
in  princely  style,  but  at  the  end  of  that  time  De 
Soto  found  that  his  money  was  fast  melting 
away,  so  he  resolved  to  go  on  another  expedi- 
tion and  gather  more  gold..  He  asked  permis- 
sion of  the  king  to  conquer  Florida,  where  it 
was  believed  there  was  much  gold,  and  offered 
to  fit  out  the  expedition  at  his  own  expense. 
The  king  consented,  and  De  Soto  began  his 
preparations. 

As  soon  as  it  became  known  that  De  Soto 
was  raising  an  army  for  the  conquest  of  Flor- 
ida, all  the  young  noblemen  of  Spain  flocked 
eagerly  around  his  standard.  He  accepted  only 
those  who  were  strong  and  able  to  endure  hard- 
ship, for  he  knew  that  he  had  a  very  difficult 
task  before  him.  Such  an  army  had  never  be- 
fore left  Spain  ;  the  gallant  and  daring  soldiers 
were  nearly  all  wealthy  and  well-born.  They 
wore  costly  armor  and  all  their  outfit  was  of 
the  richest  description.  Everything  was  pro- 
vided to  make  the  expedition  a  success.  Arms 
and  provisions,  chains    for  the   Indians  whom 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  1/7 

they  expected  to  make  slaves,  bloodhounds  for 
hunting  runaways,  and  cards  for  the  young 
nobles  to  amuse  themselves  with.  Twelve 
priests  went  with  them  to  convert  the  natives 
and  keep  up  religious  services.  Ten  ships  left 
the  harbor  of  San  Lucar,  with  flags  flying,  bu- 
gles pealing,  and  cannon  thundering  over  the 
water,  and  thus  De  Soto,  under  sunny  skies 
and  with  bright  hopes,  sailed  for  the  summer- 
land  of  De  Leon. 

They  stopped  at  Cuba,  where  De  Soto  left 
his  wife  to  govern  the  colony  during  his  ab- 
sence, and  then  sailing  through  the  Gulf  they 
entered  Tampa  Bay  and  landed.  Here  they 
heard  that  there  was  a  large  Indian  town  six 
miles  away,  and  De  Soto  decided  to  march 
there ;  but  when  they  reached  the  village  they 
found  it  entirely  deserted.  Not  an  Indian  was 
to  be  seen.  It  was  quite  a  large  village ;  the 
houses  were  made  of  timber,  thatched  with 
palm  leaves;  many  of  them  were  large,  having 
many  rooms ;  they  had  useful  articles  of  furni- 
ture, some  of  which  were  very  elegantly  carved 
and  ornamented  with  gold.     The  dresses  of  the 


178  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

women  were  very  beautiful  and  trimmed  with 
shells  and  embroidery  and  richly  colored  ;  there 
were  exquisite  shawls  and  mantillas  woven  by 
hand  from  the  bark  of  the  mulberry  tree,  and 
the  walls  of  some  of  the  houses  were  hung  with 
tapestry  of  prepared  buckskin,  while  the  floors 
were  covered  with  carpets  of  the  same  material. 
The  buckskin  had  been  tanned  so  that  it  shone 
like  satin,  and  was  as  soft  as  silk,  and  it  made 
the  rooms  look  very  luxurious  and  elegant. 

All  this  was  very  different  from  the  Indian 
homes  De  Soto  had  seen  in  Darien,  and  he  did 
not  doubt  that  here  he  should  find  a  kingdom 
as  rich  as  Peru.  He  took  possession  of  the 
village,  and  he  and  his  soldiers  lived  in  the 
houses.  One  or  two  of  the  Indians  came  back 
and  were  taken  captive,  and  from  them  De  Soto 
learned  that  Ucita,  the  Indian  chief,  was  a  mor- 
tal foe  to  all  Spaniards  because  he  had  been  so 
badly  treated  by  Narvaez,  a  cruel  Spaniard 
who  had  been  there  before  De  Soto's  arrival. 
Narvaez  had  treated  Ucita  most  wickedly.  He 
had  caused  his  mother  to  be  torn  to  pieces  by 
bloodhounds ;    like    Don   Pedro  in  Darien,  he 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  1/9 

had  hunted  down  women  and  girls  with  his 
bloodhounds,  and  had  cut  infants  in  pieces  and 
thrown  them  to  the  dogs,  and  once,  in  a  fit  of 
anger,  he  had  caused  Ucita's  nose  to  be  cut  off. 
Ucita  remembered  all  these  things,  and  when 
De  Soto  sent  to  him  and  offered  his  friendship, 
the  Indian  chief  replied  : 

"  I  want  none  of  the  speeches  and  promises 
of  the  Spaniards.  Bring  me  their  heads,  and  I 
will  receive  them  joyfully." 

Thus  De  Soto  had  to  suffer  for  the  crimes 
of  Don  Pedro  and  Narvaez.  While  he  had  been 
in  Darien  he  had  always  treated  the  Indians 
kindly,  but  he  knew  how  cruelly  other  Span- 
iards had  acted  toward  them,  so  he  expected  a 
great  deal  of  trouble  here.  The  Indians  thought 
all  Spaniards  were  alike,  and  it  was  a  long  time 
before  he  could  make  Ucita  believe  that  he 
meant  him  no  harm.  He  sent  him  presents 
again  and  again,  and  whenever  an  Indian  was 
taken  captive  by  his  soldiers  De  Soto  treated 
him  kindly  and  sent  him  back  to  the  tribe  with 
presents.  At  last  Ucita  seemed  to  be  touched 
by  the  kindness  of  De  Soto,  who  then  felt  he 


l8o  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

could  continue  his  march  without  leaving  a 
powerful  enemy  behind.  Ucita  did  not  say  he 
would  be  his  friend,  but  then  he  showed  a  more 
friendly  spirit,  and  the  Spaniards  felt  he  would 
not  attack  them.  Ucita  was  a  brave  and  noble 
man,  generous  to  his  friends  and  merciful  to  his 
enemies  ;  but  the  Spaniards  had  treated  him  so 
inhumanly  that  it  is  no  wonder  he  did  not  at 
first  believe  in  De  Soto's  offers  of  friendship. 

In  the  meantime  a  Spaniard  had  been 
brought  into  camp  who  had  been  taken  prisoner 
by  the  Indians  when  Narvaez  was  in  Florida. 
This  man's  name  was  Juan  Ortiz,  and  he  had 
been  with  the  Indians  ten  years,  so  he  knew  their 
language  and  habits.  When  he  was  first  taken 
prisoner  he  had  been  very  cruelly  treated  and 
at  last  was  bound  to  the  stake  to  be  burned ;  as 
the  flames  crept  around  him  he  cried  aloud  with 
pain  and  terror,  and  the  chiefs  daughter,  a  very 
beautiful  princess  about  sixteen  years  of  age, 
could  not  endure  the  sight  of  his  agony ;  she 
threw  her  arms  around  her  father's  neck  and 
begged  with  tears  that  Ortiz  might  be  saved. 
Ortiz  was  about  eighteen  years  of  age,  tall,  and 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  l8l 

very  handsome,  and  the  sight  of  his  great  beauty 
and  the  pleadings  of  the  princess  Ulelah  at  last 
touched  her  father's  heart.  Ortiz  was  spared, 
but  for  some  time  after  his  life  was  misera- 
ble, as  the  Indians  treated  him  very  cruelly ; 
but  at  last  his  lot  became  easier,  and  at  this 
time  he  was  treated  as  a  friend  by  the  tribe. 
Of  course  De  Soto  was  very  glad  to  meet 
Ortiz,  as  he  would  be  very  useful  in  dealing  with 
the  natives. 

Ortiz  told  De  Soto  of  a  very  powerful  chief 
who  lived  about  a  hundred  miles  from  Ucita, 
and  offered  to  lead  him  there  ;  the  Spaniards 
thought  there  might  be  gold  there,  and  they 
joyfully  set  off  under  the  command  of  Gallegos, 
De  Soto  remaining  behind.  The  Indians  they 
met  told  them  of  a  place  where  there  was  so 
much  gold  that  the  warriors  had  shields  and 
helmets  made  of  it ;  but  very  few  of  the  Span- 
iards believed  this  ;  they  thought  it  was  a  trick 
of  the  Indians  to  get  them  away  from  the  coun- 
try. In  a  few  days  De  Soto  followed  Gallegos 
with  the  rest  of  the  army,  and  they  began  to 
work    their   way   through    dense    forests   and 


1 82         ■  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

swamps,  and  thickets,  and  through  mud  and 
water,  losing  their  way  and  harassed  by  the 
Indians,  in  this  mad  hunt  for  gold. 

One  day,  while  they  were  travelling  along 
the  banks  of  a  river,  they  saw  a  canoe  with  six 
Indians  in  it  coming  toward  them  ;  the  Indians 
landed  and  three  of  them  came  up  to  De  Soto, 
and,  bowing  very  low,  said  to  him  :  "  Do  you 
come  for  peace  or  for  war  ?  " 

"  I  come  for  peace,"  replied  De  Soto,  "  and 
seek  only  a  peaceful  passage  through  your  land. 
I  need  food  for  my  people  and  canoes  and  rafts 
to  cross  the  river,  and  I  beg  you  to  help  me." 

The  Indians  said  that  they  themselves  were 
in  want  of  food,  as  there  had  been  a  terrible 
sickness  the  year  before,  and  that  many  of  their 
tribe  had  died  and  others  had  gone  away  for 
fear  of  the  pestilence,  thus  leaving  the  fields  un- 
cultivated. They  also  said  that  their  chieftain 
was  a  young  princess  and  they  had  no  doubt 
she  would  receive  them  kindly  and  do  every- 
thing for  them.  Having  said  this,  the  chiefs  re- 
turned to  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

And  now  the  Spaniards,  looking  across  the 


FERDINAND    DE   SOTO.  1 83 

river,  saw  that  there  was  a  great  stir  in  the  vil- 
lage opposite.  First,  a  very  large  and  beauti- 
fully-decorated canoe  appeared  upon  the  banks, 
followed  by  several  other  canoes  also  very  beau- 
tiful ;  then  a  gorgeous  palanquin,  borne  by  four 
men,  was  seen  coming  toward  the  river ;  the 
palanquin  stopped  at  the  banks,  and  from  it  a 
graceful  girl,  very  finely  dressed,  entered  the 
state  canoe.  She  sat  down  upon  the  cushions 
in  the  end  of  the  canoe,  over  which  was 
stretched  a  canopy ;  she  was  followed  by  eight 
female  attendants  who  entered  the  canoe  after 
she  had  sat  down.  Then  the  six  men  who  had 
just  been  to  see  De  Soto  entered  a  large  canoe 
which  was  rowed  by  a  number  of  other  Indians. 
The  canoe  in  which  the  princess  sat  was  fast- 
ened to  this  one,  and  then  they  started,  fol- 
lowed by  several  other  canoes  in  which  were 
the  most  noted  warriors  of  the  tribe. 

The  Spaniards  were  charmed  with  the  beau- 
tiful young  princess.  Her  attendants  brought 
with  them  a  chair  of  state  upon  which  she  took 
her  seat  after  bowing  to  De  Soto,  and  then 
they  began  a  conversation  by  means  of  the  in- 


1 84  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

terpreter,  Juan  Ortiz.  The  princess  said  that 
it  was  true  the  pestilence  had  left  the  tribe 
very  poor,  but  that  she  would  do  everything 
she  could  to  provide  them  with  food ;  she 
offered  half  of  her  house  to  De  Soto,  and  half 
the  houses  in  the  village  to  the  soldiers,  and 
said  that  by  the  next  day  there  would  be  rafts 
and  canoes  ready  to  take  the  Spaniards  across 
the  river. 

De  Soto  was  much  touched  by  the  kindness 
of  the  princess  and  promised  to  be  her  friend 
forever.  Then  the  princess  rose  and  placed  a 
large  string  of  costly  pearls  around  De  Soto's 
neck,  and  he  in  return  presented  her  with  a 
gold  ring  set  with  a  ruby  ;  and  then,  with  prom- 
ises of  help  on  the  morrow,  the  princess  and  her 
people  returned  to  the  village. 

The  next  day  the  princess  had  the  rafts 
made  and  the  Spanish  army  crossed  the  river  ; 
while  crossing  four  horses  were  carried  away 
by  the  swift  stream  and  drowned,  for  which  the 
Spaniards  grieved  very  much,  as  these  horses 
had  been  of  great  service  to  them  in  their  jour- 
ney.    When    they  arrived   at  the   village  they 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  1 85 

found  very  pleasant  quarters  awaiting  them  ;  as 
there  were  not  houses  enough  to  hold  all  the 
soldiers,  some  wigwams  had  been  built  in  a 
beautiful  mulberry  grove  just  outside  the  vil- 
lage, and  the  Spaniards  were  delighted  to  stop 
a  while  with  these  friendly  Indians. 

The  mother  of  the  princess  was  a  widow 
living  some  miles  down  the  river,  and  De  Soto 
wished  to  see  her,  and,  if  possible,  make  a  friend 
of  her,  so  the  princess,  as  soon  as  she  heard 
this,  sent  twelve  of  her  chieftains  to  invite  her 
mother  to  visit  her ;  but  the  queen  refused  to 
come,  and  said  that  her  daughter  had  done 
wrong  to  receive  the  Spaniards.  This  made 
De  Soto  all  the  more  desirous  to  make  the 
queen  his  friend,  so  he  sent  thirty  of  his  men 
to  see  her,  with  large  presents  and  offer  of 
friendship.  The  princess  sent  one  of  her  rela- 
tives to  guide  the  party ;  he  was  a  young  man 
about  twenty  years  old,  very  handsome,  and 
with  fine  manners.  He  was  dressed  in  a  suit  of 
soft  deerskin  which  was  trimmed  with  embroid- 
ery and  fringe,  and  wore  a  head-dress  made  of 
feathers    of  various   colors ;  he   carried   in   his 


1 86  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

hand  a  beautiful  bow,  highly  polished,  so  it 
shone  like  silver,  and  at  his  shoulder  hung  a 
quiver  full  of  arrows.  The  Spaniards  were  de- 
lighted with  the  fine  appearance  of  their  guide, 
who  indeed  looked  worthy  to  serve  the  charm- 
ing princess,  and  the  party  left  the  village  in 
high  spirits. 

The  guide  led  them  along  the  banks  of  the 
river,  under  the  shade  of  fine  old  trees  ;  after  a 
walk  of  some  miles  they  stopped  for  their  noon- 
day meal,  seating  themselves  in  the  shade  of  a 
beautiful  grove  through  which  they  were  pass- 
ing. The  young  guide,  who  had  been  very 
pleasant  and  talkative  all  the  way,  now  sudden- 
ly became  very  quiet.  He  took  the  quiver  from 
his  shoulder  and  drew  out  the  arrows  one  by 
one ;  they  were  very  beautiful  arrows,  highly 
polished  and  feathered  at  the  end ;  he  passed 
them  to  the  Spaniards,  who  admired  them  very 
much,  and  while  they  were  all  busy  looking  at 
them,  the  young  Indian  drew  out  a  very  long, 
sharp  arrow  shaped  like  a  dagger.  Finding  that 
no  one  was  looking  at  him,  he  plunged  the  arrow 
down  his  throat,  and  almost  immediately  died. 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  1 8/ 

The  Spaniards  were  much  shocked  and 
could  not  imaghie  why  this  had  happened,  but 
they  afterward  found  out  that  the  young  guide 
was  a  great  favorite  with  the  queen,  and  that 
knowing  she  did  not  want  to  see  the  Spaniards, 
who,  he  thought,  might  perhaps  seize  her  and 
carry  her  away,  and  not  daring  to  disobey  the 
princess,  whom  he  loved  and  respected,  he  had 
chosen  this  way  to  free  himself  from  his  trouble. 

The  other  Indians  did  not  know  where  the 
mother  was,  so  the  Spaniards  returned  without 
seeing  her.  De  Soto  was  much  disappointed 
at  this,  and  tried  again  to  find  her  place  of  re- 
treat, but  without  success.  In  the  meantime 
the  Spaniards  had  heard  from  the  Indians  that 
there  were  great  quantities  of  white  and  yellow 
metal  in  their  country,  and  they  thought  it 
must  be  gold  and  silver  ;  but  when  the  Indians 
brought  it  into  camp,  they  found  that  the  gold 
was  copper  and  the  silver  mica,  and  they  were 
again  disappointed. 

The  princess  now  told  De  Soto  that  about 
three  miles  away  there  was  a  village  which  was 
once  the  capital  of  the  kingdom,  and  that  there 


1 88  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

was  a  great  sepulchre  there,  In  which  all  their 
chieftains  and  great  warriors  were  buried,  and 
that  immense  quantities  of  pearls  had  been 
buried  with  them.  De  Soto,  with  some  of  his 
officers,  and  some  of  the  Indian  chiefs,  visited 
this  place  and  found  it  to  be  a  large  building 
three  hundred  feet  long  and  over  a  hundred  feet 
wide,  covered  with  a  lofty  roof;  the  entrance 
was  ornamented  with  wooden  statues,  some  of 
them  twelve  feet  high,  and  there .  were  many 
statues  and  carved  ornaments  in  the  inside.  By 
the  side  of  the  coffins  were  small  chests,  and  in 
these  had  been  placed  such  things  as  it  was 
thought  the  dead  chieftains  would  need  in  the 
spirit  world.  When  an  Indian  died  his  bow 
and  arrows  were  always  buried  with  him,  as  it 
was  supposed  he  would  need  them  in  the 
"  happy  hunting-grounds,"  and,  besides,  many 
other  things,  as  you  already  know.  In  these 
chests  the  Spaniards  found  more  pearls  than 
they  had  ever  dreamed  of.  It  is  said  that  they 
carried  away  from  this  place  fourteen  bushels 
of  pearls,  and  the  princess  told  them  if  they 
would    visit    other   villages    they   would    find 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  1 89 

enough  pearls  to  load  down  all  the  horses  in 
the  army.  The  Spaniards  were  delighted  and 
proposed  to  De  Soto  that  they  should  make  a 
settlement  there,  but  he  was  determined  to  go 
further  on  in  search  of  orold. 

He  had  noticed  that  for  some  time  the  In- 
dians had  not  been  so  friendly  as  they  were  at 
first ;  some  of  his  soldiers  had  ill-treated  the 
natives — although  he  had  given  strict  orders 
that  they  should  not — and  now  he  felt  sure  that 
the  princess  meant  to  escape  from  the  village, 
and  that  her  tribe  would  begin  a  warfare  with 
his  army.  So  he  thought  the  safest  thing  to  do 
would  be  to  compel  the  princess  to  go  with  him 
when  he  marched  away.  He  knew  that  the 
Indians  would  not  harm  him  if  she  were  with 
him,  as  they  would  be  afraid  of  harming  her, 
too ;  so  he  told  her  it  was  necessary  for  her  to 
go  with  him.  The  princess  did  not  like  this 
plan  at  all,  but  she  said  nothing,  and  in  a  few 
days  De  Soto  began  his  march  accompanied  by 
the  Indian  princess,  in  her  beautiful  palanquin, 
which  was  attended  by  a  large  number  of  her 
chieftains,  all  handsomely  dressed,  and  wearing 


I90  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

their  gorgeous  head-dresses  with  their  nodding 
plumes.  For  some  days  they  travelled  through 
the  forests,  when  one  day,  as  they  were  passing 
through  a  very  thick  wood,  the  princess  sud- 
denly leaped  from  her  palanquin  and  disap- 
peared among  the  trees.  She  had  made  this 
plan  with  her  warriors,  and  De  Soto  never  saw 
or  heard  of  her  again. 

It  is  very  sad  to  think  that  a  friendship 
which  began  so  happily  should  have  ended 
thus,  and  had  De  Soto  acted  differently,  the 
princess  would  always  have  remembered  him  as 
a  noble  man ;  as  it  was,  she  must  have  been 
sorry  she  ever  trusted  him  at  all.  Had  he  told 
her  that  he  wished  to  leave  her  village,  and  to 
part  with  her  and  her  people  as  friends,  she 
would,  no  doubt,  have  let  him  go  in  peace; 
but  by  carrying  her  off  he  made  her  his  enemy 
forever.  His  only  excuse  is  that  he  thought 
it  would  really  be  safer  both  for  his  men  and 
hers  to  make  her  o-o  with  him. 

The  Spaniards  continued  their  journey,  and 
in  a  few  days  came  to  a  large  Indian  village. 
The  young  chief  received  De  Soto  kindly,  as 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  19I 

he  had  heard  he  did  not  come  to  make  war. 
He  took  him  to  his  own  house  and  gave  his 
men  pleasant  quarters,  and  they  remained  there 
two  weeks.  The  Indians  told  them  that  there 
were  copper  and  gold  farther  on,  and  some 
Spaniards  went  to  find  it,  but  were  again  dis- 
appointed. However,  there  were  pearls  in  the 
rivers,  and  some  very  beautiful  ones  were  ob- 
tained. Many  of  these  pearls  which  the  Indians 
had  were  of  little  value,  as  they  had  bored  holes 
through  them  with  a  red-hot  iron  so  they  might 
string  them  for  necklaces  and  bracelets.  De 
Soto  was  presented  with  a  string  of  pearls  six 
feet  in  length,  with  every  pearl  as  large  as  a 
hazelnut,  which  would  have  been  of  Immense 
value,  had  not  the  beauty  of  the  pearls  been 
dimmed  by  the  action  of  fire.  The  Indians 
obtained  the  pearls  by  laying  the  oysters  on 
hot  coals,  and  as  the  heat  opened  the  shells 
the  pearls  could  be  taken  out.  To  please 
De  Soto,  the  chief  ordered  his  men  to  do 
this  in  his  presence,  and  from  some  of  the 
largest,  ten  or  twelve  pearls  were  taken  about 
the  size  of  peas.     De  Soto  left  this  pleasant  In- 


192  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

dian  village  and  again  commenced  his  march, 
and  now  came  many  dark  and  sad  days.  The 
Indians  he  met  after  this  were  mostly  hostile, 
and  there  were  many  dreadful  battles  in  which 
De  Soto  lost  men  and  horses.  They  journeyed 
summer  and  fall  and  winter,  passed  through 
dense  forests  where  the  horses  could  scarcely 
move,  and  marched  over  barren  tracts  of  coun- 
try where  they  could  get  no  supplies  ;  they  suf- 
fered from  hunger  and  sickness,  and  many  died 
on  the  weary  march,  but  De  Soto  would  not 
turn  back,  he  was  still  determined  to  find  gold. 
At  length,  when  they  were  almost  worn  out 
with  travelling  for  days  through  a  region  more 
dismal  than  any  they  had  passed  through,  un- 
inhabited, and  filled  with  tangled  forests  and 
swamps,  they  came  to  a  small  village,  and  here 
De  Soto  discovered,  not  the  gold  he  sought, 
but  something  else  which  has  made  his  name 
immortal.  The  little  village  was  built  on  the 
banks  of  a  river,  and  when  De  Soto  went  down 
to  its  margin  he  saw  that,  compared  with  the 
other  rivers  he  had  seen,  it  was  like  a  sea. 
The  river  was  a  mile  and  a  half  wide,  and  rolled 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  I93 

swiftly  by,  carrying  with  it  trees  and  logs  and 
driftwood.  For  ages  this  great  river  had 
rolled  from  the  lake  country  above  down  to  the 
Gulf,  but  no  white  man  had  ever  looked  upon 
it  until  now.  De  Soto,  in  his  search  for  gold, 
had  discovered  the  great  Mississippi,  the  largest 
river  in  the  United  States,  and  one  of  the  long- 
est on  the  globe.  The  Indians  called  the  river 
Mesaseba,  which  means,  in  their  language,  the 
Father  of  Waters. 

De  Soto  did  not  remain  here  long,  the  chief 
was  not  friendly,  and  after  a  few  days'  rest  the 
Spaniards  crossed  the  Mississippi  and  contin- 
ued their  march. 

Once  they  passed  near  an  Indian  village 
whose  chief  came  out  to  meet  them.  The  chief 
said,  as  the  Spaniards  were  more  powerful  and 
had  better  arms  than  the  Indians,  he  believed 
that  their  God  was  also  better  than  the  Indian 
god,  and  he  asked  them  to  pray  to  their  God 
for  rain,  as  the  fields  were  parched  for  want  of 
water.  De  Soto  replied  that  they  were  all  sin- 
ners, but  that  he  would  pray  to  God,  the  Father 
of  Mercies,  to  show  kindness  unto  them. 


194  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

So  he  ordered  the  carpenter  to  cut  down 
a  large  tree,  which  was  carefully  trimmed,  and 
then  formed  into  a  gigantic  cross ;  it  was  so 
large  that  they  were  two  days  in  completing  it, 
and  it  took  one  hundred  men  to  raise  it  and  plant 
it  in  the  ground.  It  was  placed  upon  a  bluff  on 
the  western  bank  of  the  Mississippi.  The  morn- 
ing after  the  cross  was  raised  the  whole  Span- 
ish army,  and  many  of  the  natives,  formed  a 
solemn  religious  procession  and  walked  around 
it.  De  Soto  and  the  chief  walked  side  by  side, 
and  the  natives  and  soldiers  followed  after,  two 
by  two.  It  seemed  for  the  time  as  if  Indian 
and  Spaniard  were  not  only  friends,  but  broth- 
ers. The  priests  chanted  hymns  and  offered 
prayers,  and  then  the  whole  procession  ad- 
vanced two  by  two  to  the  cross,  knelt  before  it, 
and  kissed  it.  Upon  the  opposite  shore  of  the 
Mississippi  thousands  of  Indians  were  gathered, 
who  were  watching  the  service  with  the  great- 
est interest;  at  times  they  seemed  to  take  part 
in  the  exercises ;  when  the  priests  raised  their 
hands  in  prayer,  they  too  raised  their  eyes  to 
heaven,  and  lifted  up  their  arms  as  if  asking 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  I95 

help,  and  the  murmur  of  their  voices  floated 
across  the  waters  of  the  river,  and  mingled 
with  the  sighing  of  the  wind  through  the  trees, 
and  with  the  notes  of  the  Christian  hymns,  and 
with  the  words  of  the  Christian  prayers  ;  and 
the  blue  sky  above  smiled  down  alike  on  the 
haughty  Spaniard  and  on  the  simple  native,  as 
he  kissed  the  great  wonder  cross,  the  symbol  of 
Him  to  whom  all  men  are  the  same,  and  whose 
love  reaches  down  to  all. 

After  the  prayers  the  people  returned  to  the 
village  in  the  same  order,  the  priests  going  be- 
fore and  chanting  the  Te  Deum  ;  and  Las  Casas, 
the  historian,  writing  of  this,  says,  "  God,  in  his 
mercy,  willing  to  show  these  heathens  that  he 
listeneth  to  those  who  call  upon  him  in  truth, 
sent  down,  in  the  middle  of  the  ensuing  night,  a 
plenteous  rain,  to  the  great  joy  of  the  Indians." 

So  the  rain  fell,  and  the  Indian  sowed  his 
seed  and  gathered  harvests  of  golden  grain ; 
and  the  cross  stood  there  in  the  shadow  of  the 
forest,  and  the  mighty  river  rolled  on  before  it, 
and  in  the  years  to  come,  when  the  memory  of 
the   Spaniard  had  almost  faded  away,  it  was 


196  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

Still  to  the  red  man  a  sig^n  of  the  love  of  the 
Great  Spirit,  who  had  helped  them  in  their  need. 

De  Soto  did  not  stay  long  among  these 
friendly  Indians,  but  pressed  on  his  way.  There 
were  again  toilsome  marches  and  weary  hours 
of  disappointment,  and,  at  last,  the  brave  heart 
of  the  leader  grew  sad  and  hopeless.  The  cli- 
mate was  unhealthful,  and  De  Soto  was  taken 
sick  with  fever,  and  at  the  same  time  he  was 
told  that  the  chief  of  that  country  was  getting 
ready  for  a  great  battle,  in  which  all  the  neigh- 
boring tribes  would  join,  and  that  they  meant  to 
kill  every  Spaniard  in  the  country. 

But  De  Soto  could  fight  no  more  battles,  for 
he  was  dying.  One  by  one  the  faithful  soldiers 
knelt  by  his  bed,  and  weeping,  bade  him  fare- 
well. He  asked  them  to  live  as  brothers,  loving 
and  helping  one  another,  and  urged  them  to 
convert  the  natives  to  the  Christian  religion. 
And  so  the  brave  soldier  died,  far  from  home 
and  that  sunny  Spain  which  he  loved  so  well, 
and  the  whole  army  wept  for  him,  for  they  loved 
him,  and  grieved  to  think  that  they  should  see 
him  no  more. 


FERDINAND   DE   SOTO.  19/ 

It  was  thought  best  not  to  let  the  Indians 
know  of  De  Soto's  death,  as  they  might  attack 
the  Spaniards  at  once  if  they  knew  their  great 
leader  was  gone.  So  De  Soto  was  buried  at 
night  by  torchhght,  and  no  sakite  was  fired  over 
his  grave,  nor  any  dirge  chanted  by  the  priests  ; 
but  the  Indians  suspected  that  he  was  dead,  and 
even  visited  the  spot  where  he  was  buried;  so 
the  soldiers,  for  fear  the  natives  would  remove 
the  body  after  they  went  away,  decided  to  take 
it  up  themselves  and  sink  it  in  the  river.  They 
cut  down  an  evergreen  oak,  whose  wood  is  al- 
most as  heavy  as  lead,  and  hollowing  out  a 
place  large  enough  for  the  body,  placed  it  in  it, 
and  at  midnight  it  was  taken  out  to  the  middle 
of  the  river,  into  whose  depths  it  immediately 
sank.  Then  the  soldiers,  in  the  silence  and 
darkness,  returned  to  the  camp,  and  De  Soto 
was  left  alone  in  the  wilderness,  and  only  the 
stars  and  the  river  knew  where  he  slept. 

His  soldiers  built  some  boats  and  sailed 
down  the  Mississippi  to  the  Gulf,  and  after 
much  hardship  reached  a  Spanish  settlement  in 
Mexico.     Few  were  left  of  the  brilliant  com- 


198  FERDINAND   DE   SOTO. 

pany  that  had  left  Spain  three  years  before,  and 
so  ended  the  expedition  which  had  sailed  away 
from  home  so  gaily.  Their  search  for  gold  had 
been  like  following  the  will-o'-the-wisp,  which 
leads  on  and  on,  and  then  vanishes  at  last,  leav- 
ing you  alone  in  the  darkness. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

VERRAZANO. 

In  France,  as  well  as  other  European  coun- 
tries, the  wonderful  accounts  of  the  wealth  of 
India  and  Cathay  had  been  listened  to  with  de- 
light and  surprise,  and  the  king,  Francis  I.,  de- 
termined to  send  out  some  ships  and  see  if  they 
might  not  discover  the  new  way  to  the  East 
that  people  had  been  looking  for  so  long.  He 
thought,  too,  that  he  would  claim  and  settle  a 
part  of  America,  so  that  the  New  World  should 
not  be  entirely  owned  by  Spain  and  England. 
Before  this,  France  had  been  content  with  send- 
ing- a  few  fishermen  to  the  northern  coasts  of 
America,  but  they  made  no  settlements,  and,  as 
soon  as  the  fishing  season  was  over,  always 
went  back  to  France  again. 

But  in  1523  an  expedition  left  France  for 
the  purpose  of  finding  a  passage  to  Cathay,  and 
exploring  the  coast  of  America.     The  expedi- 


200  VERRAZANO. 


tion  was  commanded  by  Giovani  Verrazano,  an 
Italian.  Soon  after  leaving  France,  a  tempest 
came  up,  and  all  the  ships  but  one  were  obliged 
to  return;  but  Verrazano,  with  this  one,  the 
Dauphine,  went  on  to  the  Madeiras,  and  leav- 
ing that  place  in  January,  1524,  sailed  boldly 
across  the  Atlantic.  After  a  voyage  of  over  a 
month,  during  which  time  another  very  severe 
storm  overtook  them,  they  at  last  saw  land.  It 
is  supposed  that  this  was  the  coast  of  Carolina. 
Fires  were  blazing  all  along  the  coast  as  far  as 
the  eye  could  reach,  and  Verrazano  knew  by 
that  that  the  country  was  inhabited.  He  sailed 
along  for  many  miles,  keeping  close  to  the 
shore,  and  was  delighted  with  the  new  coun- 
try, which  seemed  more  beautiful  than  any  he 
had  ever  seen  before.  The  shore  was  covered 
with  fine  white  sand,  making  a  beach  nearly 
fifteen  feet  wide,  quite  level,  except  here  and 
there  where  the  sand  was  formed  into  hillocks, 
which  were  covered  with  strong  short  grass. 
Back  from  the  shore  were  broad  fields,  which 
were  kept  fresh  by  the  numerous  streams  that 
flowed  into  the  sea,  and  still  farther  back  stood 


VERRAZANO.  20I 


immense  forests,  whose  great  variety  of  color 
charmed  the  eye.  Verrazano  was  surprised  to 
find  here  many  kinds  of  trees  that  were  un- 
known to  him,  and  said  that  no  words  could 
describe  the  beauty  of  these  forests.  "  Think 
not,"  he  says,  "that  they  are  like  the  Crimean 
forests,  or  the  solitudes  of  Scythia,  or  the  rigid 
coasts  of  the  north,  but  adorned  with  palm 
trees,  and  cypress,  and  laurel,  and  species  un- 
known to  Europe,  which  breathe  forth  from 
afar  the  sweetest  of  odors." 

And  combined  with  the  aromatic  perfume  of 
the  pines  was  the  scent  of  the  violets  and  roses, 
and  of  the  beautiful  lilies  that  swung  in  the 
lakes,  and  everywhere  birds  were  singing,  and 
graceful  deer  looked  with  startled  eyes  through 
the  leaves  of  the  hanging  vines  ;  and  the  first 
impulse  of  the  Frenchmen  was  to  land  and  en- 
joy some  of  the  flowers  and  fruits  of  this  fair 
land. 

In  the  meantime  the  natives  had  come  down 
to  the  beach,  and  stood  looking  with  wonder  on 
the  Frenchmen ;  but  as  soon  as  the  seamen 
rowed  toward  the  shore  the  timid  Indians  fled 

9* 


202  VERRAZANO. 


toward  the  woods.  But  the  Frenchmen,  by  signs 
and  friendly  motions,  made  them  understand 
that  they  need  not  fear,  and  soon  they  all  came 
crowding  round  the  seamen  with  cries  of  delight, 
pointing  out  at  the  same  time  the  best  place  to 
land.  Verrazano,  in  turn,  was  delighted  at  the 
appearance  of  the  natives,  whose  fine  figures, 
and  beautifully  ornamented  robes,  and  gayly 
decked  out  hair,  placed  them  above  the  common 
savages  that  the  Frenchman  expected  to  find  in 
the  wilds  of  America.  After  a  pleasant  little 
call  here,  Verrazano  kept  on  his  way,  still  going 
northward,  carefully  examining  the  coasts,  and 
finding  everywhere  the  same  luxuriant  growth 
of  trees  and  fiowers.  Still,  there  was  no  good 
harbor  to  be  seen ;  but  as  the  ship  was  in  need 
of  fresh  water  he  decided  to  try  and  land.  But 
this  he  found  to  be  impossible,  as  the  waves 
broke  with  great  force  upon  the  open  beach, 
making  it  dangerous  for  any  boat  that  ventured 
too  near.  The  natives  stood  on  the  shore  watch- 
ing his  efforts,  and  stretched  out  their  hands  as 
if  inviting  him  to  land,  but  he  was  obliged  to 
give  up  the  attempt  and  go  back  to  the  ship. 


VERRAZANO.  203 


The  natives  still  continued  to  make  friendly 
signs,  and  Verrazano  replied  to  them  as  well  as 
he  could,  and  ordered  a  sailor  to  swim  ashore 
with  some  presents.  The  man  obeyed,  and  got 
near  enough  to  the  shore  to  throw  the  gifts  into 
the  ready  hands  of  the  Indians  ;  but  as  he  turned 
to  swim  back  to  the  boat  he  was  overpowered 
by  the  breakers  and  dashed  upon  the  beach. 

The  Indians  immediately  surrounded  him, 
and  lifting  him  up  gently,  carried  him  farther 
up  on  the  beach,  out  of  the  reach  of  the  waves. 
But  as  soon  as  the  man  recovered  from  his  faint, 
and  saw  where  he  was,  he  began  crying  loudly 
for  help,  and  as  the  natives^  answered  his  cries 
with  louder  and  shriller  ones  of  their  own,  Ver- 
razano and  his  companions  expected  to  see  the 
unfortunate  seaman  speedily  killed  by  the  sav- 
ages ;  but  in  this  they  were  mistaken,  for  the 
Indians,  after  they  had  sufficiently  admired  the 
whiteness  and  delicacy  of  his  skin,  built  a  fire, 
and  did  all  they  could  to  help  him  out  of  his 
trouble.  Verrazano  met  the  same  kindness  from 
all  the  people  along  the  coast ;  he  found  them 
always  ready  to  offer  their  friendship,  and  to  be 


204  VERRAZANO. 


of  use  whenever  they  could.  It  is  sad  to  think 
that  for  all  the  good  he  met  at  their  hands 
he  should  allow  his  men  to  return  evil ;  but 
such  is  the  case,  for  one  of  them  having  kid- 
napped a  little  Indian  boy,  the  captain  not  only 
allowed  him  to  be  received  on  the  ship,  but  car- 
ried him  away  to  France,  and  none  of  his  friends 
ever  heard  from  him  again. 

The  Dauphine  went  on  up  the  coast,  turn- 
ing in  now  and  then  to  explore,  a  little  way,  the 
many  bays  and  rivers  which  it  passed,  and 
reached,  one  pleasant  day,  what  is  now  known 
as  the  Bay  of  New  York.  Leaving  his  ship, 
Verrazano  took  a  boat  and  sailed  into  the  inner 
bay,  approaching  the  island  on  which  New 
York  City  now  stands.  This  was  the  most 
beautiful  spot  that  the  voyagers  had  yet  seen. 
All  around  stretched  the  wooded  heights  of 
New  Jersey  and  Long  Island,  and  the  great 
river  coming  from  the  north  seemed  to  promise 
a  fair  passage  to  some  far  distant  land.  The 
natives  came  thronging  down  on  the  beach  from 
both  shores,  and,  from  their  friendly  tones  and 
signs,  seemed  to  offer  a  welcome ;  but  before 


VERRAZANO.  20$ 


Verrazano  could  go  very  far  into  the  "  beautiful 
lake,"  as  he  called  the  harbor,  he  was  com- 
pelled by  the  rising  of  the  wind  to  put  back  to 
the  ship  and  sail  on.  But  his  visit  is  interest- 
ing, because  he  was  probably  the  first  white 
man  who  had  visited  the  beautiful  harbor  which 
to-day  is  known  as  one  of  the  greatest  commer- 
cial ports  in  the  world. 

And  now  the  course  was  changed,  and  the 
Dauphine  sailed  east  through  Long  Island 
Sound  until  Narragansett  Bay  was  entered,  and 
then  a  northerly  course  was  taken,  and  the 
harbor  of  Newport  reached.  Verrazano  de- 
scribes the  country  as  very  fair  and  pleasant, 
and  indeed  it  must  have  appeared  so,  with  its 
fields  of  blossoming  trees  and  miles  of  stately 
forests.  Before  the  boat  touched  the  shore,  the 
natives  flocked  down  to  the  beach,  and  thirty 
canoes  surrounded  the  vessel,  all  filled  with  the 
wondering  Indians.  At  first  they  did  not  come 
very  near,  but  sat  at  some  distance  from  the 
ship,  silently  admiring  the  white-skinned  stran- 
gers before  them  ;  and  then  they  suddenly  gave 
a  long  shout  of  welcome,  and  began  to  come 


206  VERRAZANO, 


near  to  the  ship  and  take  the  gifts  of  beads  and 
bells  and  knives  that  the  seamen  threw  out  to 
them,  and  finally  their  last  fear  vanished  and 
they  entered  the  ship.  Here,  as  farther  south, 
Verrazano  was  struck  with  the  fine  faces  and 
figures  of  the  natives.  Among  them  were  two 
kings,  the  elder  one  about  forty  years  of  age. 
He  was  dressed  in  a  robe  of  deer-skins  beauti- 
fully embroidered,  and  wore  around  his  neck  a 
chain  of  gold  set  with  large  stones  of  various 
colors.  His  head  was  bare,  but  his  hair  was 
carefully  arranged,  tied  behind,  and  ornamented 
with  pearls  and  feathers.  The  younger  king, 
who  was  about  twenty-four,  was  dressed  in  the 
same  way,  and  all  the  warriors  who  accom- 
panied them  wore  deer-skins  highly  orna- 
mented and  polished.  The  women  did  not  ap- 
proach the  vessel,  but  remained  at  a  distance, 
seated  in  the  canoes ;  but  Verrazano  saw  that 
they  were  fine-looking,  and  modest  in  behavior, 
and  that  they  too  wore  the  finely-dressed  skins 
of  the  deer,  and  had  their  hair  arranged  in  a 
variety  of  ornamental  braids.  The  hair  of  the 
older  women  was  arranged  very  much  like  that 


VERRAZANO.  20/ 


of  the  women  of  Egypt  and  Syria,  and  the  mar- 
ried women  were  distinguished  by  ear-rings  of 
certain,  pecuHar  form. 

Verrazano  stayed  here  some  fifteen  days, 
pleasantly  entertained  by  the  natives,  and  find- 
ing them  always  friendly  and  trustful.  He  made 
several  trips  up  the  bay,  and  examined  the 
shores  closely  in  search  of  gold  and  silver,  which 
he  found  the  natives  thought  much  less  of  than 
they  did  of  the  brass  rings  and  strings  of  beads 
that  he  bestowed  upon  them.  But  evidently 
the  bay  did  not  lead  to  Cathay,  and  no  pre- 
cious metals  were  found  on  its  borders,  and  so 
Verrazano  got  the  Dauphine  under  way  again, 
and  taking  affectionate  leave  of  the  Indians, 
sailed  out  into  the  Atlantic  and  up  the  coast 
toward  Maine.  And  now  the  country  changed 
very  much  in  appearance,  and  the  natives  were 
less  friendly.  There  were  no  beautiful  palm- 
trees,  or  delicate  blossoms  of  apple  and  peach, 
and  in  place  of  green  fields  and  sunny  mead- 
ows, were  only  sand  and  rocks.  The  na- 
tives would  not  come  near  the  ships  or  let 
the  Frenchmen  land,  and  the  trading  was  all 


208  VERRAZANO. 


done  by  means  of  a  long  cord  stretching  from 
the  ship  to  the  shore,  and  over  which  the 
articles  were  passed,  the  natives  retreating  hur- 
riedly to  the  woods  as  soon  as  the  bargains 
were  made.  But  Verrazano  landed  in  spite  of 
the  opposition  of  the  Indians,  and  went  several 
miles  into  the  country.  He  found  that  the  huts 
were  poorer  than  those  at  Narragansett  Bay, 
which  were  made  of  split  logs  and  nicely 
thatched,  and  that  the  country  was  poorer,  too, 
than  any  he  had  seen  yet.  When  he  started 
back  to  the  ship  the  natives  followed  his  party, 
shooting  arrows  at  them,  and  showing  their 
anger  by  fierce,  wild  cries.  But  the  Frenchmen 
reached  the  ship  in  safety,  and  were  soon  sail- 
ing away,  still  northward,  and  soon  reached  the 
shores  of  Maine,  whose  outlying  islands,  Ver- 
razano said,  reminded  him  of  some  portions  of 
the  Adriatic.  And  then,  being  short  of  provi- 
sions, and  knowing  that  the  whole  wide  sea 
lay  between  him  and  France,  he  turned  the 
Dauphine  homeward,  having  explored  the  At- 
lantic coast,  from  the  Carolinas  to  Maine,  more 
carefully   than    any   other    navigator    had   yet 


VERRAZANO.  209 


done.  When  he  returned  to  France  he  gave  it 
as  his  opinion  that  the  passage  to  Cathay  did 
not  He  through  the  New  World,  and  stated  that 
America  was  very  much  larger  than  Europeans 
had  hitherto  believed.  His  voyage  is  consid- 
ered important  because  of  the  good  idea  he 
gave  of  the  eastern  coast  of  America,  and  be- 
cause he  corrected  the  wrong  belief  that  the 
New  World  was  as  small  as  other  navigators 
had  declared. 

But  he  could  not  make  them  believe  that 
there  was  no  passage  to  Cathay  through  the 
fair  provinces  of  the  New  World  :  that  beautiful 
dream  was  not  dispelled  for  many  a  long  year 
after  Verrazano  and  his  bold  crew  had  become 
old  and  gray. 


CHAPTER   XV. 


JACQUES    CARTIER. 


Verrazano  told  such  wonderful  stones  of 
America  that  many  other  Frenchmen  felt  a 
desire  to  go  and  see  the  country  for  themselves 
and  find  out  if  the  stories  were  true.  But  some 
years  passed  before  any  new  expedition  was 
sent  out,  and  even  then  it  was  only  undertaken 
because  the  French  became  jealous  of  the  power 
that  Spain  was  getting  in  the  New  World. 

Spain  already  claimed  Mexico,  Peru,  Florida, 
and  the  Pacific,  and  all  at  once  the  French  king 
became  alarmed  and  asked  if  God  had  created 
the  new  countries  for  Castilians  (Spaniards) 
alone  !  His  courtiers  hastened  to  tell  him  no, 
indeed,  and  that  France  had  as  good  a  right  as 
any  other  country  to  own  and  settle  America. 
And  so  Verrazano  was  sent  out,  and  after  him, 
ten  years  later,  came  Jacques  Cartier,  who  left 
the  fort  of  St.  Malo  in  April,  1534. 


JACQtTES  CARTIER  FINDS  NEWFOUNDLAND  INHOSPITABLB. 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  211 

The  ships  sailed  across  the  Atlantic,  taking  a 
more  northerly  course  than  usual,  and  in  twenty 
days  reached  Newfoundland.  Cartier  coasted 
along  until  he  reached  the  Straits  of  Belle  Isle, 
which  he  passed  through  and  entered  the  Gulf 
of  St.  Lawrence,  and  then  sailed  leisurely  along 
the  western  coast  of  Newfoundland.  But  much 
to  his  disappointment  the  country  was  not  beau- 
tiful and  pleasant,  as  he  had  heard,  but,  on  the 
contrary,  very  dismal  and  inhospitable.  The 
fertile  valleys  and  green  fields  that  Verrazano 
had  spoken  of  were  nowhere  to  be  seen,  but 
instead  only  rocks  and  stones,  and  wild  rough 
coasts. 

The  natives  were  very  savage  in  appear- 
ance and  not  very  friendly ;  and  Cartier  made 
a  very  short  stay  here,  and  steered  across  the 
Gulf  to  a  bay  on  the  opposite  side,  where  he 
found  the  natives  also  in  poor  condition,  living 
on  raw  fish  and  flesh,  without  clothing,  and  us- 
ing their  upturned  canoes  as  houses.  But  the 
country  itself  was  much  pleasanter  than  that  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  Gulf,  and  so  Cartier 
decided  to  take  possession  of  it.     Accordingly 


212  JACQUES   CARTIER. 

he  called  all  his  company  together,  and  with 
great  ceremony  raised  a  huge  cross  and  claimed 
the  whole  region  for  the  King  of  France. 

The  natives  had  all  gathered  round  and 
stood  looking  on  curiously.  There  stood  the 
cross,  thirty  feet  high,  carved  with  three  fleur- 
de-lys,  and  the  inscription,  "Vive  le  Roi  de 
France;"  and  not  at  all  understanding  what 
right  these  strangers  had  to  their  country,  the 
chief  and  his  principal  men  told  Cartier,  as 
well  as  they  could  by  signs,  that  they  would 
much  rather  he  should  take  the  cross  down 
again  and  go  away  with  his  ships  and  leave 
them  in  peace.  And  Cartier  explained  to  them 
in  turn  that  the  king  he  served  was  very  pow- 
erful and  rich,  and  able  to  send  many  soldiers 
and  take  the  land  by  force  if  he  so  wished ; 
but  that  also  he  was  a  very  kind  and  loving 
king,  and  wanted  to  do  all  that  he  could  for 
the  Indians,  and  that  the  very  best  thing  that 
could  happen  to  them  would  be  to  have  some 
Frenchmen  come  there  and  settle  and  teach 
them  the  arts  of  peace. 

And  then  he  gave  them  some  trifling  pres- 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  21  3 

ents,  some  strings  of  glass  beads,  and  yards 
of  bright  calico,  and  bits  of  colored  glass,  and 
shining  penknives,  and  the  Indians  were  so 
impressed  by  these  gifts  that,  partly  from  a 
desire  to  obtain  more,  and  partly  through  fear 
of  the  great  unknown  king,  they  not  only  let 
the  cross  remain  standing,  but  what  was  much 
more,  the  chief  consented  to  let  his  two  sons 
go  back  to  France  with  Cartier,  and  see  for 
themselves  the  riches  and  power  of  his  coun- 
try and  king. 

And  so  the  two  Indian  boys  sailed  away 
with  these  white  strangers,  and  learned  stran- 
ger things  than  they  had  ever  dreamed  of. 
Never  before  had  they  been  farther  away  from 
land  than  they  could  go  in  a  day's  journey 
in  their  birch  bark  canoes ;  but  now,  as  they 
stood  on  the  deck  of  this  great  ship,  and  saw 
the  land  fade  from  their  sight,  and  the  great, 
boundless  sea  all  around  stretch  away  and 
away  until  it  met  the  sky,  and  the  sun  drop 
down  into  the  water  and  redden  its  glossy 
waves,  it  was  all  so  different  from  what  they 
had  been  used  to  that  their  hearts  grew  sick 


214  JACQUES   CARTIER. 

with  longing  for  home  and  the  fear  that  they 
had  sailed  into  a  new  world  and  left  their 
friends  forever.  But  by  and  by,  as  the  familiar 
stars  came  out,  and  the  moon's  friendly  face  ap- 
peared, and  the  night  came  softly  down  on  the 
sea,  the  ship  ceased  to  seem  so  strange  and 
looked  very  comfortable  and  pleasant,  and  when 
the  morning  came  they  did  not  look  backward, 
but  only  forward,  to  that  mysterious  France  to- 
ward which  they  were  sailing,  and  which  they 
reached  after  a  pleasant  voyage  early  in  Sep- 
tember. 

Cartier  had  been  gone  four  months,  and  his 
account  of  his  voyage  was  so  encouraging  that  it 
was  decided  to  send  out  another  expedition  as 
soon  as  the  winter  was  over.  The  Indian  lads 
were  well  received  at  the  French  court.  The 
king  was  very  kind  and  condescending  and 
generous,  and  told  them  that  it  would  be  his 
greatest  pleasure  to  send  over  some  of  his  sub- 
jects, and  make  all  the  Indians  Christians. 
And  the  two  boys,  Taignoagny  and  Domagaia, 
looked  at  the  silk  and  velvet  robes  of  the  French 
nobles,   and  at   the    diamonds  and  rubies  that 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  21$ 

glittered  in  their  sword-hilts,  and  at  the  king's 
beautiful  palaces,  and  the  marble  cathedrals  and 
splendid  mansions  of  Paris,  and  decided  that  to 
be  a  Christian  must  be  indeed  a  happy  lot,  and 
expressed  their  willingness  to  have  their  whole 
tribe  converted  as  speedily  as  possible. 

Their  whole  visit  was  a  succession  of 
wonders  and  delights,  for  France  was  more 
beautiful  even  than  their  wildest  dreams  of 
their  own  "  happy  hunting-grounds,"  where  it 
was  supposed  that  the  Indians  had  everything 
they  could  desire.  But  what  Canadian  Indians 
had  ever  dreamed  of  such  a  land  as  this,  with 
its  fields  of  flowers,  and  miles  of  ripened  grain, 
and  sunny  slopes  purple  with  luscious  grapes  ? 
Even  the  winter  was  pleasant,  with  but  little 
snow  and  ice  outside,  and  warm,  comfortable 
rooms  inside.  Very  different  from  their  own 
winter,  where  the  snow  lay  thick  on  the  ground 
for  months,  and  the  rivers  and  lakes  were 
frozen,  and  the  pines  and  balsams  hung  thick 
with  icicles  whose  musical  tinkling  seemed  like 
a  sad  song  for  the  summer  that  was  gone. 
Yes,  Cartier  had  told  the  truth,  his  king  was 


2l6  JACQUES  CARTIER. 

very  powerful  and  rich  and  great,  and  when  the 
spring  came  and  another  fleet  left  St.  Malo, 
Taignoagny  and  Domagaia  were  quite  in  love 
with  France,  and  very  eager  for  the  voyage 
to  be  over,  so  that  they  could  tell  their 
friends  all  the  wonderful  things  they  had  seen 
there. 

Cartier  and  his  companions  were  in  fine 
spirits,  for  the  voyage  promised  to  be  a  fair  one, 
and  they  were  all  sure  that  honor  and  wealth 
awaited  them  in  the  New  World.  In  August 
they  arrived  at  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and 
passing  Anticosti  Island  entered  the  mouth  of 
a  great  river.  Taignoagny  and  Domagaia  said 
that  the  name  of  this  river  was  Hochelaga,  and 
that  it  came  from  a  far  distant  country,  and  was 
so  long  that  no  man  had  ever  seen  the  begin- 
ning of  it.  Cartier  listened  to  this  story  with 
interest ;  the  stream  was  so  broad  and  deep 
that  he  thought  perhaps  it  was  not  a  river  at 
all,  but  a  strait,  and  that  he  had  at  last  dis- 
covered the  long  looked-for  passage  to  the 
East.  But  the  Indians  told  him  that  as  they 
went  up  the  river  it  became  narrower,  and  its 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  21/ 

waters  changed  from  salt  to  fresh,  and  then 
Cartier  saw  that  it  could  not  be  the  wished-for 
strait,  and  so  made  no  haste  to  follow  its  course. 

He  sailed  slowly  up  the  great  river,  which  is 
now  known  as  the  St.  Lawrence,  examining 
the  country  on  either  side,  and  looking  for  a 
good  place  to  spend  the  winter.  He  passed 
the  Saguenay,  and  some  distance  beyond  an- 
chored at  an  island  called  by  him  Isle-aux-Cou- 
dres,  because  of  the  abundance  of  hazels,  and 
after  a  short  stay  here,  sailed  still  farther  on  and 
stopped  at  another  island,  which  abounded  in 
grapes  and  which  he  called  Bacchus  Island — 
now  known  as  the  Isle  d' Orleans.  Here  he  re- 
ceived a  visit  from  the  natives,  a  large  number 
of  whom  had  come  from  the  shore  in  canoes  to 
look  at  these  white  visitors. 

Cartier  invited  them  on  board  his  ship,  but 
they  were  afraid  to  come  very  near  until  Tai- 
gnoagny  and  Domagaia  appeared,  and  assured 
them  there  was  no  danger,  and  that  the  French- 
men were  friends.  The  Indians  were  rejoiced 
to  see  their  two  young  countrymen  again,  and 
came  crowding  aboard  the  ships  to  hear  their 


21 8  JACQUES   CARTIER. 

wonderful  stones  about  France.  Donnacona, 
the  chief,  made  a  long  speech,  in  which  he 
offered  his  friendship  to  Cartier  and  thanked 
him  for  his  kindness  to  his  young  countrymen, 
and  then  kissed  his  hand  and  placed  his  arms 
about  his  neck  in  token  of  gratitude  and  trust, 
and  then  he  invited  Cartier  and  his  men  to  his 
own  home  at  Stadacona,  a  little  village  which 
stood  where  now  stands  the  beautiful  city  of 
Quebec.  The  village  stood  on  the  cliffs,  high 
above  the  river,  which  flowed  beneath,  and  which 
formed  there  a  pleasant  and  safe  harbor  for  the 
ships.  So  Cartier  accepted  Donnacona's  invi- 
tation and  they  all  went  to  Stadacona,  and  spent 
some  time  there  very  pleasantly,  getting  ac- 
quainted with  the  Indians  and  learning  their 
mode  of  living,  listening  to  their  stories  of  bear 
and  deer  hunts,  and  their  accounts  of  snow- 
shoeing  and  tobogganing,  and  expeditions  up 
the  river  and  into  the  great  forests  all  around. 
Particularly  they  liked  to  dwell  upon  their 
battles  with  another  great  chief  who  lived  far- 
ther up  the  river.  This  was  Hochelaga,  after 
whom  the  river  was  named,  and  who  was  the 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  219 

most  powerful  chieftain  in  the  country.  Don- 
nacona  was  very  jealous  of  him,  and  was  there- 
fore much  surprised  and  grieved  when  one 
day  Cartier  said  that  he  had  made  up  his  mind 
to  go  and  pay  Hochelaga  a  visit. 

In  vain  Donnacona  tried  to  make  him  believe 
that  the  way  was  long  and  dangerous,  and  that 
Hochelaga  would  probably  take  him  prisoner 
and  treat  him  and  his  men  very  cruelly.  Car- 
tier  was  all  the  more  resolved  to  go.  And  then 
Donnacona  resolved  to  play  a  trick  upon  him, 
and  see  if  he  could  not  frighten  him  from  go- 
ing to  Hochelaga,  and  so  keep  all  the  shining 
looking-glasses  and  knives,  and  bright  basins, 
and  pretty  glass  beads  for  himself  and  his  own 
people,  for  he  could  not  bear  to  think  that  any 
of  this  wealth  should  fall  into  his  rival's  hands. 
So  one  afternoon,  as  Cartier  and  his  friends 
stood  looking  over  the  sides  of  their  ship,  they 
saw  a  most  horrible  sight.  A  canoe  pushed  out 
from  shore  and  approached  the  vessel.  It  was 
paddled  by  some  disguised  natives,  and  in  it 
were  three  Indian  devils.  And  dreadful  devils 
they  were — the  Frenchmen  had  certainly  never 


220  JACQUES   CARTIER. 

imagined  such  a  kind  before.  Their  faces  were 
as  black  as  soot,  and  they  were  dressed  in  black 
and  white  hogskins,  and  wore  horns  more  than 
a  yard  long  on  their  heads.  And  as  they  neared 
the  ship  they  shouted  and  yelled  in  a  very  dia- 
bolical manner,  and  altogether  acted  as  much 
like  devils  as  they  knew  how.  And  crowds  of 
natives  followed  them  down  to  the  bank,  shriek- 
ing and  howling  and  throwing  up  their  hands, 
and  then  rushing  back  to  the  woods  as  if  in 
great  fright.  Taignoagny  and  Domagaia,  who 
stood  by  Cartier's  side,  also  threw  up  their 
hands,  and  looking  toward  heaven  declared 
that  these  devils  had  come  from  Hochelaga, 
and  that  the  god  Cudruaigny  had  sent  them  to 
warn  the  French  that  all  who  attempted  to 
visit  Hochelaga  should  perish  on  the  way,  for 
Cudruaigny  would  send  snow-storms,  and  ice- 
storms,  and  cold  piercing  blasts  from  the  north, 
and  the  French  would  all  die  miserably  of  cold 
and  exposure. 

But  the  French  only  laughed  at  the  devils, 
and  called  Cudruaigny  a  "  noddy,"  and  said 
they  had  received  word  from  heaven  that  the 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  221 

weather  would  be  fair,  and  that  they  would  all 
be  defended  from  the  cold,  and  so  the  Indian 
devils,  who  were  no  match  for  French  priests, 
turned  back  to  the  shore,  and  the  natives,  giving 
three  loud  shrieks  in  token  of  their  defeat,  took 
the  devils  in  their  midst  and  began  a  wild  dance 
on  the  beach  ;  and  the  next  day,  when  Cartier 
started  for  Hochelaga,  they  sent  their  good 
wishes  with  him,  and  promised  protection  to 
those  who  remained  behind. 

For  days  and  days  Cartier  sailed  along  the 
beautiful  banks  of  the  great  river,  stopping  now 
and  then  to  enter  the  great  forests  which  were 
full  of  all  kinds  of  game,  or  to  gather  the  wild 
grapes  that  hung  full  on  every  side  ;  and  every- 
where the  natives  came  down  to  the  beach  and 
greeted  them  pleasantly,  and  when  they  reached 
Hochelaga  they  found  a  great  crowd  of  Indians 
waiting  to  receive  them  and  lead  them  to  their 
village.  Cartier  and  his  companions  put  on 
their  velvet  mantles,  and  plumed  hats,  and  daz- 
zling swords,  and  marched  on  with  great  pomp, 
followed  by  the  admiring  crowd. 

The   village  was  very  pleasantly  situated ; 


222  JACQUES   CARTIER. 

in  front  flowed  the  shining  waters  of  the  Ho- 
chelaga,  which  was  nearly  a  mile  wide  at  that 
point,  and  behind,  like  a  protecting  spirit,  stood 
the  beautifully  wooded  mountain  which  Cartier 
called  Mount  Royal,  a  name  which  it  still  bears. 
The  village  itself  stood  in  the  midst  of  great 
fields  of  Indian  corn,  ripe  for  gathering,  sur- 
rounded by  palisades  for  defence  against  hos- 
tile tribes.  There  were  about  fifty  huts,  that 
of  the  chief  being  the  largest,  and  situated 
in  the  centre  near  the  great  public  square, 
where  all  the  people  now  gathered  and  look- 
ed with  wonder  and  reverence  on  these  new- 
comers. And  the  mothers  brouo-ht  their  little 
children  in  their  arms,  and  begged  that  these 
white  strangers  would  touch  them,  thinking  in 
some  strange  way  that  even  the  touch  of  these 
^wonderful  visitors  would  bring  blessing  with  it. 
They  were  quite  ready  to  believe  that  these 
white  men  came  from  a  land  richer  and  greater 
than  their  own  ;  indeed  they  would  have  be- 
lieved that  they  came  from  heaven  itself  if  Car- 
tier  had  told  them  so,  for  all  the  Indians  always 
worshipped  beautiful  objects,  and  they  thought 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  223 


that  men  whose  skin  was  soft  and  white,  and 
who  wore  such  rich  clothing,  must  belong  in 
some  great  land  where  men  were  nobler  and 
better  than  poor  half-clothed  races  like  their 
own. 

And  so  they  brought  their  sick  king  and 
laid  him  down  before  Cartier,  and  asked  him  to 
touch  him  and  heal  him,  and  Cartier  knelt  down 
and  rubbed  the  king's  useless  limbs  and  prayed 
over  him ;  but  more  than  that  he  could  not  do. 
But  the  sight  of  the  kneeling  Christians,  and  the 
sound  of  their  prayers  uttered  to  an  unseen  God, 
filled  the  Indians  with  awe  :  they  too  knelt  down 
and  looked  toward  heaven,  and  made  the  sign 
of  the  cross,  and  prayed  as  well  as  they  knew 
how,  that  the  strangers'  God  would  pity  them 
and  heal  their  sick  and  lame  and  blind. 

King  Agouhanna  then  gave  his  crown  of 
porcupine  quills  to  Cartier  as  a  token  of  grati- 
tude, and  as  this  was  the  only  thing  of  the  least 
value  that  the  poor  chief  possessed,  Cartier  ac- 
cepted it  with  great  courtesy,  and  in  return  pre- 
sented the  tribe  with  some  of  those  brass  rings 
and  brooches  and  beads  and  knives  that  Don- 


224  JACQUES   CARTIER. 

nacona  had  tried  in  vain  to  keep  for  himself. 
And  these  made  the  Indians  wild  with  joy,  and 
so  altoofether  the  visit  of  the  Frenchmen  was  a 
great  success,  and  when  they  returned  to  Stada- 
cona  they  told  such  stories  of  the  kindness  and 
good-will  of  the  Indians  at  Hochelaga  that 
Donnacona  was  quite  devoured  with  jealousy 
and  hated  his  rival  more  than  ever. 

The  French  built  a  fort  now,  and  got  ready 
to  spend  the  winter  comfortably,  and  their  prep- 
arations were  made  none  too  soon,  for  in  a  few 
weeks  the  river  had  frozen  over,  and  the  ships 
lay  buried  in  snow,  and  the  strangers  began  to 
see  a  Canadian  winter  for  themselves  and 
judge  how  they  liked  it.  Although  very  dif- 
ferent from  any  winter  they  had  ever  spent 
before,  it  might  have  been  a  pleasant  one  had 
not  a  terrible  disease  broken  out  among  the  In- 
dians, which  soon  spread  to  the  French  camp. 
In  a  short  time  twenty-four  of  Cartier's  men  had 
died,  and  the  rest  were  all  sick  but  three. 

Cartier  became  afraid  that  the  Indians  would 
attack  the  fort  and  destroy  his  men,  if  they 
learned  of  their  weakness,  so  he  ordered  them 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  22$ 

to  keep  away,  and  whenever  any  of  them  came 
near  he  had  his  men  beat  against  the  sides  of 
their  berths  with  sticks  and  hammers,  so  that 
the  Indians  would  think  they  were  at  work.  But 
the  Indians,  instead  of  meaning  harm,  thought 
only  of  doing  good.  As  soon  as  they  learned 
that  the  French  had  taken  the  disease  they  came 
to  them  and  offered  their  own  remedies,  and  tried 
in  every  way  to  be  of  use.  The  squaws  brought 
to  the  camp  the  boughs  of  a  certain  tree  and 
taught  the  French  how  to  prepare  tea  from  the 
bark  and  leaves,  and  this  medicine  was  so  pow- 
erful that  in  a  few  days  all  the  sick  became  well, 
not  only  those  who  were  suffering  from  this  dis- 
ease, but  also  those  who  were  afflicted  with  any 
other  malady.  It  is  not  known  exactly  what  this 
tree  was  ;  it  may  have  been  the  sassafras,  or 
possibly  the  spruce  ;  but  whatever  it  was  it 
cured  the  sick  and  the  French  were  very  grate- 
ful, and  said  that  all  the  physicians  in  France 
could  not  have  done  as  much  in  a  year  as  these 
Indian  squaws  accomplished  in  one  day  by 
means  of  this  wonderful  medicine. 

The  French  made  a  very  cruel  return  for  all 


226  JACQUES    CARTIER. 

the  kindness  they  had  received  from  their  dark- 
skinned  friends,  for  in  the  spring,  when  Cartier 
left  Canada,  he  carried  with  him  the  good  chief 
Donnacona  and  nine  of  his  countrymen  as  pris- 
oners to  France.  It  was  a  very  wicked  and 
treacherous  thing  to  do,  for  Cartier  had  invited 
the  chief  and  his  men  on  board  the  ships  to  take 
part  in  a  feast  that  was  being  given  in  honor  of 
his  departure ;  but  as  soon  as  he  saw  that  the 
Indians  were  in  his  power  he  gave  orders  for 
the  ship  to  sail,  and  so  Donnacona  and  his 
friends  were  carried  away  from  their  relatives, 
who  stood  crying  and  begging  for  mercy  on  the 
bank  of  the  river,  and  that  was  the  way  the 
French  left  Canada  and  its  friendly  people,  who 
had  shown  them  nothinof  but  kindness  and  trust. 
It  was  not  usual  for  Frenchmen  to  treat  In- 
dians in  this  way,  for  of  all  the  Europeans  who 
came  to  America  the  French  were  the  most  be- 
loved by  the  natives.  They  were  the  only  ones 
who  could  live  peaceably  side  by  side  with 
their  Indian  neighbors,  who  grew  to  love  and 
respect  them,  sometimes  attending  their  churches 
and  often  bringing  their  children  to  be  baptized 


JACQUES   CARTIER.  22/ 

by  the  kindly  French  priests,  and  Cartier  being 
a  Frenchman  was  afterward  very  sorry  for  the 
deceit  he  had  practised,  and,  no  doubt,  would 
have  taken  Donnacona  and  his  captive  friends 
back  again  to  Canada  ;  but  the  Indians  could  not 
live  in  exile,  and  before  long  they  had  all  died 
of  homesickness  except  one  little  girl,  who  in- 
deed grew  up  and  married  happily,  but  who  still 
longed  all  her  life  for  a  sight  of  the  wide  shining 
river  and  the  dark  clustered  pines  of  her  native 
land. 

Four  years  after,  France  made  another  at- 
tempt to  settle  Canada.  Cartier  then  met  with 
the  reward  of  his  former  treachery.  The  Indians 
were  no  longer  friendly,  and  refused  to  believe 
him  when  he  said  that  only  Donnacona  was 
dead,  and  the  rest  were  all  married  and  living  in 
France  as  q^reat  lords. 

Besides,  the  French  had  been  disappointed 
in  not  finding  gold  and  silver  in  the  country, 
and  so  after  awhile  Cartier's  ship  sailed  back  to 
France  again,  and  it  was  nearly  fifty  years  before 
another  attempt  was  made  to  make  a  French 
settlement  in  the  northern  part  of  America. 


CHAPTER    XVI. 

THE    HUGUENOTS. 

About  the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  century 
a  great  rehgious  quarrel  arose  in  France,  be- 
cause some  of  the  people  wished  to  leave  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church  and  found  a  new  re- 
ligion. These  people  were  called  Huguenots, 
and  the  king  of  France  and  the  priests  of 
the  Church,  and  most  of  the  great  noble- 
men, thought  they  would  be  doing  a  very 
nice  and  good  thing  if  they  could  make  the 
Huguenots  come  back  into  the  Church  again 
and  be  satisfied  with  their  old  faith.  So  many 
cruel  things  were  done  by  the  king-  and  his 
ministers,  and  the  poor  Huguenots  had  a  very 
hard  time  of  it.  They  were  shot  and  burned 
and  hanged — men  and  women  and  little  help- 
less children  ;  and  the  more  Huguenots  were 
murdered,  the  more  the  king  thought  that  he 
was  doing  God  good  service. 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  229 

But  there  was  one  great  nobleman  who 
thought  the  Huguenots  were  right,  and  joined 
himself  to  them  and  said  he  would  give  his 
money  and  his  life  to  protect  them.  This  man 
was  Admiral  Coligny ;  and  as  he  was  very  rich 
and  powerful  he  decided  to  send  the  Huguenots 
away  from  France  to  America,  where  they  would 
be  able  to  live  peaceably,  without  fear  of  the 
cruel  king. 

So  Coligny  sent  out  some  ships,  carrying  as 
many  Huguenots  as  they  could,  to  the  New 
World,  and  every  one  thought  that  the  trouble 
would  be  nicely  settled  in  this  way  and  that 
France  was  well  rid  of  the  Huguenots. 

The  company  was  commanded  by  John  Ri- 
bault,  a  very  good  and  brave  man,  and  one  not 
likely  to  be  discouraged,  for  it  needed  a  brave 
heart  to  lead  these  people  so  far  from  their 
loved  France  and  find  homes  for  them  in  a 
strange  land.  The  voyage  was  very  long  and 
so  stormy  that  it  seemed  sometimes  they  would 
never  reach  America  at  all,  and  they  grew  very 
tired  of  the  sight  of  the  sea,  always  so  gray  and 
threatening,  looking  like  a  great  monster  ready 


230  THE   HUGUENOTS. 


to  devour  them  all ;  but  at  last,  one  beautiful 
spring  day,  as  they  stood  looking  wearily  to- 
ward the  west,  a  very  fair  and  pleasant  country 
met  their  view. 

A  shining,  level  beach  stretched  up  and 
down,  and  behind  this  the  land  was  green  with 
great  trees  whose  waving  branches  seemed  to 
nod  a  welcome  to  the  strangers.  As  far  as  they 
could  see  this  beautiful  forest  was  all  that  met 
their  eyes,  not  a  sign  of  hill  or  mountain ;  and 
the  next  day,  when,  after  sailing  along  the  coast 
a  little  way,  they  entered  the  mouth  of  a  deep, 
broad  river,  and  saw  the  fresh  meadow  grass, 
and  smelled  the  perfume  of  the  shrubs  and  flow- 
ers, they  thought  that  they  had  been  indeed  led 
to  a  pleasant  home,  and  hoped  that  their  trou- 
bles were  over.  It  was  on  the  first  day  of  May, 
1562,  that  they  landed  on  the  banks  of  this 
river,  and  for  that  reason  they  called  it  the  river 
of  May — it  is  now  known  as  the  St.  John.  The 
Indians,  no  doubt,  wondered  very  much  to  see 
these  white  strangers,  but  they  received  them 
very  kindly  and  showed  them  by  signs  and  gifts 
that  they  wished  to  be  friends  ;  they  brought 


THE    HUGUENOTS.  23 1 

them  finely-dressed  skins,  and  leather  girdles, 
and  strings  of  pearls,  and  golden  ornaments  ; 
and  the  French  gave  in  return  some  colored 
beads  and  shining  knives,  and — most  wonderful 
of  all  to  the  Indians — squares  of  tiny  looking- 
glasses.  These  seemed  very  beautiful  to  the 
simple  natives,  who  had  never  seen  their  faces 
before  except  in  the  clear  waters  of  their  lakes 
and  rivers. 

The  second  day  after  the  landing  Ribault  set 
up  a  stone  column  on  which  were  engraved  the 
arms  of  France.  He  meant  by  this  that  he 
claimed  all  that  country  for  the  king  of  France, 
and  for  any  Frenchmeil  who  might  want  to  come 
there  and  live,  and  that  no  other  European  na- 
tion would  be  allowed  to  settle  there  without 
his  permission.  The  Indians  did  not  in  the  least 
know  what  the  stone  column  meant ;  they  did  not 
suppose  for  a  moment  that  these  kind-looking 
strangers,  whom  they  had  received  so  cordially, 
meant  in  return  to  take  possession  of  their  land 
just  as  much  as  if  it  had  been  given  them  by 
their  chiefs.  But  this  is  just  what  the  French 
did  mean  to  do,   and  if  the   Indians  had  been 


232  THE    HUGUENOTS. 


unfriendly  there  would  have  been  a  great  deal 
of  trouble;  but  the  natives  of  Florida  were 
among  the  most  peaceable  of  the  Indian  tribes, 
and  they  and  the  new-comers  got  along  very 
peaceably  and  grew  very  fond  of  one  another. 
Everywhere  in  America  the  Indians  were  treated 
better  by  the  French  than  by  any  other  nation, 
and  wherever  the  French  settled  the  Indians 
soon  became  their  friends.  So  the  Huguenots 
took  possession  of  their  new  home  and  found 
living  there  very  pleasant,  indeed  ;  and  in  fact 
they  could  scarcely  have  chosen  a  better  place 
than  this  fair  land,  with  its  abundance  of  fruits, 
its  rivers  full  of  fish,  and  its  forests  abounding  in 
animals,  valuable  for  food  and  skins.  But  al- 
though this  pleasant  country  seemed  almost 
like  heaven  after  the  troubles  they  had  had  in 
France,  still  they  were  not  satisfied.  They  no- 
ticed that  the  Indians  wore  ornaments  of  gold 
and  silver,  and  that  they  had  great  strings  of 
pearls  and  turquoises  ;  and  these  things  seemed, 
in  the  eyes  of  the  French,  of  more  value  than 
anything  else.  And  then,  too,  they  had  heard 
marvellous  stories   of   Cibola,   a  place  on  the 


THE    HUGUENOTS.  233 

Pacific  coast,  where  there  were  great  cities  with 
houses  built  of  Hme  and  stone,  and  whose  inhab- 
itants wore  garments  of  wool  and  cloth,  and 
decked  themselves  with  turquoises  and  emer- 
alds, and  all  their  household  utensils  were 
made  of  gold  and  silver,  and  the  walls  of  their 
temples  were  covered  with  gold,  and  their  altars 
were  studded  with  precious  stones.  A  wonder- 
ful place  was  Cibola,  containing,  perhaps,  a  val- 
ley of  diamonds  and  rivers  of  gleaming  pearls. 
So  they  decided  not  to  stay  quietly  here,  but  to 
look  around  a  little  and  see  if  they  could  not 
find  a  place  as  rich  in  gold  and  silver  and  pre- 
cious stones  as  Cibola  itself 

They  sailed  up  the  Atlantic  coast  and  found 
the  country  just  as  beautiful  and  promising  as 
their  first  view  of  it,  and  found  also  the  same 
kind  welcome  from  the  natives.  By  and  by 
they  entered  the  harbor  of  Port  Royal,  and  it 
was  decided  that  this  would  be  a  good  place  to 
make  a  settlement,  leaving  some  of  their  num- 
ber there  while  the  rest  returned  with  Ribault 
to  France  to  report  the  success  they  had  met 
with.     It,  perhaps,  would  have  been  better  If 


234  THE    HUGUENOTS. 


they  had  all  gone  back  home,  for  a  very  sorry 
time  had  those  who  were  left  behind.  Instead 
of  making  provision  for  the  future,  they  thought 
only  of  the  gold  and  silver  they  might  get,  and 
depended  entirely  on  the  Indians  for  their  food; 
and  although  the  Indians  were  most  generous, 
still  their  food  gave  out  at  last  and  the  French- 
men had  nothinof  to  do  but  wait  for  Ribault's 
return.  But  as  the  months  passed  and  he  did 
not  come,  they  set  off  for  France  in  a  small  ves- 
sel they  had  built,  and  after  almost  perishing  of 
hunger  and  thirst,  were  picked  up  by  an  Eng- 
lish ship  and  taken  on  their  way.  The  feeble 
were  sent  on  to  France,  but  all  the  strong  were 
taken  to  England  as  prisoners ;  and  so  ended 
the  first  attempt  of  the  Huguenots  to  settle 
America. 

But  CoHgny  decided  to  try  again,  and  in 
1567  another  company  of  Huguenots  left  France 
under  the  command  of  Rene  de  Laudonniere. 
They  had  a  pleasant  voyage  and  arrived  in  June 
at  the  River  of  May.  As  soon  as  they  stepped 
on  the  shore  they  were  greeted  with  shouts  of 
welcome  from  the  Indians,  who  came  crowding 


THE    HUGUENOTS.  235 

around  crying  out  Ami !   Ami !   the  only  French 
word  they  remembered. 

How  glad  they  were  to  hear  this  familiar 
greeting.  Like  their  friends  who  had  been 
there  before,  they  felt  that  this  pleasant  place 
would  be  a  haven  of  rest  from  the  stormy  times 
in  France.  Then  Satournia,  the  Indian  chief, 
led  them  to  the  stone  pillar  that  had  been  set 
up  two  years  before,  and  which  they  found 
crowned  with  wreaths  of  bay  and  having  at  its 
foot  little  baskets  full  of  corn  which  the  In- 
dians had  placed  there.  The  simple-hearted 
natives  kissed  the  stone  column  reverently  and 
begged  the  French  to  do  the  same.  And  to 
please  them  the  Huguenots  also  kissed  the  pil- 
lar on  which  were  engraved  the  lilies  of  France, 
and  it  seemed  for  a  moment  as  if  they  were  back 
in  their  own  loved  homes  again,  peaceful  and 
happy,  and  that  all  the  trouble  that  the  cruel 
king  had  caused  them  was  only  an  ugly  dream. 

The  next  day  the  chief  gave  the  new-comers 
a  stately  reception,  for  these  Indian  chiefs  be- 
lieved just  as  much  in  ceremony  as  did  the 
great  kings  of  Europe,  and  the  Europeans  who 


236  THE    HUGUENOTS. 


came  to  America  were  very  much  surprised  to 
find  such  respect  paid  to  rank  and  station. 
But  this  reception  was  something  very  differ- 
ent from  any  they  had  ever  seen  at  a  French 
court,  gorgeous  as  they  always  were.  In- 
stead of  a  gUttering  throne  and  tapestry  of 
cloth  of  gold,  they  saw  a  beautiful  bower  of 
trees  and  flowers.  Dark  pines  and  drooping 
palms  formed  a  great,  graceful  arch,  which  was 
made  still  more  beautiful  with  clusters  of  shining 
orange  blossoms  and  heavy  white  magnolias. 
All  the  grass  beneath  was  strewn  with  flowers, 
and  the  air  was  sweet  with  perfume,  and  thrilled 
with  the  songs  of  birds.  The  little  Huguenot 
children,  looking  on  this  wonderful  scene, 
thought  it  must  be  very  pleasant  to  live  in 
such  a  place  as  this,  where  one  might  have 
fruits  and  flowers  all  the  time,  and  where  even 
the  grown-up  men  and  women  had  time  to  take 
part  in  such  festivities  as  they  had  never  shared 
before,  except  on  very  xzx^fete  days  ;  and  they 
looked  shyly  at  their  little  dark-colored  Indian 
friends  and  held  their  hands  out  to  them,  and 
they  all  clasped  hands  and  stood  there  a  very 


THE    HUGUENOTS.  237 

happy  circle.  Satournia  stood  under  the  shadow 
of  the  arbor  and  received  his  guests  with  great 
courtesy.  He  was  clothed  in  skins  so  finely 
dressed  that  they  were  as  smooth  and  soft  as 
satin,  and  painted  with  strange  pictures  in 
bright  colors,  and  so  well  were  the  pictures 
drawn  and  colored  that  the  French  said  that  no 
painter,  no  matter  how  great  he  might  be,  could 
find  fault  with  them.  And  then  the  Indians 
gave  their  guests  beautiful  gifts,  but  the  great- 
est gift  of  all  was  a  great  wedge  of  silver  which 
was  the  present  of  Athore,  the  son  of  Satour- 
nia. Athore  was  a  very  handsome  youth,  and 
had  gentle  manners  and  a  noble  disposition ; 
and  as  he  stood  there  under  the  trees  and 
offered  the  silver  wedge  to  Laudonniere,  the 
Frenchman  thought  he  had  never  seen  a  more 
princely  boy  than  this  Indian  lad,  who  had  been 
brought  up  in  the  wilds  of  Florida. 

The  sight  of  gold  and  silver  made  the  French 
very  eager  to  leave  this  place,  in  search  of  the 
rich  mines  which  the  Indians  said  were  in  the 
interior  of  the  country ;  and  one  party  after  an- 
other was  sent  out  to  find  the  treasures  that 


238  THE    HUGUENOTS. 


they  so  much  desired.  The  Indians  were  con- 
stantly telling  wonderful  stories  of  the  wealth  of 
other  tribes,  and  advising  the  French  to  under- 
take expeditions  against  them.  It  was  said 
that  the  Indians  of  one  tribe  wore  complete 
armor  of  gold  and  silver,  and  that  the  women 
had  ornaments  and  girdles  of  the  same  precious 
metals  ;  and  another  tribe  was  so  rich  that  they 
had  a  great  pit  full  of  gold  for  which  they  had 
no  use ;  and  above  all,  far  back  from  the  sea, 
were  the  Apalichi  Mountains,  which  were  as  full 
of  gold  as  the  trees  were  full  of  blossoms. 

But  by  and  by  the  French  began  to  suspect 
that  the  Indians  were  cheating  them,  and  that 
they  only  told  these  stories  in  the  hope  that  they 
would  go  away  and  leave  them  undisturbed.  So 
fewer  parties  were  sent  out,  and  it  was  thought 
that  they  might  better  have  planted  corn  and 
wheat  than  to  have  wasted  so  much  time  in  a 
vain  search  for  gold.  By  and  by  the  men  be- 
came dissatisfied  and  said  that  it  was  Laudon- 
niere's  fault  that  they  had  not  done  differently, 
and  blamed  him  for  not  having  provided  for  the 
safety  of  his  people  ;   and  one  of  the  men  said 


THE    HUGUENOTS.  239 

that  he  had  discovered  by  magic  a  mine  of  gold 
and  silver  which  he  would  lead  the  rest  to  if 
they  would  kill  Laudonniere,  so  that  they  might 
get  the  keys  of  the  storehouse  and  provide 
themselves  with  food  for  the  journey. 

But  this  was  not  allowed  by  the  officers,  who 
loved  Laudonniere  too  well  to  want  to  see  him 
killed ;  but  it  was  only  the  beginning  of  many 
plots  and  along  time  of  disappointment  and  dis- 
couragement, and  it  would  have  ended  by  their 
all  going  back  to  France  again,  just  as  the  first 
Huguenots  had  done,  had  not  an  English  fleet 
appeared,  commanded  by  Sir  John  Hawkins, who 
gave  them  provisions  enough  to  last  them  until 
they  could  get  back  to  France.  But  before  they 
sailed  another  fleet  appeared,  and  as  the  ships 
came  nearer  they  saw  the  French  flag  floating 
from  the  masts,  and  knew  that  help  had  come  at 
last.  This  fleet  was  commanded  by  Ribault 
himself,  and  now  it  seemed  that  all  their 
troubles  would  be  over. 

Ribault  now  took  command,  and  knowing  by 
experience  that  the  search  for  gold  and  silver 
would  only  be  vain  and  idle,  began,  instead,  to 


240  THE    HUGUENOTS. 

make  preparations  for  the  coming  winter,  and 
to  provide  against  the  attacks  of  unfriendly  In- 
dians. And  now  it  seemed  that  having  been 
taught  by  their  sufferings  that  only  honest  labor 
and  good-will  among  themselves  could  bring 
comfort  and  peace,  they  really  began  this  time 
in  the  right  way. 

But  hardly  had  a  week  passed  when  the 
Huguenots  learned  that  they  were  now  to  meet 
an  enemy  far  more  terrible  than  the  Indians,  and 
that  all  the  trouble  they  had  passed  through 
would  not  compare  with  what  was  coming.  It 
had  been  told  in  Spain  that  Coligny  had  sent  out 
a  party  to  relieve  the  Huguenots  in  Florida,  and 
as  the  Spaniards  were  all  Roman  Catholics  the 
news  was  received  by  them  with  anger  and 
hatred,  and  they  decided  to  send  immediately  a 
Spanish  force  to  Florida  in  hope  of  reaching 
there  before  Ribault  arrived.  In  this  they  did 
not  succeed,  as  Ribault  had  already  brought 
hope  and  comfort  to  the  colonists  before  the 
Spanish  ships  appeared  at  the  mouth  of  the  River 
of  May. 

Ribault  had  left  four  of  his  ships  there,  and 


THE    HUGUENOTS.  241 

when  they  saw  the  Spaniards  they  sailed  off 
to  sea,  knowing  that  was  their  only  chance  of 
safety.  The  Spaniards  were  commanded  by 
Pedro  Menendez.  He  told  the  captains  of  the 
French  ships  that  he  had  come  there  by  order 
of  the  King  of  Spain  to  burn  and  destroy  all 
the  Huguenots  in  the  country.  This  terrible 
news  reached  Ribault,  who  was  at  the  fort  up 
the  river,  at  the  same  time  with  the  information 
that  Menendez  had  landed  his  troops  a  few 
miles  southward  and  was  preparing  to  attack 
the  fort.  Ribault  immediately  decided  to  take 
the  three  ships  he  had  with  him  and  sail  down 
to  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  with  the  help  of 
the  other  French,  who  had  come  back  as  soon 
as  Menendez  left  the  River  of  May,  fall  upon 
the  Spaniards  before  they  had  time  to  build  a 
fort  and  destroy  them.  Laudonniere  did  not 
approve  of  this  plan,  as  he  said  the  ships  might 
be  scattered  by  sudden  storms  ;  but  Ribault  in- 
sisted that  his  plan  was  wisest,  so  he  took  all 
the  best  soldiers  and  sailed  down  the  river,  leav- 
ing all  the  women  and  children  and  sick  at  the 
fort,  with  only  a  few  men  to  defend  them.     But 


242  THE   HUGUENOTS. 


the  ships  were  scattered  by  storms  just  as  Ri- 
bault  was  ready  to  make  the  attack,  and  Menen- 
dez  then  decided  to  march  at  once  through  the 
forests  and  reach  Fort  CaroHne  before  Ribault 
could  return  there. 

It  was  a  very  bold  undertaking,  as  no  one 
knew  the  way  through  the  forests  and  swamps ; 
but,  as  they  were  about  to  start,  two  Indians  ap- 
peared, and  were  made  to  serve  as  guides,  while 
a  French  deserter  said  he  would  show  them 
where  the  fort  could  be  most  easily  attacked. 
They  marched  two  days  though  swamps  and 
woods,  drenched  with  cold  rains  and  suffering 
from  hunger  ;  but  their  fear  of  Menendez  kept 
them  from  turning  back,  and  on  the  night  of  the 
second  day  they  reached  the  fort,  and  halting 
before  it  stood  knee-deep  in  water  waiting  for 
the  daylight. 

The  storm  had  driven  the  French  sentinels 
into  the  fort,  and  only  one  man  was  found  at  his 
post,  when,  at  daylight,  the  Spaniards  sent  a 
small  party  to  see  if  it  were  safe  for  them  to 
advance.  This  man  was  immediately  put  to 
death,  and    then   shouting    "  Santiago  !  "   their 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  243 

terrible  war-cry,  the  Spaniards  rushed  into  the 
fort  and  began  their  work  of  destruction.  They 
killed  every  one  whom  they  could  find — old  men 
and  feeble  women  and  innocent  children — and 
only  those  escaped  who  were  able  to  steal  away 
in  the  gray  twilight  of  the  early  morning  and 
hide  in  the  woods  and  swamps. 

And  then  Menendez,  who  thought  he  was 
doing  God  service  by  this  cruel  deed,  raised  a 
cross  above  the  dead  bodies,  on  which  was 
written, 

"I  do  this  not  as  to  Frenchmen,  but  as  to 
Lutherans." 

Which  meant  that  he  was  not  fighting 
against  the  French  nation,  but  only  against  the 
Huguenots,  who  were  also  called  Lutherans  by 
the  Spaniards  and  Germans. 

Among  those  who  escaped  was  Laudon- 
niere.  He  was  found  in  the  swamp  in  the 
morning,  and  with  the  others  who  were  left 
sailed  for  France  in  the  two  vessels  that  Ri- 
bault  had  left. 

And  now  Menendez  turned  his  attention  to 
Ribault   and   his    companions,    who    had   been 


244  THE   HUGUENOTS. 


wrecked  on  an  island.  Ribault's  party  was 
divided  by  an  inlet  of  the  sea,  and  Menendez 
first  attacked  one  part  and  murdered  them  all, 
and  then  attacked  the  remainder,  among  whom 
was  Ribault  himself,  and  binding-  their  hands 
behind  them  led  them  to  the  place  where  their 
companions  lay  dead.  Then  Menendez  gave 
them  one  chance  for  life.  All  who  would  prom- 
ise to  return  to  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 
would  be  spared.  But  Ribault  and  his  fol- 
lowers would  not  accept  life  on  such  terms  ; 
they  answered  that  they  were  all  Protestants. 
So  Menendez  gave  the  signal  and  all  these 
Frenchmen  were  murdered  also,  and  their 
bodies  left  exposed  on  the  shore. 

And  then  Menendez  went  through  the 
swamp  and  forests  of  Florida  hunting  the  Hu- 
guenots who  were  still  at  large,  and  finally  after 
much  trouble  he  succeeded  in  killing  the  most  of 
them,  so  there  were  few  Huguenots  left  except 
the  fifers,  drummers,  and  trumpeters,  who  were 
spared  because  they  might  be  of  service.  Then 
Menendez  returned  to  the  settlement  he  had 
made,  and  with  great  pomp  and  ceremony  took 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  245 


possession  of  the  country  In  the  name  of  the 
King  of  Spain.  And  then  they  sung  the  Te 
Deum  and  knelt  down  and  kissed  the  crucifix, 
and  were  well  satisfied  with  themselves,  think- 
ing they  had  done  a  great  and  glorious  thing. 

The  Indians  looked  on  wonderingly.  It  no 
doubt  seemed  very  strange  to  them  to  see  these 
two  Christian  nations  so  eager  to  kill  one  an- 
other. But  the  chief  received  the  Spaniards 
kindly  and  gave  them  his  house  to  live  in,  and 
then  a  fort  was  built,  and  from  this  humble  be- 
ginning grew  the  city  of  St.  Augustine,  the  old- 
est town  in  the  United  States. 

The  news  of  the  massacre  of  the  Huguenots 
reached  France,  but  for  a  long  time  it  seemed 
that  nothing  would  be  done  to  avenge  it.  The 
king  cared  very  little  how  many  Frenchmen 
where  killed  if  they  were  not  Roman  Catholics, 
and  the  Huguenots  themselves  had  no  power 
to  raise  money  and  arms.  'But  at  length  a  brave 
soldier,  Dominique  de  Gourgues,  returning  to 
France  from  foreign  service,  learned  the  terrible 
fate  of  his  fellow-countrymen  and  resolved  to 
punish  their  murderers.   It  is  not  known  whether 


246  THE   HUGUENOTS. 

De  Gourgues  was  a  Catholic  or  Huguenot,  but 
he  cared  little  for  difference  of  religion  where 
the  honor  of  his  country  was  concerned.  He 
said  nothing  of  his  plan,  fearing  the  king  might 
hinder  him  from  carrying  it  out.  He  gave  out 
that  he  was  going  on  an  expedition  to  the  coast 
of  Africa,  and  selling  his  estates  and  borrowing 
money  from  his  friends  he  left  France,  August, 
1564,  with  three  ships,  keeping  his  real  destina- 
tion a  secret  even  from  his  own  men.  He  really 
did  go  to  the  coast  of  Africa,  and  from  there  to 
the  West  Indies,  and  it  was  not  until  the  next 
spring  that  he  made  known  the  real  object  of  his 
leaving  France.  His  ships  were  lying  in  a  harbor 
at  the  western  extremity  of  Cuba,  and  calling  his 
men  around  him  De  Gourgues  declared  his  in- 
tention of  going  to  Florida  and  avenging  the 
death  of  his  countrymen,  and  asked  how  many 
of  his  soldiers  were  willing  to  accompany  him. 
Not  a  man  refused,  and  De  Gourgues  had,  in 
fact,  great  difficulty  in  persuading  them  to  wait 
until  favorable  weather  for  sailing,  so  eager  were 
they  to  reach  Florida  and  begin  their  work  of 
vengeance.     Every  man  felt,  as  De  Gourgues 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  247 


repeated  the  story  of  the  murder  at  Fort  Caro- 
line, that  France  had  indeed  waited  too  long 
to  aven  ore  this  fearful  crime. 

De  Gourgues  sailed  from  Cuba,  and  as  he 
passed  the  Spanish  force  at  the  mouth  of  the 
River  of  May,  they  saluted  his  little  fleet,  think- 
ing that  the  ships  were  Spanish.  He  returned 
the  salute,  and  then  stood  out  to  sea  again,  in 
order  to  deceive  the  Spaniards,  and  going  north 
a  few  leagues  entered  the  mouth  of  a  small  river. 
The  Indians,  thinking  that  the  strangers  were 
Spaniards,  rushed  down  to  the  beach  with 
shouts  and  yells  of  hatred,  and  prepared  to  pre- 
vent their  landing.  But  no  sooner  did  they  see 
that  the  new-comers  were  French  than  they  fell 
on  their  knees  and  kissed  their  hands  and  gave 
them  every  possible  sign  of  welcome.  And 
their  joy  was  increased  when  they  learned  that 
they  had  come  to  make  war  upon  the  Spaniards, 
whom  they  feared  and  hated. 

Satournia,  the  old  friend  of  Ribault  and  Lau- 
donniere,  now  welcomed  their  successor  with  the 
same  marks  of  friendship  he  had  shown  them, 
and  declared  himself  willing  to  join  all  his  forces 


248  THE   HUGUENOTS. 

with  De  Gourgues  in  his  attack  upon  the  Span- 
iards. All  the  Indian  warriors  were  called  in, 
and  at  a  solemn  meeting  they  promised  faith  and 
help  to  the  French,  and  as  a  proof  of  their  good 
intentions  the  chief  placed  his  wife  and  son  into 
the  hands  of  the  French. 

Then  at  a  council  of  war  they  agreed  that 
the  French  should  go  by  sea  and  the  Indians 
by  land  to  a  certain  place  farther  south,  where 
they  would  join  forces  and  march  to  St.  Augus- 
tine. 

They  met  at  the  place  appointed,  and  De 
Gourgues  leading  the  French,  and  Olotocara,  a 
nephew  of  Satournia,  the  Indians,  they  pushed 
forward  toward  the  fort.  As  the  Spaniards  had 
done  three  years  before,  they  had  to  wade 
through  swamps  and  streams,  and  make  their 
way  through  marshy  forest  lands,  and  their  feet 
were  bruised  and  bleeding,  and  their  clothing 
torn,  and  their  hands  wounded  with  briers  and 
nettles ;  but  they  did  not  care,  but  went  on 
all  through  the  night,  and  scarcely  felt  weary 
when  at  dawn  they  stood  in  front  of  the  Spanish 
fort  on  the  north  bank  of  the  River  of  May. 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  249 

Only  one  sentinel  stood  there  as  the  French 
and  Indians  came  up  in  the  gray  light  of  the 
early  day,  and  as  he  saw  the  stern  faces  of  the 
enemy  he  no  doubt  thought  of  that  other  morn- 
ing, three  years  before,  when  he  had  stood  in 
the  drenching  rain  waiting  for  the  daylight  to 
lighten  the  walls  of  Fort  Caroline.  But  he 
was  a  brave  man,  and  shouting  that  the  French 
were  upon  them  he  turned  his  gun  upon  the 
enemy,  and  stood  there  bravely  to  defend  the 
fort.  But  Olotocara  springing  upon  the  plat- 
form ran  the  sentinel  through  with  a  pike,  and 
when  the  frightened  Spaniards  rushed  out  they 
were  met  by  French  guns  and  Indian  arrows, 
and  knew  that  the  time  for  vengeance  was  come. 
They  tried  in  vain  to  escape,  and  cried  in  vain 
for  mercy  ;  they  were  only  met  with  scorn  and 
hatred,  and  so  swift  and  terrible  was  the  work 
of  destruction  that  in  a  few  moments  all  the 
Spaniards  were  killed  except  fifteen,  who  were 
found  and  held  as  captives. 

The  Spaniards  at  the  fort  on  the  other  side  of 
the  river  knew  that  some  stronger  enemy  than 
the  Indians  must  be  attacking  their  friends,  but 


250  THE   HUGUENOTS. 


they  could  do  little  to  help  them,  and  in  a  short 
time  were  obliged  to  think  of  defending  them- 
selves, for  no  sooner  had  De  Gourgues  com- 
pleted his  work  on  the  north  bank  than  he  took 
ship  and  sailed  across  the  river,  the  Indians 
swimming  by  the  side  of  the  vessels  in  their 
eagerness  to  reach  the  fort.  The  Spaniards  left 
their  works  and  fled  into  the  forest,  where  the 
Indians  hunted  them  like  beasts,  and  where 
their  cry  for  quarter  was  met  with  the  same 
pitiless  response  that  had  greeted  the  ears  of 
their  comrades.  Fifteen  of  them  were  bound 
and  their  lives  spared  for  a  short  time,  and  the 
rest  were  speedily  murdered. 

Still  another  fort  remained  to  be  taken.  The 
Spaniards  sent  out  from  it  a  man  disguised  as 
an  Indian  to  find  out  how  many  French  and  In- 
dians there  were  ;  but  the  quick  eyes  of  Oloto- 
cara  saw  through  the  cheat  and  the  man  was 
taken  prisoner.  There  were  three  hundred 
Spaniards  in  the  fort,  and  they  might  easily  have 
overcome  De  Gourgues,  who  only  had  about  a 
hundred  men  ;  but  the  Spaniards  thought  his 
force  was  far  greater,  and  when,  two  days  after, 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  25  I 

he  appeared  in  the  woods  behind  the  fort,  the 
Spaniards  thought  that  a  great  part  of  his  sol- 
diers were  still  on  the  way,  and  sent  out  a  party 
to  scatter  his  forces  before  help  could  arrive. 
But  De  Gourgues  managed  to  place  some  of 
his  men  between  the  fort  and  the  Spaniards  who 
had  left  it,  and  thus  they  were  in  danger  of  the 
fire  from  the  fort  as  well  as  from  the  enemy  in 
front.  The  French  fell  upon  them  with  their 
swords,  and  not  a  man  was  left.  The  Spaniards 
in  the  fort,  discouraged  at  this,  sought  refuge  in 
the  woods ;  but  few  if  any  escaped.  Still  the 
French  cried  no  quarter,  and  still  the  Indians 
remembered  the  wrongs  they  had  suffered  and 
rejoiced  that  their  enemies  had  fallen  into  their 
hands.  When  the  dreadful  work  of  death  was 
over,  De  Gouro-ues  hauled  down  the  flao-  of 
Spain  and  raised  the  French  banners  on  the  fort, 
and  then  he  had  the  prisoners  brought  before 
him,  and  told  them  he  had  come  there  to  avenee 
the  insult  which  France  had  received  at  their 
hands  three  years  before.  Then  they  were 
led  to  the  same  trees  on  which  Menendez  had 
hanged  his  prisoners,  and  over  their  heads  was 


252  THE   HUGUENOTS. 


placed  this  inscription,  "  I  do  this  not  as  unto 
Spaniards,  but  as  unto  traitors,  robbers,  and 
murderers." 

And  then  they  were  all  hanged,  and  De 
Gourgues  thought  his  revenge  was  complete. 
The  Indians  were  satisfied  too.  "  I  am  willing 
now  to  live  longer,  for  I  have  seen  the  French 
return  and  the  Spaniards  killed,"  said  an  old 
squaw,  and  that  was  the  feeling  of  all  her  nation. 
De  Gourgues  did  not  remain  long  in  Florida, 
and  the  Indians  were  very  sorry  to  have  him  go, 
and  parted  from  him  with  many  kind  words  and 
promises  of  friendship ;  and  the  French,  too, 
parted  with  regret  from  their  dark-skinned 
friends,  and  promised  soon  to  return  and  make 
their  home  among  them,  and  so  the  fleet  sailed 
away  again,  and  reached  France  in  safety,  al- 
though the  Spanish  king  hearing  of  the  massacre 
of  his  subjects  had  sent  a  force  to  prevent  its 
return  home.  But  De  Gourgues  found  that  his 
brave  deed  was  not  approved  by  the  King  of 
France,  and  he  soon  had  to  leave  court  and  live 
very  quietly,  lest  his  enemies  should  find  out 
where  he  was.     But  everywhere  throughout  the 


THE   HUGUENOTS.  253 

world  he  was  looked  upon  by  the  Protestants 
as  a  hero,  and  long  years  afterward  the  Indians 
in  Florida  remembered  affectionately  the  man 
who  had  so  bravely  taken  up  the  cause  of  the 
unfortunate  Huguenots. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

SIR    WALTER    RALEIGH. 

Sir  Walter  Raleigh  was  a  brave  English 
knight,  the  friend  of  Sir  Philip  Sidney,  and  Hke 
him  renowned  for  his  chivalry.  The  story  is 
told  that  when  he  was  a  young  man  he  hap- 
pened one  day  to  be  standing  on  a  street  down 
which  Queen  Elizabeth  was  passing,  and  as  she 
came  to  a  crossing  that  was  very  muddy,  Ra- 
leigh stepped  to  her  side  and  taking  off  his 
cloak  laid  it  down  for  her  to  walk  upon.  This 
act  of  courtesy  was  the  first  thing  that  made 
the  queen  notice  him,  and  she  immediately  took 
him  into  her  favor  and  helped  him  all  she  could, 
and  her  kindness  was  well  bestowed,  for  Ra- 
leigh was  always  the  courteous,  noble-minded 
gentleman,  ready  to  do  any  one  a  kindness,  rich 
or  poor,  high  or  low,  and  to  serve  his  friends 
and  his  country  as  far  as  was  in  his  power.  For 
a  long  time  after  the  visit  of  the  Cabots,  English- 


SIR   WALTER   RALEIGH,  255 

men  thought  very  little  about  the  New  World, 
but  at  length  one  or  two  voyages  were  made 
there,  and  after  this  people  began  to  think  that 
perhaps  it  would  be  a  good  thing  to  try  to  make 
settlements  there. 

Raleigh  was  among  the  first  Englishmen 
who  formed  plans  for  the  settlement  of  Amer- 
ica, and  as  he  was  a  great  favorite  of  the 
queen,  he  had  very  little  trouble  in  carrying  his 
plans  out.  He  was  also  very  rich,  and  after 
obtaining  permission  from  Queen  Elizabeth  to 
settle  North  America,  he  sent  out  two  vessels 
under  command  of  Amidas  and  Barlow.  The 
ships  reached  the  coast  of  Carolina  in  the  month 
of  July,  1584,  and  took  possession  of  the  coun- 
try in  the  name  of  the  queen.  The  land  seemed 
to  the  voyagers  like  a  glimpse  of  Paradise. 
They  spoke  with  delight  of  the  "  sweete-smell- 
ing  timber  trees,"  and  the  abundance  of  grapes, 
and  of  the  shady  bowers  which  echoed  to  the 
music  of  wild  birds,  and  of  the  gentle  manners 
of  the  natives  who  seemed  to  live  "  after  the 
manner  of  the  golden  age."  They  spent  some 
weeks  there  trading  with  the  natives,  but  did 


256  SIR   WALTER   RALEIGH, 

not  try  to  make  a  settlement,  and  then  returned 
to  England,  taking  with  them  a  cargo  of  furs 
and  woods. 

The  queen  was  delighted  to  hear  that  the 
new  country  was  so  rich  and  beautiful  as  these 
sailors  described  it  to  be,  and  said  that  because 
it  was  discovered  while  she  was  queen  her 
reign  would  be  forever  famous ;  the  name  given 
to  the  country  was  Virginia,  in  honor  to  the 
queen,  who  was  unmarried.  The  sailors  said 
that  Virginia  had  a  good  soil  and  fine  climate, 
and  that  the  Indians  were  very  kind  and  friendly. 
Raleigh  was  delighted  to  hear  this,  and  imme- 
diately sent  out  another  expedition  which  was 
to  settle  on  Roanoke  Island.  But  when  the 
settlers  arrived  there  they  found  that  the  In- 
dians were  not  so  friendly  as  at  first ;  they  got 
into  a  great  deal  of  trouble  with  them,  and  as 
they  had  been  getting  all  their  food  from  the 
Indians  they  came  very  near  starving.  Instead 
of  planting  corn  and  grain  they  spent  their 
time  in  searching  for  gold  and  silver  mines, 
and  just  as  they  were  about  to  give  up  in  de- 
spair, a  vessel  stopped  there  on  its  way  to  Eng- 


SIR   WALTER   RALEIGH.  25/ 

land  and  the  captain  took  them  all  back  home 
again. 

But  Raleia"h  was  not  discouras^ed ;  he  sent 
out  another  company,  two  years  afterwards 
(1587),  under  John  White.  This  company  also 
settled  on  Roanoke  Island  and  laid  the  founda- 
tions of  the  "  City  of  Raleigh."  And  here,  on 
this  wild  American  island,  where  a  few  years 
before  many  brave  Englishmen  had  been  killed 
by  the  savage  Indians,  where  there  were  only 
rough  log-houses  to  live  in,  and  where  fierce 
wild  animals  roamed  through  the  gloomy  forests, 
was  born  one  day  a  little  baby  girl.  She  was 
the  granddaughter  of  Captain  John  White,  the 
governor  of  the  colony.  This  little  girl  was  the 
first  child  born  in  America  of  English  parents, 
and  she  was  named  "Virginia  Dare."  Some 
time  after  White  had  to  go  back  to  England  for 
provisions  ;  he  was  away  three  years,  and  when 
he  returned  to  Roanoke  every  trace  of  the 
colony  had  disappeared.  And  to  this  day  no 
one  knows  what  ever  became  of  the  colonists, 
and  of  little  Virginia  Dare.  It  is  supposed  that 
they  might  have  been  carried  away  by  the  In- 


258  SIR   WALTER   RALEIGH. 

dians  and  spent  their  lives  as  captives,  but  no 
one  knows  whether  Virginia  Dare  grew  up  as 
an  Indian  maiden,  far  away  from  her  friends  and 
not  knowing  that  she  was  the  child  of  white 
parents,  or  whether,  with  all  the  rest  of  the  col- 
ony, she  perished  by  the  hands  of  the  Indians. 
All  we  know  is  that,  more  than  three  hundred 
years  ago  this  little  English  maiden  came  to 
live  a  while  on  the  Island  of  Roanoke,  and  that 
then  she  vanished  as  utterly  as  do  the  rain 
drops  that  fall  into  the  sea,  and  only  her  name 
is  remembered. 


SMITH    SAVKI)    BY    POCAHONTAS. 


CHAPTER   XVIII. 

THE    STORY    OF     POCAHONTAS,    THE    INDIAN     PRIN- 
CESS. 

Pocahontas  was  a  very  beautiful  child,  and 
was  so  good  and  sweet  that  she  was  loved  by 
all  the  tribe  over  which  her  father  ruled.  Her 
home  was  in  Virginia,  and  a  very  happy  life  she 
led  there,  in  the  sunny  woods,  with  the  birds 
and  squirrels  for  her  companions ;  and  in  after 
years,  when  she  went  to  live  far  away  across  the 
sea,  the  memory  of  her  childhood  home  seemed 
the  sweetest  thing  in  the  world  to  her,  for  it 
brought  to  her  mind  the  songs  of  the  birds,  the 
beautiful  flowers,  the  waving  trees,  the  bright 
rivers,  and  the  fair  skies  that  she  was  so  familiar 
with  when  she  was  a  little  happy  child. 

To  have  had  a  happy  childhood  is  a  very 
beautiful  thing,  it  makes  all  after-life  sweeter,  it 
is  like  the  first  spring  flowers  which  we  gather 
in  the  meadow,  and  although  by  and  by  the 


26o  THE   STORY   OF   POCAHONTAS. 

snow  will  come  and  cover  the  place  where  they 
bloomed,  it  cannot  take  away  the  memory  of 
their  sweetness  and  loveliness,  for  that  is  in  our 
hearts  and  will  stay  there  forever. 

So  Pocahontas  grew  up  in  this  pleasant 
home,  and  learned  to  embroider  her  dresses 
with  shells,  and  to  weave  mats,  and  to  cook, 
and  to  do  all  those  thino-s  which  Indian  maidens 
were  accustomed  to. 

One  day,  when  she  was  about  twelve  years 
old,  an  Indian  came  into  the  village  and  told  the 
people  a  story  about  a  wonderful  white  man  that 
had  been  captured  some  time  before.  It  was 
said  that  he  could  talk  to  his  friends  many  miles 
away  by  putting  down  words  on  a  piece  of 
paper,  and  he  had  a  queer  little  instrument  by 
which  he  talked  with  the  stars,  and  he  had  told 
them  that  the  earth  was  round,  and  that  the  sun 
"  chased  the  night  around  it  continually."  They 
had  never  heard  of  such  curious  things  before, 
and  they  decided  that  this  strange  being  was 
something  more  than  a  mere  man,  and  that  per- 
haps it  was  in  his  power  to  bring  good  or  evil 
upon  them  as  he  wished.     So  all    the   Indian 


THE   STORY   OF   POCAHONTAS.  261 

priests  and  magicians  met  together  and  for  three 
days  practised  all  sorts  of  magic  to  find  out  from 
the  invisible  world  what  they  had  better  do  with 
their  prisoner ;  and  finally  they  decided  to  take 
him  to  the  great  chief  Powhatan,  father  of  Poca- 
hontas, and  let  him  decide  for  them. 

Powhatan  received  the  captive  with  great 
courtesy.  He  asked  him  about  his  life,  and 
found  that  he  was  one  of  a  company  of  men 
who  had  sailed  from  England  to  found  a  settle- 
ment  in  Virginia. 

This  man  was  Captain  John  Smith,  a  great 
soldier,  who  had  already  won  much  fame  in 
fighting  against  the  Turks. 

He  and  his  companions  founded  Jamestown, 
in  Virginia,  the  first  English  colony  which  suc- 
ceeded in  America.  While  exploring  the  coun- 
try he  had  been  captured  by  the  Indians.  His 
companions  were  put  to  death  immediately,  but 
he  saved  his  life  by  his  presence  of  mind. 
When  the  Indians  captured  him  he  did  not  show 
any  sign  of  fear,  but  began  talking  to  them  about 
his  friends  in  Jamestown,  and  wrote  a  letter 
which  he  asked  them  to  send  there.     Then  he 


262  THE- STORY    OF   POCAHONTAS. 

took  out  a  pocket-compass  and  showed  them 
how  to  use  it,  and  also  talked  to  them  about  the 
shape  of  the  earth,  and  its  motion  around  the 
sun. 

All  this  surprised  the  Indians  very  much. 
They  had  never  seen  a  written  letter  before, 
and  they  imagined  it  could  only  be  done  by 
magic,  and  they  thought  that  if  Smith  were 
guided  through  the  forest  by  means  of  the  com- 
pass it  was  because  he  could  talk  to  the  stars 
and  the  sun.  And  then,  had  they  not  always 
been  taught  that  the  sun  came  up  from  the  east 
in  the  morning,  and  went  down  in  the  west  at 
night,  never  to  return,  but  that  a  new  sun  came 
each  day  to  light  the  world  ?  So  they  listened 
to  all  these  wonderful  things  with  great  awe  and 
fear,  and  Powhatan  and  his  council  decided  that 
it  was  not  safe  to  let  such  a  man  live,  as  he 
might  do  them  great  harm,  being  so  powerful 
and  wise,  and  knowing  so  much  about  the  un- 
seen world.  When  Pocahontas  was  told  that 
Smith  must  die,  she  felt  very  sad  indeed.  Dur- 
ing the  time  that  he  had  been  a  prisoner  in  the 
village  she  had  grown  very  fond  of  him,  as  he 


THE   STORY   OF   POCAHONTAS.  263 

also  had  of  her,  and  it  seemed  a  dreadful  thing 
that  such  a  brave  and  good  man  should  die. 

Many  a  story  had  he  told  her  of  the  lands 
beyond  the  sea,  where  lived  the  little  English 
boys  and  girls  whom  he  had  left  behind  him, 
and  Pocahontas  was  never  tired  of  listening  to 
the  tales  of  that  fair  England  that  Smith  loved 
so  well.  How  different  it  was  from  her  own 
home,  and  how  she  would  like  to  see  those  blue- 
eyed,  fair-haired  children,  whose  lives  were  so 
unlike  her  own.  Ah,  it  was  such  a  cruel  thing 
to  think  that  this  good  man  must  die.  If  she 
could  only  save  him  in  some  way,  how  glad  she 
would  be.  And  he  was  so  brave  too,  he  did 
not  flinch  when  he  was  told  that  he  must  die — 
not  even  when  he  was  told  that  he  was  to  be 
put  to  death  in  the  most  cruel  way  that  the 
Indians  could  think  of.  And  so  the  Indian 
maiden  grieved  and  grieved  and  tried  to  think 
of  some  way  in  which  she  might  save  her  friend's 
life,  but  she  could  not. 

At  length  the  time  came  for  his  execution. 
He  was  brought  out  in  the  village  square,  and 
after  his  hands  and  feet  were  bound  he  was 


264  THE   STORY  OF  POCAHONTAS. 

Stretched  on  the  ground  with  his  head  resting 
upon  a  great  stone.  Beside  him  stood  an  Indian 
with  a  great  club  in  his  hand  with  which  he 
was  to  dash  out  the  EngHshman's  brains.  The 
club  was  lifted  in  the  air  and  in  another  moment 
would  have  fallen  upon  Smith's  head,  had  not 
Pocahontas,  who  at  the  last  moment  resolved  to 
save  his  life  at  the  risk  of  her  own,  rushed  up  to 
the  spot  and,  clasping  the  captive's  head  in  her 
arms,  begged  her  father  with  tears  in  her  eyes 
to  spare  his  life. 

Powhatan  was  touched  by  his  daughter's 
sorrow  and  listened  to  her  request ;  he  ordered 
Smith's  bonds  to  be  taken  off,  and  said  that  he 
would  spare  his  life. 

So  Smith  rose  from  the  ground  a  free  man, 
and  with  an  escort  of  twelve  men  was  sent  back 
to  Jamestown. 

You  can  well  imagine  that  he  would  never 
forget  this  brave,  beautiful  Indian  maid  who  had 
saved  his  life.  And  many  times  after  that  he 
had  reason  to  be  grateful  to  Pocahontas.  At 
that  time  the  Jamestown  settlement  was  in  con- 
stant fear  of  attacks  from  the  Indians,  and  more 


THE  STORY  OF  POCAHONTAS.  265 

than  once  Pocahontas  came  throuorh  the  forest 
at  night  to  warn  the  English  of  danger,  and 
Captain  Smith  said  that,  had  it  not  been  for  her 
help,  the  Jamestown  colony  would  have  died  of 
starvation.  The  Indians  were  very  unfriendly 
and  very  unwilling  to  supply  the  English  with 
food,  and  if  Pocahontas  and  her  father  had  not 
brought  them  corn  they  could  not  have  gotten 
it  anywhere  else.  Jamestown  soon  became  as 
familiar  to  Pocahontas  as  her  own  father's  home. 
She  often  went  there  to  offer  help  and  counsel 
to  the  colonists,  and  always  showed  the  same 
fondness  for  Smith  that  she  had  shown  in  early 
childhood.  Smith  was  obliged  to  go  back  to 
England  after  a  while,  to  be  treated  for  a  wound, 
and  after  he  went  away  Pocahontas  did  not 
visit  Jamestown  any  more.  The  English  told 
her  that  he  was  dead,  and  she  could  not  bear 
to  go  there  without  seeing  him.  But  he  was 
not  dead,  and  the  two  friends  were  to  meet  once 
more — not  in  Jamestown,  it  is  true,  but  in  Eng- 
land, where  Pocahontas  went  as  the  bride  of  the 
young  Englishman  John  Rolfe. 

Rolfe  loved  the  j^oung  Indian  maiden  dearly, 


266  THE   STORY   OF   POCAHONTAS. 

but  he  could  not  marry  her,  as  it  was  then  con- 
sidered very  wrong  for  an  Englishman  to  marry 
a  heathen  ;  but  after  a  time  Pocahontas  became 
a  Christian  and  was  baptized  under  the  name  of 
Rebecca,  and  soon  after  she  was  married. 

Powhatan  and  his  chiefs  were  very  glad  of 
this  marriage,  as  were  also  the  colonists,  and  for 
many  years  after  the  Indians  were  more  friendly. 
Pocahontas  was  taken  by  her  husband  to  Eng- 
land, where  she  was  received  with  great  delight 
by  the  English  court.  The  king  and  queen 
grew  very  fond  of  her  and  showed  her  every 
kindness  that  they  could,  and  all  the  great  Eng- 
lish lords  and  ladies  wished  to  see  the  Indian 
girl  who  had  been  so  kind  to  their  countrymen 
in  Jamestown.  As  she  was  a  princess  she  was 
called  Lady  Pocahontas,  and  every  one  was  sur- 
prised that  a  girl  who  had  been  brought  up  in  the 
society  of  cruel  savages,  should  have  such  beauti- 
ful and  gentle  manners.  They  said  that  she 
acted  more  like  one  of  their  own  English  ladies 
than  the  daughter  of  an  Indian  chief,  but  Poca- 
hontas was  gentle-mannered  because  her  heart 
was  kind  and  good  ;  not  gentle  birth  but  kind 


THE   STORY   OF   POCAHONTAS,  26/ 

hearts  make  the  truest  ladies  and  gentlemen,  and 
no  lady  of  the  English  court  could  say  that  she 
had  saved  another's  life  at  the  risk  of  her  own 
as  could  the  Indian  maid  from  across  the  sea. 
Pocahontas  was  much  surprised  to  find  Captain 
Smith  alive  and  in  England  ;  she  wept  on  seeing 
him,  and  begged  him  to  let  her  call  him  father. 

Smith  told  her  that,  as  she  was  a  king's 
daughter,  this  would  not  be  allowed  at  the  court  ; 
but  she  said  that  she  must  call  him  father  and 
he  must  call  her  child,  and  that  she  would  be 
his  countrywoman  forever.  Smith  wrote  a 
letter  to  the  king  and  queen  asking  them  to 
receive  Pocahontas  kindly,  and  it  was  through 
him  that  she  was  so  much  noticed  by  the  Eng- 
lish nobility. 

Her  beauty  and  sweetness  would  have  won 
their  hearts,  but  it  was  the  memory  of  what  she 
had  done  for  the  English  in  Jamestown  that 
made  them  so  eager  to  be  kind  to  her  in  return. 
Pocahontas  did  not  stay  very  long  in  England, 
although  she  grew  to  love  it  dearly,  and  did  not 
want  to  go  away  from  the  land  where  she  had 
only  known  happiness  and  kindness.     But  her 


268  THE   STORY   OF   POCAHONTAS. 

husband  decided  to  return  to  Jamestown,  and 
Pocahontas  prepared  to  leave  England  with  a 
heavy  heart.  She  thought  that  they  could  be 
much  happier  there  than  in  America,  and  she 
wanted  to  bring  up  her  little  son  as  an  English 
boy,  and  did  not  want  him  to  see  all  the  cruelty 
and  wickedness  which  she  knew  he  would  find 
in  the  wild  life  in  Jamestown.  So  all  things 
were  made  ready,  and  they  left  London  and 
went  to  Gravesend,  where  they  were  to  take  ship 
for  America.  But,  just  as  they  were  about  to 
sail  Pocahontas  was  taken  ill  and  died ;  the 
Eng^lish  climate  had  been  too  severe  for  one 
born  in  the  South,  and  so  Rolfe  and  his  little  son 
went  back  to  America  alone,  and  the  beautiful 
princess  was  buried  in  England,  far  from  her 
own  land ;  and  her  English  friends  mourned  for 
the  sweet  Indian  girl  whom  they  all  loved ;  and 
for  years  and  years  her  story  was  listened  to 
with  admiration  by  the  boys  and  girls  in  the 
homes  of  England,  for  it  was  the  story  of  a  brave 
and  true  heart,  and  such  we  must  always  honor. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

THE    SETTLEMENT    OF    MAINE    AND    DISCOVERY    OF 
LAKE    CHAMPLAIN. 

Although  the  southern  part  of  North 
America  became  very  well  known  to  Europe 
almost  immediately  after  its  discovery,  yet  many 
years  passed  away  before  the  whites  knew  very 
much  about  the  lands  farther  north.  This  was 
because  in  settling  America  the  settlers  thought 
more  of  finding  gold  and  silver  than  any  thing 
else.  Gold  and  silver  had  been  found  in  such 
quantities  in  Mexico  and  Peru,  and  Spain  had 
grown  so  rich  by  conquering  those  countries,  that 
no  one  thought  it  worth  while  to  go  to  any  place 
that  had  neither  gold  nor  silver  nor  precious 
stones  to  offer.  And  then,  besides  this  reason, 
the  northern  part  of  America  did  not  have  such 
a  warm,  delightful  climate  as  the  southern.  In 
Florida  one  could  live  for  the  greater  part  of  the 
year  on  the  fruit,  that  was  so  abundant,  and  one 


270  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

scarcely  needed  a  house  where  the  summer 
lasted  so  long;  but  up  in  the  north  one  must  be 
well  protected  from  the  icy  winds,  must  have 
heavy  fur  clothing  and  warm  comfortable 
houses,  and  above  all,  must  spend  the  spring 
and  summer  months  in  planting  corn  and  grain 
for  use  in  the  long,  cold  winter  ;  and  so,  as  men 
knew  living  would  be  very  hard  work,  and  the 
chance  of  getting  rich  very  small  up  there  on 
those  northern  coasts,  they  stayed  away,  and 
long  years  passed  before  white  settlers  came  to 
live  among  the  beautiful  mountains  and  valleys 
of  New  England. 

The  first  people  who  came  were  the  fisher- 
folk.  They  came  from  France,  and  spent  the 
warm  months  in  tossing  on  the  waters  around 
the  coast  of  Newfoundland  and  Maine,  taking 
^in  large  cargoes  of  fish  which  they  sold  readily 
in  European  markets.  When  they  went  back 
home  again  they  told  very  entertaining  stories 
about  the  northern  lands  ;  of  their  great  rivers 
that  came  rushing  down  from  the  north,  and  of 
the  beautiful  forests  of  pine  and  spruce,  and  of 
the  pleasant  inland  lakes  whose  waters  were  so 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  2/1 

clear  that  one  could  see  the  pebbles  on  the  bot- 
tom, and  which  were  filled  with  delicious  trout. 
By  and  by  these  fishermen's  stories  attracted 
other  people  to  those  regions,  and  men  began 
to  go  there  not  only  to  fish,  but  to  trade  with 
the  natives  ;  and  gradually  it  came  to  be  quite  a 
general  custom  for  the  traders  and  fishermen  to 
build  a  few  warm  huts  and  pass  the  winter  on 
the  shores  of  some  sheltered  bay,  instead  of  go- 
ing back  to  France  at  the  first  sign  of  cold 
weather.  And  here  they  learned  many  interest- 
ing things  about  the  new  country,  and  which 
made  it  seem  quite  worth  living  in.  They 
learned  how  the  Indian  could  start  from  the 
coast  in  his  bark  canoe,  and,  by  means  of  those 
large  streams,  the  Kennebec,  and  the  Penob- 
scot, and  the  lakes  that  they  formed,  reach 
easily  the  smaller  rivers  of  Canada  and  so  float 
down  to  the  great  Hochelaga  or  St.  Lawrence  ; 
thus  going  from  the  Atlantic  coast,  through 
hundreds  of  miles  of  dense  forest,  to  the  large 
Indian  villages  of  Hochelaga  or  Stadacona. 
Sometimes  the  traveller  would  have  to  carry  his 
canoe  from  one  lake  to  another,  always  a  short 


2/2  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

distance,  or  around  the  rapids  or  waterfalls  of 
the  narrowing  river  ;  but  with  these  exceptions 
the  journey  was  made  entirely  by  water.  And 
as  the  Indians  of  Canada  and  those  of  Maine 
were  constantly  trading  with  one  another,  the 
whites  soon  saw  that  a  country  where  distant 
places  could  be  so  easily  reached,  and  whose 
fine  forests,  and  rich  furs,  and  excellent  fisheries 
could  be  had  for  the  taking,  w^as  not  so  poor 
after  all,  and  that  perhaps  they  might  as  easily 
draw  gold  from  the  sea,  or  find  it  in  the  sweet- 
scented  woods,  as  by  wandering  through  the 
marshes  of  Florida,  or  on  the  banks  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi. 

And  so,  little  by  little,  the  French  king  be- 
gan to  believe  that  it  would  be  a  very  good 
thing  for  France  to  own  and  settle  Maine  and 
Canada,  or,  as  all  the  northern  part  of  America 
was  then  called.  New  France;  and  in  1604  Sieur 
De  Monts,  a  Huguenot  nobleman,  sailed  from 
Havre  de  Grace  for  the  purpose  of  making  a 
French  settlement  in  Acadia.  With  De  Monts 
came  his  friend  Jean  de  Biancourt,  Baron  de 
Poutrincourt,  also  a  Huguenot,  who  wished  to 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  2/3 

find  a  new  home  in  America,  where  he  would 
be  free  from  all  the  religious  troubles  that  were 
constantly  vexing  him  in  France.  Samuel 
Champlain  was  also  one  of  the  company,  and 
as  he  had  been  on  several  voyages  before,  and 
knew  the  country  and  people  better  than  the 
others,  he  was  looked  upon  as  a  very  important 
member. 

The  ships  reached  Nova  Scotia  without  any 
mishaps,  and  Poutrincourt,  who  was  delighted 
with  the  country,  got  permission  to  settle  here, 
and  began  the  foundation  of  his  new  home.  He 
had  chosen  a  delightful  spot,  and  for  many  years 
lived  there  peacefully  and  happily,  cultivating 
the  rich  soil,  and  showing  the  Indians  how  to 
improve  their  own  way  of  farming.  And  al- 
though Poutrincourt  was  a  loyal  Frenchman, 
still  he  never  looked  back  regretfully  to  France, 
for  he  found,  amid  the  pleasant  meadows  and 
blossoming  orchards  of  Acadia,  a  greater  peace 
than  he  had  ever  known  in  his  old  home.  The 
Indians  all  loved  him,  and  the  little  Indian  chil- 
dren came  and  went  freely  through  the  halls  of 
his  stately  mansion,  often  lying  at  his  feet  while 


274  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

he  was  dining-,  and  catching  in  their  Httle  dark 
hands  the  nuts  and  raisins  which  he  threw  them 
as  their  part  of  the  dessert. 

Very  pleasant  indeed  would  the  settling  of 
Maine  have  been  if  all  Frenchmen  had  pos- 
sessed as  good  and  true  hearts  as  Poutrincourt  ; 
but  when  De  Monts,  who  had  settled  first  at 
the  mouth  of  the  St.  Croix,  went  sailing  around 
the  coast  of  Maine  to  find  a  better  place,  he 
found  that  the  white  visitors  before  him  had  left 
a  bad  name  among  the  Indians,  who  came  down 
to  his  ship  with  scowling  faces  and  angry  gest- 
ures ;  and  so,  although  De  Monts  saw  many 
pleasant  spots  up  among  the  deep  sheltered 
bays,  and  would  have  been  very  glad  to  settle 
there  and  hunt  and  fish,  yet  the  natives  seemed 
so  unfriendly  that  he  gave  up  the  idea  and  went 
back  to  St.  Croix  for  awhile,  and  then  finally 
sailed  across  the  bay  and  settled  at  Port  Royal, 
in  Acadia,  the  home  of  Poutrincourt. 

But  Champlain  could  not  remain  content 
with  the  idle  life  that  was  led  there.  He  was 
constantly  making  expeditions  into  the  great 
forests,  and  learning  all  that  he  could  about  the 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE,  275 

country;  he  went  back  to  France  too,  and 
while  there  a  company  of  merchants  employed 
him  to  explore  the  country  from  Maine  to  the 
St.  Lawrence.  He  started  off  on  his  travels 
as  soon  as  he  returned  to  America,  and  push- 
ing through  the  forests  of  Maine  and  Canada, 
travelling  for  the  greater  part  of  the  way  in 
an  Indian  canoe,  came  at  last  to  the  St.  Law- 
rence, and  floating  down  the  mighty  stream  to 
Stadacona,  the  old  resting  place  of  Jacques 
Cartier,  built  there  a  fort  in  July,  1608.  Here 
he  remained  for  many  months,  visiting  all  the 
country  round,  going  up  and  down  the  St. 
Lawrence,  and  learning  its  islands  and  tribu- 
taries, and  giving  names  to  rivers,  islands,  and 
lakes  which  they  keep  to  this  day.  In  the  spring 
the  men  laid  out  garden  plots  and  planted  them 
carefully,  so  that  they  would  have  corn  and 
vegetables  for  the  next  winter ;  and  as  soon  as 
the  planting  was  done,  and  everything  in  good 
order,  Champlain  started  off  on  one  of  his  trips, 
which  proved  to  be  the  most  interesting  he  had 
ever  undertaken. 

He  was  accompanied  by  a  large  party  of  his 


276  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 


men,  and  in  his  journey  met,  as  agreed  upon, 
the  Indians  of  Canada  in  an  expedition  against 
the  Iroquois,  the  tribes  of  what  is  now  known  as 
New  York  State.  He  met  his  Indian  friends  at 
the  mouth  of  the  Iroquois  River,  now  called  the 
Richelieu  ;  they  were  very  glad  to  see  him  and 
his  men,  for  they  knew  that  they  would  be  of 
great  help  in  the  coming  battle,  and  probably 
be  the  means  of  their  defeating  the  Iroquois. 
Champlain  noticed  the  beauty  of  this  river, 
which  he  had  never  sailed  on  before,  and  asked 
his  guides  where  it  came  from.  They  told  him  it 
came  from  a  beautiful  lake  not  very  far  away, 
and  which  he  could  easily  reach  with  his  vessel. 
But  he  soon  found  that  this  was  not  true  :  the 
river  grew  narrower  and  narrower,  and  the  bed 
became  so  rocky  and  steep  that  the  Indians  at 
last  confessed  that  they  had  deceived  him  in  the 
hope  that  he  would  join  in  the  coming  battle. 
But  as  soon  as  Champlain  saw  that  he  could  not 
reach  the  lake  in  his  own  vessel,  he  sent  it  back 
to  Quebec,  only  being  able  to  persuade  two  of 
his  men  to  go  on  with  him.  The  rest  of  the 
journey  was  made  in  the  canoes,  and  although 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  2/7 

there  were  many  dangerous  places  in  the  river 
— falls  and  rapids  and  immense  boulders  that 
almost  blocked  the  way — still,  by  landing  and 
carrying  the  canoes  around  the  worst  places, 
they  at  last  came  to  smooth  water  without  hav- 
ing lost  a  single  boat.  And  then  Champlain 
saw,  as  they  floated  into  this  shining  stretch  of 
water,  that  of  all  the  lakes  he  had  seen  in  Maine 
or  Canada  none  was  so  beautiful  as  this.  For 
miles  and  miles  ahead  its  waves  glistened  in  the 
July  sunlight,  and  everywhere  lovely  islands 
appeared;  the  shores  were  bordered  with  mag- 
nificent trees  and  covered  with  luxuriant  vines  ; 
on  one  side  rose  the  wooded  heights  of  Ver- 
mont,  and  on  the  other  the  white  peaks  of  the 
Adirondacks,  and  as  the  admiring  party  slowly 
coasted  along,  visiting  the  little  bays  and  islands, 
and  gathering  the  wild  flowers  and  strawberries 
that  grew  in  abundance,  they  felt  well  rewarded 
for  their  difficult  journey. 

Champlain  gave  the  lake  his  own  name, 
which  it  bears  to  this  day  in  honor  of  its  great 
discoverer. 

Two  or  three  days  passed  very  peacefully, 


278  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

and  it  seemed  they  had  only  come  to  that  beau- 
tiful place  for  quiet  and  enjoyment ;  but  one 
evening,  just  as  the  dusk  was  creeping  over  the 
lake,  they  saw  the  dark  faces  of  the  Iroquois 
looking  down  at  them  from  the  leafy  heights 
above.  The  Canadian  Indians  gave  a  shrill 
cry  at  the  sight,  and  all  that  night  the  two  tribes 
shrieked  defiance  at  one  another,  and  waited 
impatiently  for  the  sunrise,  which  was  to  be  the 
signal  for  the  battle  to  begin.  At  break  of  day 
the  Iroquois  stood  ready  for  battle,  awaiting 
the  attack  of  the  Canadians,  who  all  this  time 
had  kept  Champlain  and  his  friends  hidden 
from  the  sight  of  their  enemies.  Now  they 
formed  in  ranks,  still  keeping  their  white  friends 
concealed,  and  marched  slowly  toward  the  Iro- 
quois, who  were  eager  for  the  fight.  But  before 
a  single  arrow  was  shot  the  ranks  of  the  Cana- 
dians opened,  and  Champlain  came  coolly  to 
the  front  and  fired  his  gun.  The  Iroquois 
were  terrified,  having  never  before  seen  such  a 
weapon,  and  when  they  saw  that  two  of  their 
number  were  wounded,  they  became  still  more 
afraid  ;   and  thinking  that  Champlain  was  a  god, 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  279 

and  held  a  magic  instrument  in  his  hand  against 
which  it  would  be  useless  ^o  fight,  they  turned 
and  fled  into  the  woods,  pursued  by  the  Cana- 
dians, who  were  delighted  at  the  success  of  their 
trick,  and  shrieked  out  their  joy  over  their  easy 
victory.  But  the  Iroquois  went  on,  not  heed- 
ing their  enemies'  triumphant  cries,  and  did  not 
consider  themselves  safe  until  they  reached  their 
own  peaceful  valleys,  hidden  away  among  the 
Adirondacks ;  and  years  and  years  after  that 
the  children  of  the  tribe,  as  they  gathered  the 
water-lilies  from  the  beautiful  mountain  lakes, 
or  wandered  among  the  woods  plucking  dainty 
flowers  and  waxen  Indian  pipes,  would  tell  with 
wonder  and  awe  the  story  of  the  great  white 
god  and  his  magic  weapon,  and  how  by  his  aid 
the  brave  Iroquois,  always  before  victorious  in 
battle,  had  been  defeated  on  the  shores  of  that 
distant  lake  which  lay  beyond  the  slopes  of 
their  snow-capped  mountains. 

But  the  Canadians  went  home  rejoicing,  and 
Champlain  went  back  to  Quebec,  and  told  of 
his  discovery,  and  placed  the  new  lake  on  his 
maps  with  much  pride,  and  wrote  in  his  journal 


28o  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

an  account  of  his  journey  thither,  which,  when 
the  French  people  at  home  read  it,  pleased  them 
so  much  that  they  were  more  determined  than 
ever  that  the  whole  of  that  beautiful  region 
should  belong  to  France,  and  to  no  other 
country.  And  Champlain  lived  in  honor  at  Que- 
bec until  his  death,  in  1635  ;  but  his  name  will 
never  be  forgotten,  for  it  is  heard  year  after 
year,  and  echoed  again  and  again,  among  the 
trees  that  fringe  the  shores,  and  the  mountains 
that  overlook  the  beautiful  lake  that  he  discov- 
ered. 

But  in  the  meantime  the  English  had  not 
been  idle.  The  year  after  DeMonts  left  France 
the  English  also  sent  an  expedition  to  the  north- 
ern part  of  what  they  then  called  Virginia.  The 
leader  was  George  Weymouth,  and  the  name  of 
the  vessel  was  the  Archangel.  After  a  pleas- 
ant voyage  they  landed  in  May  on  Monhegan 
Island,  south  of  Maine,  near  Pemaquid  Point. 
After  the  long  sea  voyage  the  men  were  glad 
to  get  on  land  again,  and  delighted  with  the  isl- 
and, which  had  fine  shade  trees,  cool  streams  of 
fresh  water,  and  was  covered  with  gooseberries, 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  28 1 

Strawberries,  roses  and  violets,  which  grew  down 
to  the  water's  edge.  But  pleasant  as  this  was, 
they  made  only  a  short  stay  here,  and  went  on 
along  the  coast  and  up  some  of  the  large  rivers 
to  find  a  good  place  for  a  settlement.  They 
sailed  in  and  out  among  the  many  bays,  and 
everywhere  found  the  country  as  pleasant  as 
their  first  view  of  it.  Everywhere  were  good 
harbors,  forests  full  of  deer  and  other  game, 
trees  for  ship-building,  acres  and  acres  of  fertile 
ground  for  raising  crops,  and  miles  of  meadow 
land,  through  which  ran  the  brooks  that  had 
come  rushing  down  from  the  high  lands.  The 
men  declared  that  the  peas  and  barley  grew  half 
an  inch  a  day,  and  said  that  it  was  impossible 
to  describe  the  beauty  and  goodness  of  the 
land. 

The  Indians,  too,  were  of  orderly  and  peace- 
ful habits,  the  different  tribes  living  for  the  most 
part  very  quietly.  The  principal  tribe  was  the 
Abnakis,  and  it  was  their  custom  to  dwell  in  vil- 
lages and  to  till  the  soil.  The  principal  villages 
were  on  the  banks  of  the  Kennebec,  the  An- 
droscoggin and  the  Saco.     They  were  all  en- 


282  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE, 

closed  with  high  paUsades  for  defence  against 
enemies,  and  the  wigwams  were  very  comforta- 
ble, being  built  of  bended  poles  and  covered  with 
bark  and  moss.  These  Indians  had  gardens 
well  laid  out  in  regular  manner,  and  raised  corn 
and  peas  and  beans.  They  prepared  the  ground 
as  soon  as  the  snow  melted,  and  planted  their 
corn  early  in  June,  making  holes  in  the  ground 
with  their  fingers  or  with  little  sticks. 

The  Abnakis  were  also  fond  of  ornamenting 
their  dress  with  fringes  of  feathers  and  shells 
and  stones,  and  always  wore  a  great  number  of 
rings,  bracelets,  necklaces,  and  belts  embroid- 
ered with  shells  and  pearls.  But  the  English 
never  could  win  the  Indian  hearts  as  the  French 
could.  They  never  trusted  them  as  they  trusted 
the  French,  and  when  trouble  arose  between  the 
English  and  French  for  the  possession  of  Canada, 
the  Indians  always  were  ready  to  join  with  the 
French  against  the  English,  and  showed  their 
hatred  and  distrust  in  very  cruel  and  savage 
ways.  One  reason  for  this  was,  that  the  French 
tried  to  win  the  Indians  by  kindness  ;  they  did 
not  show  that  contempt  for   them   which    the 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  283 

English  nearly  always  showed,  and  they  tried  in 
every  way  to  be  just  in  their  dealings  with  them. 
They  learned  the  different  Indian  languages  so 
that  they  could  talk  easily  with  the  natives,  and 
in  naming  rivers  and  bays  and  islands,  they  kept 
many  of  the  poetical  Indian  names,  which  the 
Enoflish  would  never  take  the  trouble  to  learn 
to  pronounce.  And  then,  too,  it  was  always 
very  easy  for  the  French  to  adopt  the  habits  of 
the  Indians.  Frenchmen  would  sleep  in  wig- 
wams and  eat  Indian  bread,  and  wear  the  Indian 
dress,  travel  in  birch-bark  canoes,  and  hunt 
Indian  fashion.  All  this  was  very  different  from 
the  English,  who,  wherever  they  went,  changed 
the  names  of  places  for  English  names,  and  in- 
sisted on  the  Indians  learning  the  English  way 
of  doino-  thinors. 

And  so  the  Indians  grew  to  love  the  French, 
who  were  always  kind  to  them  in  health,  and 
whose  gentle  priests  nursed  them  carefully  in 
sickness  ;  and  by  and  by  they  came  to  learn 
many  useful  things,  and  to  adopt  many  French 
customs,  which  linger  among  their  descendants 
to  this  day. 


284  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 


But  all  this  made  it  very  much  harder  for 
the  English  who  tried  to  settle  that  part  of  the 
country,  and  Weymouth  and  his  friends  soon 
found  that  the  natives  looked  upon  them  with 
distrust  and  dislike ;  and  very  good  reason  they 
had  for  this,  as  the  English  captain,  the  first 
chance  he  got,  kept  five  Indians  who  had  come 
on  board  his  vessel  and  carried  them  off  to 
England. 

Here  they  were  looked  upon  as  great  curi- 
osities. Great  crowds  followed  them  about  the 
streets,  as  they  walked  through  London  wrap- 
ped in  their  skin  mantles,  and  with  their  strange 
head-dress  of  quills  and  feathers  ;  and  none  the 
less  curiously  did  the  Indians  look  at  the  Lon- 
doners, and  at  the  fine  buildings  and  palaces 
which  adorned  their  famous  city. 

The  returned  seamen  reported  that  the  coast 
of  Maine  would  be  an  excellent  place  for  an  Eng- 
lish settlement,  and  gave  wonderful  descriptions 
of  the  fine  climate,  rich  soil,  and  good  fishing, 
and  praised  the  country  so  much  that  from  their 
accounts,  and  from  the  stories  of  the  kidnapped 
Indians,  some  English  gentlemen  decided  to  be- 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  285 

gin  a  settlement  there  at  once.  There  were 
plenty  of  men  willing  to  go  to  a  place  where 
the  sailors  said  one  could  gather  pearls  on  the 
beach,  and  where  the  trees  oozed  gum  as  sweet 
as  frankincense,  and  very  soon  a  ship  was  sent 
out  to  explore  the  country  still  farther,  and  take 
Nahanada,  one  of  the  captive  Indians,  back  to 
his  tribe  at  Pemaquid. 

In  1607  two  other  ships  left  England  also, 
and  on  one  of  them  was  the  Indian  Skitwanoes, 
who  was  to  act  as  guide  and  interpreter. 

They  landed  in  July,  and  immediately  re- 
ceived visits  from  Indians  on  the  coast  who 
came  to  trade  ;  and  after  spending  a  week  in 
visiting  the  islands  near,  a  boat  was  sent  up  the 
river  to  an  Indian  village  in  Pemaquid.  Skit- 
wanoes went  with  this  party  to  show  them  the 
way,  and  had  it  not  been  for  his  presence  the 
English  would  have  been  met  with  a  shower  of 
arrows,  for  as  soon  as  they  came  in  sight  of  the 
village  the  Indians  started  up,  and  snatching  up 
their  bows,  would  have  begun  fighting  at  once, 
had  not  Skitwanoes  stepped  in  front  of  the 
party  and  called  the  angry  chief  by  name.     It 


286  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

was  Nahanada,  the  Indian  who  had  been  sent 
back  from  England  the  year  before  ;  as  soon 
as  he  recognized  Skitwanoes  and  saw  that  his 
friends  were  Englishmen,  he  dropped  his  wea- 
pons and  went  up  to  his  visitors,  and  welcomed 
them  and  kissed  them  in  true  Indian  fashion. 
After  a  pleasant  visit  of  some  hours  they  re- 
turned to  the  ship,  and  in  a  few  days,  after 
choosing  a  good  spot  on  the  banks  of  a  river, 
built  a  fort  and  some  houses,  and  the  place 
soon  looked  like  a  thriving  little  settlement. 
Some  timber  was  cut  and  seasoned  for  the 
building  of  a  ship,  which  was  named  the  Vir- 
ginia, the  first  vessel  ever  built  by  English  set- 
tlers in  America. 

The  Indians  looked  on  all  these  preparations 
with  wonder.  For  the  first  time  they  saw  sub- 
stantial houses  that  would  protect  the  inmates 
from  snow  and  cold  ;  and  the  fort,  with  its  twelve 
mounted  guns,  looked  as  if  the  new-comers 
meant  to  stay,  and  if  need  be  fight  for  the  new 
homes  that  had  been  made  with  such  trouble. 
But  there  was  one  thing  the  natives  could  not 
understand,  and  that  was  what  right  these  white 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  28/ 

men  had  to  come  and  take  away  one  of  their 
favorite  spots,  and  make  it  their  own  without 
paying  for  it,  or  even  asking  for  it.  It  seemed 
to  them  very  unfair  that  they  must  lose  their 
property  in  this  way,  and  they  soon  began  to 
show  the  settlers  that  they  were  very  much 
displeased.  They  became  very  troublesome, 
refused  to  trade  with  the  English,  and  showed 
their  ill-will  in  many  ways ;  and  this  was  very 
discouraging  to  the  English,  who  wanted  to  get 
along  peaceably  ;  and  so  many  of  them,  before 
the  winter  was  over,  became  disheartened  at 
the  thought  of  living  in  such  a  cold,  dreary 
region,  surrounded  by  bitter  foes,  and  sailed 
back  to  England  again  in  the  Virginia,  on  her 
first  voyage  to  the  old  country. 

As  time  went  on  the  Indians  grew  more  and 
more  troublesome,  sometimes  even  coming  in- 
side the  fort ;  and  once  the  settlers  became  so 
angry  that  they  set  the  dogs  on  them  and  drove 
them  back  to  the  woods.  But  this  only  made 
matters  worse,  and  when  a  party  went  up  the 
river  to  explore  the  country,  they  found  that  the 
other  tribes  were  just  as  unfriendly,  and  that, 


288  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

excepting  the  chief  Nahanada,  they  had  not  a 
friend  among  the  natives. 

The  second  winter  was  as  severe  as  the  first, 
and  quite  discouraged  the  colonists,  who  could 
get  very  little  to  eat,  as  their  storehouse  had 
been  burned  by  the  Indians;  and  so  when 
spring  came  and  they  had  a  chance  to  leave 
Maine  they  all  went  back  to  England,  and  the 
settlement  of  Maine  by  the  English  was  given 
up  for  many  years.  The  next  attempt  to  set- 
tle this  coast  was  made  by  the  French,  who, 
not  satisfied  with  claiming  Acadia  and  Canada, 
wanted  also  to  get  possession  of  Maine,  which 
had  been  so  often  described  as  a  good  place 
for  settlement.  In  1613  Madame  la  Marquise 
de  Guercheville,  a  wealthy  Catholic,  and  some 
French  priests  sailed  from  France  to  make 
a  settlement  at  Kadesquit  on  the  Penobscot  ; 
but,  arriving  at  the  coast  in  a  heavy  fog,  they 
did  not  reach  the  mouth  of  the  Penobscot,  and, 
after  waiting  two  days  for  the  fog  to  lift,  found 
themselves  near  Mt.  Desert  island.  The  grand 
and  beautiful  scenery  of  this  island  pleased 
them  so  much  that  they  sailed  up  into  French- 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  289 


men's  Bay,  and  made  a  landing  on  the  coast, 
intending  to  stay  there  awhile  before  going  on. 
A  number  of  Indian  villages  were  scattered 
over  the  island,  and  as  soon  as  the  French 
landed  they  saw  smoke  arising,  and  knew  by 
that  that  the  natives  had  seen  them,  and  that 
the  smoke  was  meant  for  a  signal ;  so  they 
built  a  fire  in  answer,  and  the  Indians  soon 
came  flocking  down  to  the  beach  in  great  haste 
to  see  the  strangers.  One  of  the  priests.  Fa- 
ther Biard,  had  met  some  of  these  Indians 
before  on  his  former  visit  to  the  Penobscot, 
and  he  now  asked  them  the  way  to  Kadesquit. 
But  the  cunning  Indians  did  not  want  their 
white  visitors  to  go  on  to  Kadesquit ;  they 
wanted  them  to  stay  there  with  them,  so  they 
told  them  that  their  own  island  was  a  much  bet- 
ter place  than  Kadesquit.  They  pointed  to  the 
mountains  covered  with  spruce  and  pine,  and  to 
the  sparkling  brooks,  fringed  with  delicate  wild 
flowers,  and  to  the  moss-covered  rocks,  and 
clusters  of  dainty  ferns,  and  said  that  this  fair  spot 
was  as  healthful  as  it  was  beautiful,  and  that  all 

the  neighboring  tribes  sent  their  sick  to   them 
13 


290  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE. 

to  be  cured  by  the  pure  air  and  delightful 
waters.  But  Father  Biard  was  quite  deter- 
mined to  go  on  to  Kadesquit,  and  the  Indians, 
seeing  this,  gave  up  coaxing  and  instead  begged 
of  him  to  visit  their  sick  chief,  who,  they  feared, 
was  going  to  die.  Kind  Father  Biard  consented 
very  willingly  to  go  and  see  the  sick  man,  and 
when  he  reached  his  home,  which  was  on  a  bay 
in  the  eastern  part  of  the  island,  he  found  the 
place  so  beautiful  that  he  quite  gave  up  Kades- 
quit,  and  decided  to  stay  there. 

So  they  raised  a  cross,  built  some  huts,  and 
planted  corn,  for  it  was  in  the  early  summer,  with 
many  long  months  of  warm  weather  still  to  come. 

But  the  settlement  that  was  begun  in  such 
pleasant  weather,  and  with  such  good  will  from 
the  natives,  came  soon  to  a  sad  end  ;  for  an  Eng- 
lish captain  from  Jamestown,  who  was  sailing 
along  the  coast,  was  very  angry  when  he  found 
that  the  French  had  begun  a  settlement,  and 
asked  the  Indians  to  show  him  the  way  thither ; 
and  they,  thinking  that  the  English  and  French 
were  friends,  and  that  the  captain  wanted  to  get 
provisions  from  the  priests,  led  the  way,  and,  as 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   MAINE.  29 1 

most  of  the  French  were  away  from  the  camps, 
the  captain  had  no  difficulty  in  seizing  the  place, 
and  in  two  days  he  had  plundered  it  of  every- 
thing, and,  driving  some  of  the  men  away  in  a 
boat,  took  Father  Biard  and  the  rest  with  him 
to  Jamestown  ;  the  English  gov.ernor  there  said 
that  the  captain  had  done  quite  right,  and  sent 
him  back  to  destroy  all  the  French  settlements 
in  Acadia  too.  The  captain  was  very  glad  to 
do  this,  and  landing  first  at  Mt.  Desert,  he  cut 
clown  the  French  cross,  and  then  went  on  his 
way  to  Port  Royal,  where  Poutrincourt's  son, 
Biencourt,  was  ruling ;  and  here  the  English  did 
as  they  had  done  at  other  French  settlements  on 
their  way,  for  Biencourt  had  few  men  and  could 
make  no  resistance.  The  English  destroyed 
Port  Royal,  its  fort  and  monuments  and  church, 
and  even  chiselled  out  the  name  of  De  Monts 
that  was  engraved  in  a  stone  column,  and  so 
the  French  were  driven  out  of  Acadia,  and  not 
a  single  cross  remained  upon  the  coast  of  Maine 
to  show  they  had  ever  been  there. 

The  English  themselves  did  not  make  any 
permanent  settlement  there  till  1629. 


CHAPTER   XX. 

HENRY    HUDSON    AND    THE    KNICKERBOCKERS. 

Henry  Hudson  was  the  first  white  man  who 
ever  sailed  up  the  Hudson  River.  He  was  an 
EngHsh  sailor  in  the  service  of  the  Dutch,  who 
sent  him  on  a  voyage  to  North  America.  While 
sailinof  alono-  the  Atlantic  coast  he  entered  the 
bay  of  New  York,  and  passing  inland  discov- 
ered the  beautiful  river  that  bears  his  name. 
He  was  charmed  with  its  clear  waters  and 
banks  which  were  covered  with  grass  and  flow- 
ers and  trees,  and  said  that  the  country  through 
which  it  flowed  was  "  as  beautiful  as  one  could 
tread  upon." 

The  vessel  was  called  the  Half  Moon,  and 
had  a  crew  of  English  and  Dutch — Hudson's 
own  son  being  of  the  number.  As  they  sailed 
up  the  river  the  Indians  put  out  from  the  shore 
in  their  canoes  and  paddled  up  to  the  Half 
Moon.     Hudson  would  not  let  them  come  on 


THE  HALF-MOON   IN  THE  HUDSON. 


HENRY  HUDSON  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS.     293 

board  at  first,  as  one  of  his  sailors  had  been 
killed  by  an  Indian  ;  but  as  they  seemed  very 
friendly,  the  sailors  at  last  grew  less  timid,  and 
traded  with  them,  giving  them  beads,  knives, 
hatchets,  etc.,  for  the  grapes,  pumpkins,  and  furs 
which  they  brought,  and  after  a  time  Hudson 
and  his  men  went  on  shore  and  visited  the  coun- 
try around. 

Hudson  sailed  up  the  river  as  far  as  he  could 
with  the  Half  Moon,  and  then  sent  a  small  boat 
as  far  up  as  Albany.  He  was  hoping  to  find  a 
strait  through  which  he  could  sail  to  India  ;  but 
of  course  he  did  not  find  that,  so  he  turned  back 
and  sailed  down  the  river  again,  and  out  into  the 
ocean  and  back  to  Holland. 

Some  time  after  he  came  back  to  America, 
and,  sailing  to  the  north,  discovered  Hudson's 
Bay  ;  while  here  his  men  became  angry  because 
they  did  not  wish'  to  go  any  farther  in  such  a 
region,  and  taking  Hudson  and  his  son  and  a 
few  others,  they  bound  them  and  put  them  in  an 
open  boat  and  set  them  adrift  in  the  sea.  No 
one  ever  heard  of  them  again.  It  is  supposed 
that  the  boat  was  dashed  to  pieces  by  the  float- 


294    HENRY  HUDSCnSf  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS. 

ing  ice,  and  that  the  bold  sailor  and  his  compan- 
ions perished;  but  in  the  old  stories  of  the  Hud- 
son the  legend  runs  that  he  and  his  companions 
did  not  die,  but  found  their  way  down  to  the 
Catskills  and  Highlands  ;  and  when  it  thunders 
they  say  it  is  Henry  Hudson  and  his  crew  roll- 
ing their  ninepins  among  the  hills. 

How  that  is  we  do  not  know.  If  the  brave 
sailor  and  his  friends  really  are  living  there  yet, 
why,  we  must  admit  they  could  not  have  chosen 
a  lovelier  place,  for  nowhere  in  the  world  is  a 
fairer  spot  than  where  the  Hudson  goes  down 
to  the  sea,  passing  on  its  way  the  misty  blue 
Catskills,  rich  with  stories  of  fairies  and  legends 
of  the  old  Dutch  sailors,  and  the  beautiful  High- 
lands, which  stand  strong  and  firm,  as  if  protect- 
ing the  bright  river  that  sweeps  around  their 
base. 

This  happened  over  two  hundred  and  sev- 
enty years  ago,  in  the  year  1609,  two  years  after 
the  settlement  of  Jamestown  by  the  English. 

About  five  years  after  a  company  of  Dutch 
came  to  trade  with  the  Indians,  and  just  as  their 
ship  was  ready  to  sail  home  again  it  caught  fire 


HENRY  HUDSON  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS.     295 

and  burned  up  ;  so  they  had  to  stay  all  winter 
with  the  Indians.  They  had  landed  on  Man- 
hattan Island,  on  which  the  City  of  New  York 
now  stands,  and  from  this  time  the  Dutch  began 
comine  there  to  trade  with  the  Indians,  and 
after  a  few  years  they  bought  the  island,  paying 
about  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  dollars  for  it. 

The  little  Dutch  children  used  to  do  very 
much  as  the  little  New  York  children  do  now. 
They  had  their  lessons  and  their  games  ;  and 
although  they  learned  in  a  different  way  and 
about  different  things,  still  they  played  a  good 
deal  and  worked  a  very  little,  as  is  the  way  of 
children  all  the  world  over. 

Perhaps,  though,  you  would  like  to  imagine 
yourself  a  little  Dutch  child  living  in  New  York 
(or  New  Amsterdam,  as  it  was  then  called,  after 
the  city  of  Amsterdam  in  Holland)  over  two 
hundred  years  ago. 

Well,  in  the  first  place,  you  would  not  be 
living  in  a  tall,  narrow  house  of  brown  stone  or 
red  brick,  standing  in  a  row  with  thirty  other 
houses  just  like  it.  You  would  be  living  in  a 
wooden  house  with  a  gable  roof  like  a  country 


296     HENRY  HUDSON  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS. 

church,  and  the  ends  of  the  house  would  be 
made  of  black  and  yellow  bricks.  Over  the 
door  would  be  some  iron  letters  telline  when 
the  house  was  built,  and  on  the  roof  a  gay 
weather-cock  would  be  standing.  When  you 
came  in  from  the  street  on  a  winter  day  and 
wanted  t;o  warm  yourself,  you  would  go  up  to  a 
great  open  fireplace  and  sit  up  in  the  corner 
of  it,  close  to  where  the  great  logs  of  wood  were 
burning. 

The  fireplaces  were  all  tiled  as  many  of 
those  in  new  houses  are  now,  only  the  tiles  then 
were  all  arranged  so  as  to  tell  some  story,  usu- 
ally from  the  Bible,  and  around  one  fireplace  you 
would  read  the  story  of  Noah  and  the  Ark ; 
around  another,  the  story  of  the  children  of 
Israel  crossing  the  Red  Sea,  and  so  on. 

The  floors  were  not  covered  with  carpet,  but 
every  day  they  were  sprinkled  with  fresh  white 
sand,  and  the  little  Dutch  girls  were  taught  how 
to  draw  pretty  figures  on  the  sand  with  their 
birch  brooms ;  and  at  night,  when  they  gath- 
ered around  to  listen  to  the  stories  of  the  Cats- 
kill  fairies,  the  room  would  not  be  lighted  with 


HENRY  HUDSON  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS.     297 

gas  or  lamps,  but  with  great  pine  knots  or  tallow- 
candles,  which  with  the  flames  from  the  wood 
fire  made  the  room  full  of  queer  shadows  ;  and  I 
do  not  doubt  that  oftentimes  the  little  girls  and 
boys  were  just  a  little  bit  afraid  to  go  to  bed 
after  listeninsf  to  some  of  these  tales  of  Hen- 
drick  Hudson  and  Rip  Van  Winkle,  and  their 
queer  adventures  among  the  mountains  up  the 
river. 

But  the  best  time  in  all  the  year  was  at 
Christmas,  when  the  Dutch  kept  the  feast  of 
Santa  Claus,  or  St.  Nicholas.  What  a  gather- 
ing then  of  all  the  little  folks  !  what  games  were 
played  over  the  nicely  sanded  floors  !  and  what 
a  treat  to  sit  around  the  great  fire  and  eat  the 
sweet  cakes  and  crullers,  which  no  one  but 
Dutch  mothers  knew  how  to  make  so  well !  And 
you  must  remember,  when  at  Christmas  you  have 
your  Christmas  tree  and  invite  your  little  friends 
to  come  and  spend  the  evening  with  you,  that 
you  are  doing  the  very  thing  that  the  little 
Dutch  boys  and  girls  did  in  New  Amsterdam 
over  two  hundred  years   ago  ;  and  when  your 

mamma  stands  in  the  parlor  on  New-year's-day 
13* 


298  HENRY  HUDSON  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS. 

ready  to  receive  callers,  she  is  doing  just  what 
the  Dutch  mammas  did  so  long  ago  ;  and  at 
Easter  when  you  have  presents  of  colored  eggs 
and  ask  your  playmates  to  hunt  for  the  nests 
which  you  have  hidden  away,  remember  that 
this,  also,  was  a  Dutch  custom,  for  the  Dutch 
were  great  people  for  holidays,  and  to  this  day 
many  of  the  Dutch  manners  and  customs  are 
to  be  found  among  the  New  Yorkers  who  are 
proud  to  claim  descent  from  the  honest  and 
hospitable  Knickerbockers,  who  looked  on  life 
as  a  thing  to  be  enjoyed,  and  who  have  left 
such  pleasant  customs  to  us,  as  the  keeping  of 
Christmas,  New  Year,  Easter,  and  other  holi- 
days. 

One  morning,  about  fifty  years  after  the 
Dutch  first  settled  on  Manhattan  Island,  a  fleet 
of  English  vessels  was  seen  in  New  York  Bay, 
and  by  and  by  a  letter  was  brought  from  the 
English  commander  to  Peter  Stuyvesant,  the 
governor  of  New  Amsterdam,  asking  him  to 
give  the  town  up  to  the  English.  The  English 
king,  Charles  II.,  thought  that  as  the  Cabots  had 
first  discovered  this  part  of  America,  the  Eng- 


HENRV  HUDSON  AND  THE  KNICKERBOCKERS,     299 

lish  had  more  right  to  it  than  the  Dutch,  and 
he  sent  a  fleet  across  the  sea  and  demanded  the 
Dutch  to  give  up  the  town. 

Governor  Stuyvesant  got  into  a  dreadful 
rage  at  this,  and  stumped  wrathfully  arotfnd  on 
his  wooden  leg,  and  threatened  dreadful  things 
if  the  English  did  not  hoist  sail  and  go  away 
again  ;  but  it  all  did  no  good  ;  the  Dutch  peo- 
ple themselves  thought  that  they  would  be  bet- 
ter governed,  and  also  better  protected  from  the 
Indians,  if  they  were  ruled  by  the  English ;  so 
they  made  Governor  Stuyvesant  give  their  city 
up  to  the  English,  who  changed  its  name  to 
New  York,  in  honor  of  the  king's  brother,  the 
Duke  of  York,  to  whom  the  king  had  given  all 
the  Dutch  possessions  in  America.  But  for 
years  and  years  the  Dutch  language  and  cus- 
toms held  their  own  in  the  city,  and  there  are 
many  things  about  it  still  which  show  that  it 
was  originally  a  Dutch  settlement. 


CHAPTER   XXI. 

THE    PILGRIMS    AND    THE    SETTLEMENT    OF    NEW 
ENGLAND. 

About  two  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago, 
there  was  living  in  England  a  class  of  people 
who  did  not  think  it  right  to  worship  God  in 
the  same  way  that  most  of  the  English  nation 
did  ;  they  did  not  believe  in  building  so  many 
fine  churches  and  cathedrals,  or  in  having  so 
much  chanting  and  singing  in  the  service ;  they 
did  not  like  to  see  the  priests,  dressed  in  rich 
robes,  standing  before  mao^nificent  altars  where- 
on  candles  blazed  and  incense  burned.  They 
said  that  this  was  all  wrong,  and  that  the  money 
that  was  spent  in  fine  churches  and  music  and 
candles  was  only  wasted,  and  that  such  things 
were  not  pleasing  to  God  ;  and  above  all  they 
did  not  believe  many  of  the  things  which  the 
English  Church  held  sacred.  So  all  these  peo- 
ple refused  to  go  to   church  ;    they    stayed   at 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND,  3OI 

home  and  had  meeting  at  their  houses,  much  in 
the  same  way  that  people  now,  who  Hve  far 
away  from  churches,  meet  at  one  another's 
houses  and  have  prayer-meeting. 

But  the  king  of  England,  James  L,  said  that 
these  people  had  no  right  to  stay  away  from 
church,  and  he  made  a  law  which  said  that 
every  one  who  did  not  go  to  church  should  be 
punished. 

These  punishments  were  very  severe,  and 
the  people  were  even  sometimes  afraid  of  their 
lives.  After  this  law  was  passed  they  did  not 
dare  any  more  to  go  to  meeting  openly,  but 
used  to  meet  at  night  at  their  minister's  house. 

At  last  things  got  so  bad  that  they  decided 
to  go  away  from  England,  and  find  some  place 
where  they  could  worship  God  as  they  thought 
right ;  so  they  sold  their  houses  and  lands, 
gathered  their  families  together,  and  one  day 
sailed  away  for  Holland. 

The  king's  officers,  however,  were  looking 
out  for  them,  and  some  of  them  were  captured 
before  they  could  get  on  the  ship  and  taken 
to  prison,  where  they  were  kept  many  weary 


302  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND. 

months ;  but  finally  as  many  of  these  people 
as  wanted  to  found  their  way  to  Holland.  Here 
they  lived  very  quietly  for  eleven  years,  the 
Hollanders  being  very  willing  to  have  them 
among  them,  as  they  were  a  very  peaceable, 
honest,  and  kindly  people. 

But  after  a  time  the  Pilgrims — for  so  these 
people  were  called — did  not  like  it  so  well  in 
Holland  as  they  did  at  first,  for  they  found  that 
their  children  were  growing  up  to  be  Dutch 
children  instead  of  English ;  their  sons  and 
daughters  began  to  marry  into  the  families  of 
their  Dutch  neighbors,  and  they  feared  that  in 
a  few  years  they  would  no  longer  consider  them- 
selves English.  The  Pilgrims  were  still  very 
fond  of  England  and  everything  English.  Their 
language  and  customs  were  still  dear  to  them, 
>  and  they  considered  themselves  Englishmen  in 
every  way. 

So  the  principal  men  met  together  and  talked 
the  matter  over,  and  at  last  decided  that  they 
would  leave  Holland  and  seek  some  other  place 
where  their  children  would  hear  only  English 
spoken  and  learn  only  English  habits. 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  303 

As  they  could  not  think  of  any  place  in  Eu- 
rope where  it  would  be  safe  for  them  to  go, 
they  all  agreed  that  the  best  thing  for  them  to 
do  would  be  to  sail  away  across  the  ocean  to  the 
New  World,  where  they  would  be  free  to  worship 
as  they  pleased,  and  where  they  would  make  a 
little  colony  by  themselves. 

There  were  so  many  Pilgrims  in  Holland  at 
this  time  that  they  could  not  all  go  to  America 
at  once,  as  they  did  not  have  enough  ships  or 
money  to  undertake  such  a  voyage ;  so  they 
chose  some  of  the  youngest  and  strongest  who 
were  most  willing  to  go,  and  one  sunny  morning 
in  the  month  of  July,  1620,  a  little  ship  sailed 
away  from  Holland,  carrying  with  it  the  brave- 
hearted  Pilgrims  who  were  so  determined  to 
seek  a  home  across  the  sea. 

The  voyage  was  very  long,  the  weather  cold 
and  stormy,  and  many  times  the  little  May- 
flower seemed  to  make  no  headway  against  the 
rough  winds  and  waves  ;  but  at  last,  after  long 
waiting,  they  saw  the  shores  of  the  New  World. 
For  a  month  they  sailed  up  and  down  the  coast 
looking  for  a  good  place  to   land.     They  had 


304         THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND. 

expected  to  go  to  the  Hudson  River,  but  the 
storms  drove  them  farther  north,  and  the  first 
land  that  they  saw  was  the  coast  of  Massachu- 
setts. 

It  was  not  a  very  pleasant-looking  country — 
with  low  sand  hills,  and  no  sign  of  grass  or  flow- 
er ;  but  the  pines  looked  fresh  and  green,  and 
the  Pilofrims  were  determined  not  to  be  discour- 
aged.  They  sent  little  expeditions  to  the  shore 
to  look  for  a  good  place  to  land,  and  finally  one 
day  they  all  left  the  ship  at  a  place  which  Cap- 
tain John  Smith  had  named  Plymouth,  and  here 
they  resolved  to  stay. 

If  you  should  ever  go  to  Plymouth  you 
would  see  in  the  Hall  there  some  of  the  curious 
old  furniture  which  the  Pilgrims  brought  with 
them — old-fashioned  armchairs  and  queer  spin- 
ning-wheels, ladles,  wooden  spoons,  a  great 
iron  dinner-kettle  said  to  have  been  owned  by 
Miles  Standish,  and  the  "  samplers  "  which  little 
Lora  Standish  worked.  Perhaps  the  thing  that 
you  children  would  like  best  would  be  the  old- 
fashioned  cradle  wherein  slept  the  little  Pere- 
grine White,  who  was  born  on  board  the  May- 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  305 

flower.  It  is  not  a  very  fine  cradle,  not  trimmed 
with  silk  and  dainty  laces,  but  the  little  English 
baby  slept  in  it  very  comfortably,  and  every  one 
will  admit  that  it  is  the  most  interesting-  cradle 
in  America  to-day. 

It  was  on  December  21st  that  the  Pilgrims 
landed,  and  you  can  imagine  how  cold  and 
bleak  it  was  down  there  by  the  sea ;  the  first 
thing  they  did  was  to  build  a  house,  a  large 
one  that  would  hold  them  all ;  and  they  lived 
in  this  until  they  had  time  to  build  separate 
houses  for  the  different  families.  These  houses 
were  built  of  logs,  having  tiny  little  windows  in 
which  oiled  paper  was  put  instead  of  glass.  As 
soon  as  they  could  they  built  a  church,  of  logs 
also,  with  four  cannon  on  the  top,  to  defend  it 
from  the  Indians. 

The  Pilgrims  had  a  very  hard  time  of  it  that 
first  winter,  they  suffered  very  much  from  the 
cold  and  from  sickness,  and,  worst  of  all,  they 
had  scarcely  enough  to  eat ;  nearly  one  half  of 
them  died  before  spring,  but  the  rest  were  still 
not  discouraged.  They  lived  on  game,  killing 
deer  and    wild  turkeys,  and  besides,  being  so 


306  THE   SETTLEMENT   Of'nEW   ENGLAND. 

near  the  sea,  they  could  catch  fish.  As  soon  as 
the  weather  grew  warm  enough  they  planted 
corn,  and  after  that  they  got  along  much 
better. 

Seven  or  eight  years  after  the  Pilgrims 
landed,  another  company  of  English  people 
came  to  America  ;  they,  like  the  Pilgrims,  left 
England  because  they  could  not  worship  there 
in  the  way  they  thought  right. 

These  people  were  called  Puritans,  but  it 
made  very  little  difference  whether  they  called 
themselves  Pilgrims  or  Puritans  ;  they  were  all 
alike  Englishmen  and  had  come  to  America  for 
the  same  purpose  ;  they  all  suffered  the  same 
hardships  and  endured  them  bravely,  for  wher- 
ever the  Englishman  goes  he  takes  a  brave 
heart  with  him. 

The  Puritans,  looking  for  a  good  place  for 
settlement,  chose  the  peninsula  of  Shawmut,  or 
Tri-mountain,  which  they  found  to  be  a  place  of 
"  sweet  and  pleasant  springs,  and  good  land  af- 
fording rich  corn-fields  and  fruitful  gardens," 
and  here,  in  September,  1630,  were  laid  the 
foundations  of  the  City  of  Boston. 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF  NEW   ENGLAND.  307 

For  many  years  the  colonists  could  not 
raise  any  cattle  on  account  of  the  wolves  which 
roamed  day  and  night  through  the  forests. 
The  Indians  were  sometimes  friendly  and  would 
bring  them  corn,  which  the  settlers  would  pay 
for  in  clothing,  knives,  etc.  ;  it  is  said  that  once 
one  of  the  Indians  gave  a  settler  a  peck  of  corn 
in  exchange  for  a  little  puppy-dog.  Whenever 
food  was  scarce  they  all  shared  alike,  so  that  no 
one  had  more  than  another,  and  after  a  time,  as 
they  began  to  raise  more  crops  and  as  the  for- 
ests became  cleared,  they  got  along  very  nicely 
and  lived  as  happily  in  their  log-houses  as  if 
they  had  been  marble  palaces. 

To-day  New  England  is  famous  for  its  beau- 
tiful villages,  with  their  broad  streets  shaded 
with  elms  and  their  wide  pleasant  lawns  and 
comfortable  houses  ;  but  if  you  could  have  seen 
a  New  England  village  two  hundred  and  fifty 
years  ago,  it  would  have  been  a  very  different 
thing. 

If  you  had  lived  in  those  days  your  home 
would  have  been  a  log-house  on  the  edge  of  a 
great  deep  forest.     Imagine  these  little  Eng- 


308         THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND. 

lish  boys  and  girls  going  to  bed  in  a  room  where 
the  snow  could  drift  in  through  the  cracks,  and 
where  they  could  hear  the  wolves  howling  in 
the  forests.  How  afraid  they  must  have  been, 
and  how  they  must  have  snuggled  under  the 
covers  and  covered  up  their  faces. 

Imagine  going  to  a  little  church  built  of  logs 
and  having  a  flag  waving  from  it,  and  cannon  in 
front  of  it  to  protect  it  from  the  Indians.  Some- 
times the  people  were  called  to  church  by  the 
beating  of  a  drum,  and  every  man  carried  his 
musket  with  him,  as  no  one  knew  when  the  In- 
dians might  come.  In  these  queer  little  churches, 
families  did  not  sit  together  as  they  do  now,  but 
the  men  sat  in  one  place,  the  women  in  another, 
and  the  children  in  another.  There  was  always 
a  man  to  keep  the  children  in  order,  and  well  he 
did  it  too.  No  child  dared  smile  in  church,  or 
he  might  be  rapped  on  the  knuckles  for  it. 
Every  one  had  to  go  to  church,  whether  he 
wanted  to  or  not ;  if  any  one  was  absent  the 
"  tithing  man  "  was  sent  after  him,  and  for  many 
years  after  this  custom  was  given  up,  the  New 
England  mothers  used  to  frighten  their  children 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  309 

by  telling  them  that  the  "  tidy  man  "  was  com- 
ing when  they  were  naughty. 

These  children  used  to  go  to  school  in  queer 
little  log  school-houses,  and  school  was  not  the 
pleasant  place  to  them  that  it  is  to  you.  Every- 
body had  to  be  as  solemn  there  as  possible, 
and  all  the  pupils  used  to'  sit  up  stiffly  and 
primly,  and  look  as  grave  as  little  owls,  for  the 
schoolmaster  was  feared  and  respected  next  to 
the  minister,  and  no  New  England  child  in  that 
age  would  have  thought  of  even  smiling  if 
the  minister  were  present.  The  fathers  and 
mothers  were  very  solemn  people  too — life  was 
such  a  serious  thing  to  them,  they  thought  it 
wicked  to  waste  time  amusing  children.  They 
did  not  even  keep  Christmas  for  many  years, 
and  the  Puritan  children  did  not  know  as  much 
about  Santa  Claus  as  you  do  about  the  man  in 
the  moon. 

You  must  not  think,  however,  that  they  were 
unhappy  ;  children  always  find  some  means  of 
having  a  good  time,  even  if  fathers  and  mothers 
are  stern  and  sober  people ;  and  the  Puritan 
fathers  and  mothers  loved  their  children  just  as 


3IO         THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND. 

much  as  the  Dutch  fathers  and  mothers  in  New- 
York  loved  theirs,  only  they  showed  their  love 
in  a  different  way,  that  is  all.  And,  after  all,  these 
little  log  school-houses  were  not  such  bad  places 
— they  were  always  sure  to  be  near  the  woods, 
where  were  great  shady  trees,  and  if  the  chil- 
dren did  not  sing  pretty  songs  in  school  as  you 
do,  they  could  at  least  hear  the  birds  singing  all 
day  long  ;  if  they  had  not  bright  pictures  on  the 
walls  of  the  school-room,  they  had  sweet,  dainty 
wild  flowers  just  outside,  and  the  wind  and  trees 
and  blossoms  whispered  their  secrets  to  them ; 
and  that  is  one  reason  perhaps  why  they  grew 
up  so  good  and  true  and  brave.  Thanksgiving 
Day  was  the  one  day  in  the  year  on  which  the 
Pilgrims  did  not  think  it  wrong  to  be  merry. 
Early  in  the  day  they  went  to  church,  which 
was  held  partly  as  a  service  of  thanks  for  the 
harvest,  and  partly  in  grateful  remembrance  for 
the  relief  that  came  to  them  from  England  when 
they  were  suffering  from  famine.  When  church 
was  over  the  fun  began.  All  the  members  of  a 
family  from  near  and  far  were  brought  together 
on  this  day,  and  what  gay  times  the  children 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  31I 

had  with  their  small  cousins  and  nieces  and 
nephews.  What  games  and  romps,  and  what 
interestinof  talk  around  the  fire  as  to  who  had 
gathered  the  most  nuts,  who  had  built  the 
strongest  and  swiftest  sled,  and  who  had  been 
bravest  when  the  Indians  came  prowling  around. 

For  of  all  the  troubles  which  the  settlers  of 
New  England  had  to  bear,  the  trouble  with  the 
Indians  was  the  worst. 

At  first  they  seemed  to  get  along  quite 
peaceably  with  them  ;  the  chiefs  of  some  of  the 
tribes  were  very  friendly  and  were  kind  to  the 
colonists  ;  but  as  time  went  on  the  Indians  grew 
more  and  more  unfriendly,  and  the  settlers  lived 
in  constant  fear  of  them. 

Sometimes  they  would  come  in  the  night  to 
a  house  where  a  mother  was  alone  with  her 
children,  and  kill  them  all  and  then  set  fire  to 
the  house.  Sometimes  a  man  would  be  working 
at  a  distance  from  his  home,  and  go  back  there 
only  to  find  that  the  Indians  had  been  there  be- 
fore him,  and  had  taken  his  wife  and  children 
away  with  them  to  make  slaves  of  them. 

The  little  children  would  go  to  bed  at  night 


312  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND. 

and  lie  awake  listening  for  the  Indian  warwhoop, 
which  they  dreaded  even  more  than  they  did 
the  howling  of  the  wolves.  Every  woman  in 
those  days  knew  how  to  use  a  gun,  and  many  a 
time  a  mother  had  to  defend  herself  and  chil- 
dren from  some  painted  Indians  who  would 
come  up  to  the  house  and  ask  to  be  taken  in. 

About  forty  years  after  Boston  was  settled, 
these  difficulties  with  the  Indians  brought  about 
a  war  which  extended  over  all  that  country. 
The  most  powerful  of  the  Indians  at  that  time 
was  King  Philip,  chief  of  the  Wamponoags. 
This  tribe  had  always  been  friendly  to  the 
whites,  Philip's  father,  Massasoit,  having  formed 
a  treaty  with  the  Puritans  soon  after  their  settle- 
ment in  New  England. 

King  Philip  was  a  very  brave  and  good  man, 
and  for  a  time  after  his  father's  death  he  re- 
mained friendly  to  the  whites  ;  but  he  saw  that, 
no  matter  how  friendly  the  whites  seemed,  they 
really  were  trying  to  get  all  the  land  from  the 
Indians  that  they  could,  and  he  thought  if  he 
could  drive  the  English  away  from  his  country 
it  would  be  much  better  for  his  own  people. 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  313 

So  he  sent  messengers  to  all  the  tribes  from 
Maine  to  Connecticut,  asking  the  chiefs  to  join 
with  him  and  drive  the  whites  away.  All  the 
chiefs  promised  to  do  this,  and  soon  there  was 
a  terrible  war  all  over  New  England. 

The  Indians  did  not  like  to  fight  the  whites 
in  open  field,  but  they  used  to  come  at  night, 
creeping  through  the  forest  in  the  shadow  of 
the  trees,  steal  down  the  quiet  little  village 
street,  and  then,  with  dreadful  shrieks  and  war- 
whoops,  begin  their  horrible  work.  Sometimes 
they  would  not  go  away  until  everybody  in  the 
village  had  been  killed,  and  the  houses  all 
burned. 

Sometimes  they  would  go  to  lonely  houses 
where  the  inmates  were  all  quietly  sleeping,  and 
forming  themselves  into  a  ring,  would  dance 
around  the  house  yelling  and  waving  their 
torches,  and  the  poor  people  would  be  awakened 
by  this  noise  only  to  know  that  death  awaited 
them. 

This  war  lasted  nearly  two  years,  and  in  that 

time    many  villages   were    burned,   and    many 

people  killed ;  but  finally  King  Philip  was  killed, 
14 


314  THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND. 

and  then  the  Indians  lost  heart,  and  in  a  short 
time  there  was  peace  again. 

For  some  years  after  this  the  colonists  had 
no  trouble  with  the  Indians,  but  after  a  time 
war  broke  out  again.  This  time  the  Indians 
were  stronger  and  better  armed,  and  besides 
they  were  helped  by  the  French. 

For  a  long  time  the  English  and  French  had 
each  been  trying  to  gain  possession  of  North 
America.  The  English  said  they  had  the  best 
right  to  it,  and  the  French  said  that  they  had 
the  best  right ;  and  so  it  went  on,  until  the 
French  and  Indians  agreed  that  they  would  join 
together  and  fight  against  the  English.  The 
Indians  liked  the  French  much  better  than  they 
did  the  English,  as  they  had  always  treated 
them  better. 

Some  of  the  French  had  married  Indian 
wives,  and  they  were  looked  upon  by  the  In- 
dians as  brothers.  To  this  day  in  Canada  you 
can  see  little  dark-eyed  boys  and  girls,  who  call 
themselves  French,  but  whose  ancestors  were 
Indian  and  French. 

You  will  learn  later  that  this  struggle  be- 


THE   SETTLEMENT   OF   NEW   ENGLAND,  315 

tween  the  French  and  Eno^Hsh  lasted  for  more 
than  half  a  century  after  the  time  of  which  I 
have  been  tellinq;  and  ended  in  a  orreat  war  be- 
tween  the  nations,  that  extended  in  America 
all  over  the  country  that  was  then  settled. 
But  at  last  the  English  gained  the  day  and  the 
French  gave  up  all  the  countr}^  that  they  had 
owned  in  America  east  of  the  Mississippi  to  the 
Enoflish,  and  that  is  how  this  country  came  to 
be  under  English  rule. 

After  the  French  and  Indian  wars  were 
over  the  colonists  had  very  little  trouble  with 
the  Indians,  and  in  a  few  years  there  was  peace 
and  quiet  all  over  New  England. 


CHAPTER   XXII. 

LA    SALLE. 

Many  stories  had  been  brought  by  the  In- 
dians to  the  French  settlers  in  Canada,  of  the 
great  country  that  lay  west  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
and  the  lakes;  and  now  and  then  an  adventurous 
trapper  had  visited  the  shores  of  Lake  Michi- 
gan, and  had  heard  these  stories  repeated  by 
the  tribes  living  there  ;  and  then  French  priests 
found  their  way  thither,  and  by  and  by  it  came 
to  be  believed  that  the  country  in  the  west  was 
as  well  worth  exploring  as  the  shores  of  the 
Atlantic  and  St.  Lawrence ;  and  travellers  began 
to  visit  the  new  territory  and  to  trade  more  ex- 
tensively with  its  natives,  and  to  listen  with  be- 
lieving ears  to  their  tales  of  a  great  river  that 
flowed  from  the  north  away  and  away,  hundreds 
of  miles,  to  the  sea. 

At  that  time  France  was  very  desirous  of 
discovering  a  passage  from  the  St.  Lawrence 


LA   SALLE.  317 

to  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  when  this  new 
river  began  to  be  so  much  talked  about,  it 
was  wondered  whether  it  might  not  flow  into 
the  Pacific.  But  some  people  thought  different- 
ly ;  they  said  that  they  had  no  doubt  the  great 
river  flowed  directly  south  and  emptied  into  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico  ;  and,  after  a  great  deal  of  talk,  it 
was  decided  to  send  an  expedition  from  Canada 
to  find  this  great  river,  and  to  see  where  it  rose 
and  into  what  it  flowed.  The  principal  men  in 
the  party  were  Louis  Joliet,  who  had  been  sent 
from  France  to  discover  the  passage  to  the  Pa- 
cific, and  Father  Marquette,  a  French  priest, 
whose  long  residence  among  the  Indians,  and 
the  love  and  respect  with  which  he  had  in- 
spired them,  made  him  a  very  suitable  com- 
panion for  Joliet. 

They  left  Canada  by  the  way  of  the  St. 
Lawrence,  and,  passing  through  the  Great 
Lakes,  entered  Lake  Michigan,  and  sailed 
through  its  waters  in  Green  Bay,  At  the  head 
of  this  bay  they  came  to  the  last  French 
station  near  Canada.  Hereafter  their  journey 
would  be  entirely  among  tribes  of  strange  In- 


3l8  LA   SALLE. 

dians.  But  at  the  little  settlement  on  Green 
Bay  they  saw  a  cross  that  had  been  erected  by 
some  French  priest,  and  which  the  natives  had 
adorned  with  flowers ;  and,  encouraged  by  the 
thouorht  that  even  on  the  farthest  limit  of  French 
territory  they  were  leaving  friends,  they  started 
bravely  for  the  undiscovered  country,  taking 
with  them  two  Indian  lads  to  show  them  the 
way  to  the  Wisconsin  River.  Their  canoes 
sailed  up  the  beautiful  waters  of  the  Fox,  whose 
fresh  green  banks  and  bordering  trees  gave 
promise  of  leading  into  a  fair  land  beyond,  and 
in  a  short  time  they  had  reached  its  head,  and 
pushed  out  into  the  narrow  channel,  almost 
choked  with  wild  rice,  that  led  to  the  Wisconsin. 
The  euides  left  them  as  soon  as  their  canoes 
floated  into  the  current  of  the  larger  river,  and 
then  their  voyage  began  in  earnest. 

They  drifted  down  the  Wisconsin  for  a  week, 
examining  the  country  carefully  on  both  sides, 
and  always  looking  out  for  the  great  river  they 
had  come  to  find  ;  and  at  the  end  of  this  time 
they  saw,  to  their  great  joy,  the  shining  waters 
of  the  Mississippi  spreading  out  before  them. 


LA   SALLE.  319 

And  now  they  were  obliged  to  go  more  care- 
fully for  fear  of  hostile  Indians  :  they  no  longer 
spent  their  nights  on  the  banks  of  the  river, 
sleeping  comfortably  around  a  blazing  camp- 
fire,  but  anchored  their  canoes  out  from  shore, 
and  stationed  a  sentinel  to  warn  them  of  any 
danger  that  might  come  while  they  slept.  Day 
after  day  they  scanned  the  river-banks  for  sight 
of  lurking  foes,  and  night  after  night  they  rolled 
themselves  in  their  blankets  and  went  to  sleep, 
expecting  to  be  awakened  by  the  war-whoop  of 
the  Indians  ;  but,  search  as  they  might,  they 
could  find  no  trace  of  human  beino-s  alone  the 
river,  and  eight  days  passed  before  they  saw  a 
sign  of  friend  or  foe.  On  the  ninth  day  they 
saw  a  well-worn  path  leading  up  from  the  river 
into  the  forest  beyond.  Joliet  and  Marquette 
sprang  from  their  canoes  and  started  up  the 
path,  while  the  rest  of  the  party  remained  on 
the  river  to  guard  against  surprise. 

A  short  walk  brought  the  leaders  to  the  In- 
dian village,  which  they  were  glad  to  find  occu- 
pied by  the  friendly  tribe  of  the  Illinois.  The 
chief  welcomed  them  with  uplifted  hands,  in  to- 


320  LA   SALLE. 

ken  of  friendly  greeting,  while  his  warriors  gath- 
ered around  him  and  waved  the  pipe  of  peace. 
And  hardly  had  the  Frenchmen  responded  to 
these  greetings,  when  there  came  an  invitation 
from  the  head  chief  of  the  whole  tribe  for  the 
strangers  to  come  to  his  village.  They  found 
him  standing  in  front  of  his  wigwam,  with  his  cal- 
umet, or  pipe  of  peace,  raised  toward  the  sun. 
He  saluted  them  with  a  kiss,  and  invited  them 
into  his  dwelling,  where  a  banquet  had  been 
prepared.  After  partaking  of  this,  the  French- 
men were  escorted  through  the  village  by  the 
entire  population,  who  accompanied  them  to 
their  canoes  and  stood  on  the  banks  while 
they  embarked.  Then,  as  they  pushed  out 
from  shore,  they  waved  them  pleasant  farewells, 
and  the  visitors  went  away  delighted  with  their 
kind  welcome.  The  chief  had  given  Marquette 
his  calumet,  which  was  carefully  preserved,  as 
he  knew  it  would  be  of  value  in  dealing  with 
other  tribes. 

And  then  they  went  on  down  the  river, 
past  the  curious  Painted  Rocks  and  the 
mighty  forests  and  rolling  prairies,  and  saw  one 


LA   SALLE.  321 

day  another  large  river  flowing  from  the  west 
— a  rushing,  mighty  river,  with  turbid,  yellow 
waves  that  would  not  mix  with  the  clear  waters 
of  the  Mississippi ;  Marquette  thought  that  per- 
haps this  new  stream  might  lead  him  to  the 
western  ocean,  if  he  would  trust  his  frail  canoe 
to  its  guidance,  and  the  Indians  whom  he  found 
there  said  that  it  was  quite  true  that  the  yellow 
river  would  take  him  into  the  distant  prairies, 
which  he  could  easily  cross,  carrying  his  canoe 
on  his  shoulders,  and  that  a  short  journey  would 
brinof  him  to  another  little  stream  which  led  into 
a  small  lake,  from  which  started  a  deep  river 
that  flowed  westward  into  the  sea. 

But,  although  this  sounded  like  very  pleasant 
travelling,  Marquette  could  not  leave  his  com- 
panions just  then,  and  they  continued  their  voy- 
age down  the  Mississippi,  passing  the  Ohio  and 
Arkansas ;  at  which  latter  point,  discouraged  by 
the  reports  of  the  hostile  tribes  who  lived  farther 
down,  and  afraid  of  falling  into  the  hands  of  the 
Spaniards  if  they  reached  the  Gulf,  they  turned 
back  and  began  a  leisurely  ascent  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi. 

14* 


322  LA   SALLE. 

They  turned  into  the  IlHnois  when  they 
reached  that  river,  and  journeyed  up  its  winding 
course,  delighted  with  its  fertile  basin,  rich  with 
fine  forests,  cattle,  deer,  goats,  and  beaver,  and 
beautiful  with  clear  streams  and  lovely  lakes,  on 
which  floated  great  numbers  of  swans.  When 
they  reached  the  head  of  the  river,  an  Indian 
chief  guided  them  through  the  forests  to  Green 
Bay,  which  they  reached  in  September,  well 
satisfied  with  their  journey,  and  convinced  that 
the  Mississippi  led  to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

Joliet  no  sooner  told  the  story  of  his  expedi- 
tion than  a  gentleman  of  Normandy  living  in 
Canada  resolved  to  undertake  a  journey  to  the 
mouth  of  the  Mississippi,  and  to  the  Pacific. 
This  man  was  Robert  Cavalier  de  la  Salle,  and 
in  August,  1679,  he  left  Canada  equipped  for  a 
voyage  down  the  Mississippi;  but,  being  de- 
tained by  the  loss  of  his  vessel  and  an  attack 
of  the  Iroquois  upon  the  Illinois,  who  were  the 
friends  of  the  French,  it  was  two  years  after 
that  date,  1681,  before  he  found  himself  actually 
on  his  way. 

They    left    by    the    way    of    the    Chicago 


LA    SALLE.  323 

River,  which  they  travelled  down  in  sledges, 
the  river  being  frozen  over,  and  even  when  they 
reached  the  Mississippi  they  were  detained  some 
days  by  the  ice ;  but  at  last  they  were  able  to 
begin  the  descent,  and,  like  the  former  expedi- 
tion, passed  many  days  before  they  came  to  an 
Indian  village  that  was  inhabited. 

The  first  notice  they  had  of  their  approach  to 
a  settlement  came  from  the  drums  and  war-cries 
of  the  people  who  had  assembled  on  the  bank. 
La  Salle  immediately  landed  on  the  other  side 
of  the  river ;  and,  setting  his  men  to  work,  they 
soon  had  a  fort  built,  and  were  prepared  to 
defend  themselves.  The  Indians,  seeing  this, 
changed  their  tactics,  and  sent  some  messengers 
across  the  river  in  a  canoe.  La  Salle  went 
down  to  the  shore  carrying  the  calumet,  which 
was  received  by  the  savages  with  respect,  and 
friendly  feeling  was  at   once   established. 

The  Frenchmen  were  very  glad  of  this,  as 
during  the  three  days  they  spent  there  they 
learned  many  things  about  the  Indians  farther 
down  the  river,  and  were  also  well  supplied  with 
food  for  their  journey ;   for  this  village  was  sit- 


324  LA   SALLE. 

uated  in  the  midst  of  orchards  and  fields,  and 
the  people  were  very  intelligent  and  courteous, 
having  pleasant  manners,  and  being  liberal  and 
hospitable.  La  Salle  planted  a  cross  bearing  the 
arms  of  France,  and  parted  from  his  new  friends 
with  many  expressions  of  gratitude.  The  Indians 
sent  with  him  some  interpreters,  who  introduced 
him  to  a  friendly  tribe  some  distance  farther 
down,  and  La  Salle  found  these  Indians  also  very 
intelligent  and  hospitable.  He  describes  their 
houses  as  being  built  of  mud  and  straw,  with 
cane  roofs,  and  furnished  with  bedsteads,  tables, 
etc.  They  also  had  temples  where  their  chiefs 
were  buried,  and  wore  white  clothing  spun  from 
the  bark  of  a  tree.  These  were  very  different 
habits  from  those  that  La  Salle  had  seen  among 
the  Indians  in  the  north,  and  he  concluded  that 
he  must  be  nearing  the  end  of  his  journey. 

This  proved  to  be  true,  for  two  weeks  after 
he  found  the  river  dividing  into  three  branches ; 
he  took  one  branch  and  two  of  his  men  the 
others,  and  in  a  short  time  they  found  that  the 
water  was  salt,  and  knew  that  they  had  reached 
the  mouth  of  the  river ;  a  little  farther  on  they 


LA   SALLE.  325 

saw  the  sea,  and  found  that  they  had  reached  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico  by  the  way  of  the  Mississippi. 

On  April  9,  1682,  a  cross  was  raised,  upon 
which  were  inscribed  the  arms  of  France ;  then, 
after  a  religious  ceremony,  La  Salle  took  pos- 
session of  the  Mississippi  and  all  its  branches, 
together  with  all  the  lands  bordering  them,  in 
the  name  of  the  king  of  France.  A  few  days 
after  he  turned  his  face  homeward  ;  but,  being 
detained  by  sickness,  did  not  reach  Quebec  un- 
til the  next  year.  However,  he  had  sent  the 
accounts  of  his  voyage  on  before  him,  and  these 
had  been  forwarded  to  France ;  and,  after  some 
delay,  a  new  expedition  left  France,  whither  La 
Salle  had  gone ;  the  object  of  this  expedition  was 
to  found  a  colony  at  the  mouth  of  the  Missis- 
sippi. 

All  might  have  gone  well,  had  it  not  been 
for  the  jealousy  of  Beaujeu,  the  captain  of  the 
fleet,  who  refused  to  follow  La  Salle's  advice 
about  landing.  As  they  coasted  along  the  Gulf, 
from  their  ignorance  of  the  coast,  they  passed 
the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi,  and  went  farther 
westward  than  they  had  meant  to.     La  Salle 


326  LA   SALLE. 

wished  to  turn  back  and  search  for  the  mouth 
of  the  river,  but  Beaujeu  refused  to  do  this,  and 
insisted  upon  entering-  Matagorda  Bay  in  Texas. 
Here  La  Salle  was  obliged  to  have  his  stores 
landed;  and,  as  soon  as  this  was  done,  Beaujeu 
sailed  back  to  France  again,  caring  little  what 
became  of  his  fellow-voyagers. 

But  La  Salle  was  not  to  be  disheartened  by 
such  a  mishap  as  this.  He  cheered  the  hearts 
of  his  men  by  his  hopeful  words,  and  they  set 
about  establishing  the  colony  at  once.  They 
found  the  climate  agreeable,  and  the  natives 
friendly  and  willing  to  trade  ;  they  belonged  to 
the  same  race  as  those  on  the  Mississippi,  and, 
like  them,  lived  in  large  villages,  and  had  com- 
fortably furnished  houses.  La  Salle  had  no 
fear  in  leaving  his  colony  among  these  well-dis- 
posed natives;  and,  as  soon  as  it  was  possible, 
he  left  his  company  and  went  in  search  of  the 
Mississippi,  which  he  had  hopes  of  finding  with- 
out difficulty. 

But  the  river  was  farther  off  than  he  knew, 
and  he  was  an  utter  stranger  to  the  country; 
and,  although  he  turned  again  and  again,  two 


LA   SALLE.  327 

years  passed  and  he  had  not  yet  seen  its  shining 
waters.  At  last  he  determined  to  take  half  the 
colony  and  find  his  way  to  Canada,  where  he 
might  obtain  supplies,  as  they  had  received 
nothing  from  France  since  their  arrival,  owing 
to  the  bad  report  of  La  Salle  that  Beaujeu  had 
taken  back, 

Canada  was  two  thousand  miles  away,  but 
there  were  friends  there,  and  the  brave  leader 
could  not  bear  to  see  his  countrymen  suffering 
when  it  might  be  possible  to  bring  them  help. 
The  little  party  of  twenty  was  not  very  well 
equipped  for  a  long  journey  through  a  strange 
country.  They  had  to  make  clothing  of  the 
sails  of  one  of  the  vessels  ;  their  shoes  were  of 
buffalo-hide  and  deer-skin  ;  they  had  to  make 
boats  of  skin  to  cross  the  swollen  rivers,  and 
they  depended  for  food  upon  the  game  they 
could  find.  And  so  their  progress  was  very 
slow,  and  it  took  them  two  months  to  reach 
Trinity  River. 

But  hardship  was  not  the  only  thing  that  La 
Salle  had  to  bear  on  this  wearying  march. 
Part  of  the  men  became  dissatisfied  with  him, 


328  LA   SALLE. 

and  rebelled  against  his  authority.  They  killed 
his  nephew  and  a  faithful  Indian  servant  while 
they  were  absent  from  the  camp  on  a  hunting- 
expedition,  and  when  La  Salle  appeared  and 
asked  where  his  nephew  was,  one  of  the  mur- 
derers raised  his  gun  and  shot  their  leader 
dead. 

La  Salle  was  one  of  the  bravest  and  noblest 
of  the  French  explorers.  If  he  had  been  al- 
lowed to  carry  out  his  plans,  France  would  have 
been  stronger  and  richer  in  America  than  it  was 
ever  her  fortune  to  become.  It  was  ten  years 
after  his  death  before  any  other  attempt  was 
made  to  settle  the  Mississippi  Valley. 

To  La  Salle  belongs  the  honor  of  being  the 
first  European  to  sail  from  the  upper  part  of  the 
Mississippi  down  to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and 
it  was  he  who  started  that  spirit  of  advent- 
ure which  led  to  so  many  Frenchmen  devoting 
their  lives  to  the  exploration  of  the  great  river 
and  its  many  branches,  thus  making  the  western 
part  of  the  country  familiar  to  the  Europeans, 
and  laying  the  foundations  of  the  French  power 
in  the  valley  of  the  Mississippi ;  and  laying,  at 


LA   SALLE.  329 

the  same  time,  the  foundations  of  that  firm  and 
lasting  friendship  with  the  Indians  which  was 
the  strongest  safeguard  of  the  French  in  Amer- 
ica ;  for  all  the  tribes  along  the  great  river  and 
on  the  shores  of  the  northern  lakes  grew  to  love 
and  reverence  the  French  name. 

They  looked  upon  them  as  brothers,  for 
they  came  to  their  humble  villages  and  led 
the  same  simple  lives  that  they  themselves 
led.  They  hunted  and  fished  with  them,  wore 
the  same  kind  of  clothing,  and  slept  content- 
edly in  their  rude  wigwams.  They  talked 
with  them  in  their  own  language,  and  called 
their  lakes  and  streams  by  their  poetical  In- 
dian names.  They  even  married  the  daugh- 
ters of  their  race,  and  the  kindly  French 
priests  knew  no  difference  between  white  man 
and  red  man,  but  ministered  to  all  alike. 
The  Indians  freely  entered  the  little  chapels 
that  were  scattered  up  and  down  along  the 
river,  and  lovingly  hung  the  cross  with  flow- 
ers ;  and  little  Indian  children  were  brought 
there  to  be  baptized,  just  as  the  little  French 
children  were,  and  all  was  peace  and  harmony. 


330  LA   SALLE. 

And  the  calumet  never  passed  from  chief  to 
chief  but  as  a  sign  of  peace,  and  of  the  abiding 
friendship  which  began  when  Marquette  was 
greeted  by  the  IlHnois  chief  with  hands  raised 
toward  heaven,  as  if  calHng  down  the  blessing 
of  the  Great  Spirit  upon  the  meeting. 


THE   DKIVINO   OUT  OF  THE    ACADIANS. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

THE     STORY     OF     ACADIA. 

Once  upon  a  time,  in  a  country  in  the  north 
dwelt  a  very  happy  race  of  people.  The  land 
did  not  lie  so  far  north  but  that  it  had  bright 
springs  and  sunny  summers,  and  all  through 
the  valleys  lay  pretty  little  villages  surrounded 
with  orchards  and  fields  and  meadows.  And 
little  dark-eyed  children  wandered  through  the 
orchards  in  the  morning  sunshine,  and  broke 
off  boughs  of  pink-tinted  blossoms  whereon  the 
dew  lay  not  yet  dried,  and  through  green- 
carpeted  fields,  where  the  young  grain  waved, 
and  through  the  high  meadow-grass,  gathering 
daisies  and  sweet,  wild  forget-me-nots.  All 
day  long  the  place  was  bright  and  happy  with 
children's  faces  and  children's  voices. 

The  tiny  streams  that  crept  down  from  the 
mountains  loved  the  little  faces  that  leaned  over 
them,   and   the  little  hands  that  threw   dainty 


332  THE   STORY   OF   ACADIA. 

flowers  on  their  merry,  rippling  waves ;  even 
the  birds  that  flew  down  into  shady,  silent  cor- 
ners to  drink  showed  no  fear  if,  perchance,  they 
found  a  little  child  there  before  them.  The 
wind  that  sung  through  the  pines  at  the  foot 
of  the  mountain  sung  only  words  of  peace,  and 
the  whole  place  seemed  only  to  know  blue 
skies,  sweet  fragrant  breezes,  and  floods  of 
golden  sunshine. 

And  when  the  bright,  happy  days  came  to  an 
end,  then  the  children  would  gather  on  the  door- 
steps of  the  quaint  little  houses,  and,  while  they 
watched  the  moon  rise  large  and  silvery  over 
the  spire  of  the  church,  they  would  listen  to  the 
stories  told  by  their  fathers  and  mothers  of  the 
land  beyond  the  great  sea,  which  their  ancestors 
had  sailed  away  from  forever  when  they  came 
to  find  a  new  home  in  this  northern  land. 

The  children  dearly  loved  to  hear  the  stories 
of  that  far-away  France  which  their  great-grand- 
fathers and  great-grandmothers  but  dimly  re- 
membered ;  for,  although  their  own  homes  were 
in  America,  they  always  thought  of  themselves 
as  French.     They  knew  nothing  of  England  -or 


THE   STORY   OF   ACADIA.  333 

English  customs,  and  English  children  would 
have  seemed  strangers  to  them,  while  the  little 
Indian  boys  and  girls  with  whom  they  played 
seemed  dear  and  familiar  friends ;  for  in  this 
northern  land,  which  the  French  people  called 
Acadia  because  it  was  such  a  lovely  and  beau- 
tiful place,  the  Indians  had  always  been  well 
treated  by  the  whites,  and  they  were  very  fond 
of  them  in  return. 

The  Indian  children  played  in  the  streets 
with  the  French  children,  and  wandered  with 
them  through  the  meadows  and  forests.  The 
Indian  fathers  and  mothers  went  to  the  village 
churches,  and  learned  of  the  good  priests  how  to 
lead  useful  and  happy  lives ;  and  they  brought 
their  children  to  be  baptized  and  confirmed,  and 
wanted  them  to  grow  up  knowing  how  to  live 
the  same  kind  of  lives  that  their  little  French 
neighbors  would  live  when  they  grew  up. 

And  so  for  many  years  these  people  lived  in 
this  pleasant  country,  and  were  contented  and 
happy.  But  by  and  by  trouble  came.  Acadia 
was  taken  away  from  the  French  and  given  to 
the  English,  who  sent  their  soldiers  there.    The 


334  THE   STORY   OF   ACADIA. 

Acadians  were  very  sorry  for  this ;  they  did  not 
want  to  belong  to  England,  for  they  were 
French  and  loved  France.  At  that  time  both 
England  and  France  had  armies  in  America, 
and  both  were  trying  to  get  as  much  land  as 
they  could ;  and,  as  the  English  were  the  more 
successful  in  this  war,  they  got  possession  of 
Acadia  and  changed  its  name  to  Nova  Scotia. 

Then  there  was  an  English  governor  sent 
there  to  rule  the  country;  and,  although  the 
Acadians  loved  the  French,  they  promised  not 
to  help  them,  but  said  they  would  give  help 
neither  to  the  English  nor  the  French. 

But  the  English  were  not  satisfied  with  this. 
They  were  all  the  time  afraid  that  the  Acadians 
would  help  the  French.  So  one  day  the  Eng- 
lish commander  sent  a  fleet  of  vessels  to  Acadia, 
and  all  the  Acadians  were  told  to  gather  in  the 
churches  and  listen  to  the  reading  of  some  pa- 
pers that  had  been  sent  there  by  him  ;  the  Aca- 
dians came,  but  no  sooner  were  they  all  gath- 
ered together  than  the  English  soldiers  drove 
them  all  down  to  the  harbor,  where  the  ships 
lay.     Then  they  were  driven  on  the   ships  in 


THE   STORY   OF  ACADIA.  335 

crowds,  and  neighbors  and  friends  and  families 
were  all  separated ;  perhaps  a  father  in  one 
ship,  a  mother  in  another,  and  their  children  in 
a  third.  There  was  no  time  to  say  good-by  to 
their  pretty  little  homes — no  time  to  say  good- 
by  to  dear  friends. 

As  soon  as  they  had  been  crowded  on  the 
ships  the  soldiers  set  fire  to  their  homes,  and 
soon  the  peaceful  villages  of  Acadia  were  ut- 
terly destroyed.  Nothing  remained  of  the  once 
lovely  place  but  heaps  of  ashes,  burned  fields, 
and  desolate  tracts  of  country. 

The  ships  sailed  away  to  different  ports,  and 
the  Acadians  were  scattered  all  over  the  coun- 
try. Friends  who  had  been  separated  often 
never  met  again,  and  the  little  boys  and  girls 
who  had  played  so  happily  in  the  green  fields 
of  Acadia  were  now  to  go  sorrowing  all  their 
lives  for  the  dear  playmates  they  would  never 
see  again. 

It  was  a  very  cruel  thing  to  do.  It  was  an 
act  unworthy  the  heart  of  an  English  soldier, 
who  could  not  but  remember  his  own  home  in 
fair,  green  England.     It  was  something  that  the 


336  THE   STORY   OF   ACADIA. 


Enoflish  oucrht  to  have  been  ashamed  to  do,  for 
the  Acadians  were  a  peaceful  people  and  not 
likely  to  make  them  any  trouble. 

But  sometimes,  in  war,  men  forget  that  they 
are  men,  and  act  cruelly  and  wrongly  ;  and  that 
is  what  the  English  did  when  they  drove  the 
Acadians  from  their  homes  to  wander  homeless 
and  poor  and  sad  all  over  the  country. 

If  you  should  go  to  Nova  Scotia  to-day  you 
would  not  find  the  Acadia  of  that  far-off  time. 
The  country  is  English  now,  and  the  only  mem- 
ories of  Acadia  are  those  that  linger  in  the 
lonely  mountain  echoes,  in  the  sad  sighing  of 
the  pines,  in  the  wild  flowers  of  the  meadow, 
which  make  you  think  of  the  children  that  once 
played  there  ;  in  the  soft  marmur  of  the  streams, 
which  seem  to  sing,  as  you  listen,  long-forgotten 
tunes  ;  and  in  the  deep  roar  of  the  sea,  on  whose 
waves  the  Acadians  were  borne  away  forever 
from  that  beautiful,  happy  land  which  became 
but  a  dream  of  the  past. 


THE  STORY  OF  PONTIAC'S  PLOT. 


CHAPTER   XXIV. 

THE    STORY    OF    PONTIAC. 

There  was  once  a  little  Indian  boy  whose 
home  was  on  the  shores  of  a  beautiful  lake  in 
the  midst  of  a  deep  forest.  He  was  the  son  of 
a  powerful  chief,  and  from  his  earliest  years 
looked  forward  to  the  time  when  he  too  should 
be  a  great  warrior,  like  his  father,  and  lead  his 
tribe  in  successful  battle  against  his  enemies. 
For  although  his  quiet  home  was  far  away 
from  great  cities,  and  most  of  the  neighbor- 
ing tribes  were  friendly,  yet  some  of  the  noise 
and  stir  and  trouble  of  the  great  outside  world 
had  crept  even  to  that  distant  woodland  home ; 
and  the  children  there  early  learned  that  they 
must  grow  up  brave  and  daring  men,  and  ready 
to  defend  their  homes  if  need  be.  This  boy 
Pontiac  was  always  a  leader  among  his  com- 
panions  in  all  games  of  daring  and  skill.      He 

it    was    who    led    them    into    the    forests    in 
15 


THE  STORY  OF  PONTIAC'S  PLOT. 


CHAPTER   XXIV. 

THE    STORY    OF    PONTIAC. 

There  was  once  a  little  Indian  boy  whose 
home  was  on  the  shores  of  a  beautiful  lake  in 
the  midst  of  a  deep  forest.  He  was  the  son  of 
a  powerful  chief,  and  from  his  earliest  years 
looked  forward  to  the  time  when  he  too  should 
be  a  great  warrior,  like  his  father,  and  lead  his 
tribe  in  successful  battle  against  his  enemies. 
For  although  his  quiet  home  was  far  away 
from  great  cities,  and  most  of  the  neighbor- 
ing tribes  were  friendly,  yet  some  of  the  noise 
and  stir  and  trouble  of  the  great  outside  world 
had  crept  even  to  that  distant  woodland  home ; 
and  the  children  there  early  learned  that  they 
must  grow  up  brave  and  daring  men,  and  ready 
to  defend  their  homes  if  need  be.  This  boy 
Pontiac  was  always  a  leader  among  his  com- 
panions  in  all  games  of  daring  and  skill.      He 

it    was    who    led    them    into    the    forests    in 
15 


338  THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC. 

their  hunt  after  wild,  and  ferocious  animals, 
or  by  the  courses  of  distant  streams  in  search 
of  rare  flowers  and  stones,  or  along  the  shores 
of  the  lakes,  where  the  startled  birds  made  vain 
efforts  to  fly  beyond  his  aim — for  Pontiac's  arrow 
was  always  swift  and  sure — and  who  carried 
home  at  night  the  largest  part  of  the  day's 
spoils,  whether  they  were  fishing  in  the  lake, 
or  hunting  in  the  forest,  or  searching  for  the 
glittering  minerals  that  were  scattered  over 
the  land. 

And  the  years  that  he  spent  in  childish 
sports  were  also  spent  in  learning  many 
useful  things,  and  by  the  time  he  was  a  well- 
grown  boy  he  knew  every  inch  of  the  forests 
for  miles  and  miles  around,  and  all  the  winding 
streams  that  came  down  from  the  hill-country, 
and  every  curve  and  bay  in  the  great  lakes 
that  lay  not  far  distant  from  his  home.  Al- 
though he  was  a  very  daring  and  active  boy, 
sometimes  he  was  very  thoughtful  too,  and 
he  would  often  leave  his  companions  and  hide 
away  in  the  branches  of  some  great  tree,  or 
in   some  sheltered  nook  by  the    lake,   and  sit 


THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC.  339 

alone  for  hours  thinkinpf.  At  such  times  he 
was  often  sad,  for  his  thoughts  were  of  his 
brave  people,  who  had  suffered  so  much  and 
been  so  cruelly  treated  by  the  English. 

Pontiac  had  hated  the  English  ever  since 
he  could  remember,  not  because  they  were  of 
a  different  race  and  strangers,  for  the  French 
were  of  a  different  race  and  strangers  too,  but 
because,  in  all  their  dealings  with  the  Indians, 
the  English  had  always  been  cruel,  treacherous, 
and  ready  to  take  advantage,  while  the  French 
had  always  been  kind,  trustworthy,  and  ready 
to  be  the  red  man's  friend.  And  as  the  boy 
grew  into  manhood  the  hatred  still  continued, 
for  the  English  still  continued  to  steal  the  In- 
dians' land  and  oppress  them  by  unjust  laws ; 
and  when  his  father  died,  and  he  became  chief 
over  the  powerful  Ottawas,  he  resolved  to  do 
all  that  he  could  to  drive  the  English  from  his 
native  land,  so  that  the  Indians  and  kindly 
French  alone  should  live  there  peaceably  and 
happily. 

The  Ottawas  lived  in  the  region  lying  be- 
tween Lake  Erie  and  Lake  Michigan,  and  the 


340  THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC. 

neighboring  tribes,  the  Chippeways,  Wyandots, 
Senecas,  and  Pottawattomies,  were  also  friends 
to  the  French  and  foes  to  the  EngHsh,  and  ready 
to  carry  out  any  plan  that  the  great  chief  Pontiac 
might  propose. 

The  French,  who  hated  the  English  as  much 
as  the  Indians  did,  looked  on,  and  were  very 
glad  to  see  that  Pontiac  and  the  other  chiefs 
were  so  bitter  against  their  common  enemy; 
and  the  French  leaders  did  everything  in  their 
power  to  keep  the  English  and  Indians  at  war. 

At  that  time  there  was  constant  war  between 
England  and  France,  because  each  country 
thought  she  had  the  better  right  to  America, 
and  was  trying  to  drive  the  other  away. 

Already  the  Acadians  had  been  driven  from 
their  home  by  English  soldiers,  and  England 
had  conquered  all  the  Canadian  towns ;  and  un- 
less something  was  done  very  soon,  the  Indians 
and  French  would  have  no  chance  at  all,  for  the 
English  were  more  and  more  successful  all  the 
time.  So  Pontiac  thought  of  a  very  bold  plan. 
He  was  not  so  afraid  of  the  English  soldiers  as 
some  of  the  chiefs,  for  once,  when  leading  his 


THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC.  341 

brave  Ottawas  against  the  English  under  Gen- 
eral Braddock,  he  had  seen  them  run  before  the 
attack  of  his  men,  and  had  come  to  the  con- 
clusion that  they  were  no  braver  than  any 
other  soldiers.  The  more  he  thought  of  his 
plan  the  better  he  liked  it  ;  and  at  last  he  told 
it  to  the  French,  v^ho  approved  it  heartily, 
and  said  they  had  no  doubt  of  its  success. 
They  told  Pontiac  that  the  French  king  had 
been  asleep  for  a  while,  and  that  was  the  reason 
the  English  had  gained  so  many  victories  ;  but 
that  soon  he  would  awake,  and  then  he  would 
drive  the  English  away  from  the  land  of  his 
"  red  children." 

This  was  good  news  to  Pontiac,  who  dearly 
loved  France,  and  he  went  home  more  resolved 
than  ever  to  carry  out  his  plan,  which  was — 
that  on  a  certain  day  all  the  Indians  should  join 
together  and  attack  all  the  English  forts  at  once, 
and  so  drive  their  hated  enemy  from  the  country 
forever.  So  he  called  the  chief  men  of  his  tribe 
together,  and  they  all  agreed  that  this  would  be 
an  easy  thing  to  do  if  the  other  tribes  would 
join.     And   then   Pontiac    sent   messengers   to 


342  THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC. 

every  tribe  between  the  Alleghany  Mountains 
and  the  Mississippi ;  the  messengers  carried  a 
belt  of  red  beads  and  a  tomahawk  stained  red, 
which  meant  that  Pontiac  was  inviting  them  to 
begin  war.  In  every  village  the  messengers 
entered,  the  chief  took  the  belt  and  tomahawk 
and  held  them  up  before  his  people,  as  a  sign 
that  he  was  willing  to  fight,  and  would  help  Pon- 
tiac drive  away  the  English. 

Soon  afterward  all  the  great  chiefs  met  in 
council,  and  agreed  on  a  day  for  the  attack.  It 
was  to  be  May  7,  1763.  Each  chief  was  to  lead 
his  tribe  against  a  certain  fort,  and  the  English 
were  all  to  be  murdered  like  dogs.  But  it  hap- 
pened that  all  the  forts  were  not  attacked  on 
that  day  after  all. 

Pontiac  was  to  attack  Detroit,  the  strongest 
and  most  important  of  the  forts.  Before  the  ap- 
pointed day  he  went  to  the  fort  with  a  number 
of  his  men,  and  asked  the  commander  to  let 
them  come  in  and  give  an  Indian  dance.  The 
English  officer  and  his  men  were  very  willing  to 
do  this,  as  life  was  very  tedious  away  from  home 
and  friends,  and   they  were  glad  of  anything 


THE    STORY   OF   PONTIAC.  343 

that  would  amuse  them.  So  the  Indians  en- 
tered the  fort,  and  went  through  their  strange, 
outlandish  dance  ;  but  all  the  time  they  were 
looking  carefully  about  the  fort,  seeing  where  it 
was  strongest  and  where  weakest,  noticing  the 
number  of  guns,  and  finding  out  about  the  pro- 
visions in  case  they  should  not  be  able  to  take  it 
at  once  ;  and  as  soon  as  they  had  seen  all  they 
wanted  to  they  went  away,  and  the  English  did 
not  imamne  for  a  moment  the  real  reason  of 
their  coming.  The  next  thing  to  do  was  to  take 
the  fort,  and  Pontiac  thought  if  he  could  get  in- 
side of  the  walls  with  some  armed  men,  it  would 
be  a  very  easy  thing  to  surprise  the  English,  and 
thus  make  a  successful  attack.  So  he  planned 
that  he  and  his  warriors  should  all  go  to  the 
fort,  carrying  their  guns  hidden  away  under  their 
blankets,  and  that  they  would  ask  the  officer  to 
let  them  come  in  and  hold  a  council.  Of  course 
the  officer  would  agree  to  this,  seeing  that  they 
carried  no  weapons  ;  and  then,  as  soon  as  they 
were  inside  the  fort,  they  would,  at  a  certain 
signal,  kill  all  the  white  officers,  and  so  take  the 
soldiers  by  surprise. 


344  THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC. 

This  was  a  bold  plan ;  but  all  the  warriors 
agreed  to  it,  and  waited  impatiently  for  the  time 
to  come. 

But  amonof  the  Indians  was  a  beautiful 
maiden,  who  had  learned  to  love  and  trust  the 
English,  and  who  could  not  bear  to  think  of 
their  being  so  cruelly  murdered ;  and  she  re- 
solved to  save  them  if  she  could.  She  was 
used  to  eoinof  in  and  out  of  the  fort  as  she 
pleased,  for  she  was  a  favorite  with  the  officers, 
who  had  shown  her  many  kindnesses  ;  and  one 
day,  before  Pontiac  had  time  to  carry  out  his 
plan,  she  went  to  the  fort,  taking  with  her,  as 
an  excuse,  a  pair  of  moccasons  as  a  present  to 
Major  Gladvvyn,  the  chief  officer.  But,  when 
she  came  into  the  officer's  presence,  her  cour- 
age failed  her  ;  she  knew  what  her  own  fate 
would  be  if  her  words  were  not  heeded,  and 
Pontiac  should  succeed  after  all ;  and  so, 
.  she  quite  lost  heart,  and,  laying  the  moc- 
casons down  on  the  table,  talked  a  little 
while  with  the  major,  and  then  went  out  with- 
out giving  her  warning.  But  when  she  was 
again  outside,  her  troubled  face  attracted  the 


THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC.  345 

notice  of  the  sentinel,  who  immediately  sus- 
pected some  plot,  and  persuaded  her  to  go 
back  to  Major  Gladwyn.  And  then,  after  many 
promises  of  protection,  she  at  length  told  him 
of  Pontiac's  plan,  and  warned  him  to  be  pre- 
pared. Major  Gladwyn  immediately  began  to 
make  ready  for  Pontiac's  visit,  and  when  he 
appeared  the  next  day,  with  fifty  of  his  boldest 
warriors,  all  carrying  their  guns  under  their 
blankets,  he  found  the  English  soldiers  stand- 
ing in  ranks,  armed  and  prepared  for  battle. 

The  chief  saw  at  once  that  his  plan  had 
failed,  and,  as  the  English  did  not  intend  to 
fight  unless  the  Indians  began  the  battle,  Pon- 
tiac  and  his  men  were  allowed  to  leave  the  fort 
again  in  peace.  And  so  Detroit  was  saved  by 
a  tender-hearted  girl,  and  once  again,  as  hap- 
pened many  times  during  the  terrible  struggles 
between  the  Indians  and  whites,  the  Enelish 
had  to  thank  an  Indian  maiden  for  help  and 
warning  in  time  of  need. 

But  this  failure  only  made  Pontiac  and  the 
other  chiefs  more  furious  than  ever.  As  soon 
as  possible  the  other  forts  were  attacked.     The 

IS* 


346  THE   STORY    OF   PONTIAC. 

Wyandots  burned  Fort  Sandusky,  and  butch- 
ered the  soldiers ;  the  Chippeways  murdered 
nearly  all  the  inmates  of  Fort  Mackinaw ;  and 
by  a  clever  trick  Michilimackinac  was  also  ta'- 
ken.  The  capture  of  Michilimackinac  was  on  a 
holiday ;  the  Indians  had  approached  the  fort 
and  were  playing  ball  outside  ;  they  had  invited 
the  soldiers  out  to  see  the  game,  and  as  they 
stood  looking  on,  an  Indian  suddenly  threw 
the  ball  near  the  gate  of  the  fort.  This  was 
the  sign  agreed  upon.  The  Indians  all  made 
a  rush  for  the  ball,  and  as  they  passed  the 
squaws,  who  had  been  looking  on,  each  man 
snatched  his  hatchet,  which  had  been  hidden 
under  the  women's  blankets,  and  ran  into  the 
fort.  The  soldiers  were  not  prepared,  and  in 
the  surprise  and  confusion  most  of  them  were 
killed. 

And  so  the  Indians  went  on,  taking  fort  after 
fort,  until  there  remained  only  three  in  the  hands 
of  the  Enelish.  One  of  these  was  Detroit,  which 
Pontiac  had  surrounded  for  months  with  his  own 
and  other  tribes  ;  but  the  English  had  a  large 
store  of  provisions,  and  Pontiac,  seeing  no  hope 


THE   STORY   OF   PONTIAC.  347 

of  success  just  then,  went  away  with  his  men  to 
attack  places  less  strong. 

But  he  was  still  fiercely  determined  to  drive 
the  English  from  his  western  home,  and  for 
two  years  he  gave  them  no  peace — surprising 
them  here  and  there,  now  at  dead  of  night, 
and  then  in  broad  noonday,  until  the  terrible 
war-cry  of  the  Ottawas  became  a  fear  and  dread 
to  all  the  English  in  the  west;  but  finally,  worn 
out  and  discouraged  with  the  useless  struggle, 
one  by  one  his  warriors  left  him,  and  he  fled  to 
the  Illinois,  and  lived  with  that  tribe  until  his 
death. 

His  was  the  most  dreaded  name  in  the  west, 
and  for  years  after,  when  France  and  England 
were  no  longer  at  war,  and  the  Indians  were  for 
the  most  part  peaceful,  the  English  settlers  in 
the  lake  region  and  on  the  banks  of  the  Missis- 
sippi still  remembered,  with  shuddering  horror, 
the  name  of  Pontiac,  the  last  of  the  great  Indian 
chiefs. 


CHAPTER   XXV. 


THE    REVOLUTOIN. 


Although  America  had  been  settled  by  dif- 
ferent nations — one  place  by  the  English,  an- 
other by  the  Dutch,  another  by  the  French, 
another  by  the  Swedes,  and  so  on — it  came  to 
pass  at  last,  as  you  have  seen,  that  after  a  great 
deal  of  trouble  and  much  fighting,  England 
owned  the  greater  part  of  it,  and  that  the  English 
language  was  spoken  and  English  law  obeyed 
from  Maine  to  Florida.  In  fact,  America  was 
no  longer  looked  upon  as  a  country  by  itself,  but 
as  a  province  of  England.  And  the  people  called 
themselves  English,  and  were  very  proud  to  do 
so  too  ;  for  then,  as  now,  England  was  one  of 
the  greatest  countries  in  the  world. 

This  friendly  feeling  might  have  lasted  for 
many  years,  if  it  had  not  been  for  the  foolish  and 
wrono-  acts  of  the  Enelish  kingf  and  his  advisers. 

The   great  war  which   England   had   been 


THE   REVOLUTION.  349 

carrying  on,  a  part  of  which  was  the  fighting* 
against  the  French  and  Indians  in  America,  had 
cost  a  great  deal  of  money,  and  had  left  England 
very  much  in  debt,  and  the  king,  George  III., 
ordered  the  American  colonies  to  be  taxed  in 
order  to  help  pay  the  debt  off. 

The  Americans  were  quite  willing  to  pay  their 
share  ;  but  they  said  that  since  America  was  a 
part  of  the  English  possessions,  American  states- 
men should  be  sent  to  the  English  Parliament 
to  represent  the  colonies,  and  see  that  their  in- 
terests were  guarded;  just  as  from  all  the  differ- 
ent counties  of  Eno-land  men  were  sent  to  Par- 
liament  to  see  that  taxes  were  not  distributed 
unjustly  among  the  people  there. 

But  George  III.  utterly  refused  to  permit  the 
colonists  to  send  these  representatives ;  and  in- 
stead passed  some  very  unjust  laws,  and  laid  taxes 
on  many  articles  that  had  not  been  taxed  before. 

This  aroused  the  indienation  of  the  Ameri- 
cans,  who  refused  to  pay  the  taxes,  and  even 
attacked  the  English  officers  who  tried  to  collect 
them.  Meetings  were  held  all  over  the  country, 
and  everywhere  the  same   feeling  was  shown. 


3  so  THE   REVOLUTION. 

In  Boston,  rather  than  pay  the  tax  on  a  ship- 
load of  tea,  the  Bostonians,  disguised  as  Indians, 
went  on  board  the  ship  and  threw  the  tea  into 
the  harbor.  In  New  York  an  angry  mob  burned 
the  effigy  of  the  EngHsh  Governor,  and  in  every 
place  women  refused  to  buy  English  goods  and 
said  they  would  rather  wear  homespun  than  sub- 
mit to  such  injustice. 

This  conduct  only  angered  the  king  the 
more.  He  denied  the  right  of  America  to  re- 
sist his  laws,  and  passed  measures  more  irritat- 
ing still. 

The  Americans  began  to  wonder  if  he  would 
force  them  into  an  open  rebellion.  The  excite- 
ment grew  stronger  each  day,  and  the  king's 
authority  was  openly  questioned.  In  large 
meetings  the  chief  Americans  discussed  the 
vexed  question,  and  decided  that  they  had  been 
right  in  resisting  the  king,  and  would  continue 
to  resist  him  until  he  repealed  the  unjust  laws. 
Patrick  Henry,  a  great  orator  of  Virginia,  made 
an  address,  in  which  he  denounced  George  III. 
as  a  tyrant,  and  warned  him  against  further 
exciting  the  indignation  of  the  colonists.    The 


THE   REVOLUTION.  35  I 

king  replied  by  calling  the  Americans  traitors, 
and  sending  an  armed  force  to  frighten  the 
rebels  into  submission. 

Many  of  the  wisest  Englishmen  tried  to  per- 
suade King  George  to  acknowledge  the  rights 
of  the  Americans  in  this  matter ;  among  them 
William  Pitt,  Earl  of  Chatham,  who  in  an  ad- 
dress to  Parliament  declared  that  he  rejoiced 
that  America  had  resisted.  But  they  were  un- 
successful, and  things  grew  quickly  worse. 

The  presence  of  English  troops  in  America 
was  the  signal  for  more  determined  opposition. 
Companies  of  militia  were  formed  in  all  the 
towns  and  villages,  and  the  English  saw  that 
the  Americans  were  preparing  to  defend  them- 
selves. In  Boston,  where  the  anger  against 
the  British  soldiers  was  very  great,  and  where 
some  quarrels  with  them  had  already  happened, 
the  English  general  saw  these  preparations  on 
every  side.  Among  other  things,  he  heard  that 
the  people  had  collected  ammunition  and  provi- 
sions at  Concord,  a  village  some  distance  away, 
and  he  sent  a  party  of  soldiers  to  destroy  these 
stores.     As  this  party  passed  through  Lexing- 


352  THE   REVOLUTION. 

ton,  another  village,  on  the  way  to  Concord,  on 
the  morning  of  April  19,  1775,  they  found  a 
company  of  farmers  assembled  on  the  village 
green,  to  keep  them  from  going  further.  They 
fired  upon  these  men,  and  the  Americans  fired 
in  return,  though  they  were  obliged  to  give 
way.  Several  of  the  Americans  were  killed  and 
wounded,  and  this  was  the  first  blood  shed  in 
the  Revolution. 

Two  months  later,  on  June  17th,  as  English 
troops  were  preparing  to  leave  Boston,  they 
found  that  breastworks  had  been  made  on 
Bunker  Hill,  behind  which  stood  the  Americans 
ready  to  resist  them.  The  battle  which  fol- 
lowed showed  the  English  that  the  Americans 
were  much  better  soldiers  than  they  had  any 
idea  of.  They  fought  with  the  utmost  skill 
and  courage,  and  only  withdrew  when  their 
powder  and  shot  were  quite  exhausted;  and 
although  the  English  thus  won  the  day,  still  the 
Americans  were  far  from  being  disheartened. 

But  they  really  did  not  wish  a  long  and 
hard  war  with  England,  and  would  have  been 
very  glad  if  the  king  had  shown  any  signs  of 


THE   REVOLUTION.  353 

relenting ;  but  he  did  not,  and  they  determined 
to  fight  it  out.  An  army  of  twenty  thousand 
men  was  soon  gathered  around  Boston ;  George 
Washington,  one  of  the  heroes  of  the  French 
and  Indian  wars,  was  chosen  commander-in- 
chief  of  the  army,  and  war  really  began. 

Several  battles  were  fought ;  sometimes  the 
English  were  successful  and  sometimes  the  Am- 
ericans, and  the  end  seemed  as  far  off  as  ever. 

At  last  the  Americans,  seeing  that  King 
George  would  never  come  to  terms,  declared 
that  they  would  no  longer  submit  to  English 
rule  at  all ;  but  would  make  America  a  free 
country  and  govern  themselves.  For  although 
they  had  not  meant  to  do  this  in  the  beginning 
of  the  trouble,  they  now  saw  it  was  the  only 
thing  that  could  be  done.  Representatives  from 
all  parts  of  the  colonies  met  at  Philadelphia,  and 
there  drew  up  a  Declaration  of  Independence, 
in  which  they  explained  the  reasons  for  their 
action,  and  then  declared  that  the  American 
colonies  should  be  from  that  time  an  indepen- 
dent nation,  forever  free  from  English  govern- 
ment.    It  was  on  July  4,  i  'j'j^,  that  they  adopted 


354  THE   REVOLUTION. 

this  declaration ;  so  that  July  4th  has  been 
celebrated  ever  since  as  the  nation's  birthday. 
The  declaration  was  read  in  all  the  towns  amid 
ringing  of  bells  and  universal  rejoicing,  and 
thus  the  rebellion  of  the  colonies  aofainst  Eng-- 
land  became  a  revolution,  or  complete  change 
of  government.  More  troops  were  sent  from 
England,  and  the  colonies  prepared  for  a  long 
and  desperate  struggle. 

Volunteers  came  thronging  from  the  hills  of 
New  England,  the  valley  of  the  Hudson,  the 
plantations  of  Virginia,  and  the  rice-fields  of  the 
Carolinas  ;  the  colonists  had  found  out  that  there 
could  only  be  strength  in  union.  The  war  went 
on,  and  the  Americans  had  the  hardest  part  of 
the  struggle  still  to  come.  They  had  but  little 
money,  and  often  suffered  for  food  and  clothing. 

While  the  English  army  was  well  fed  and 
comfortably  clothed,  the  Americans,  in  winter- 
quarters  at  Valley  Forge,  went  hungry  and 
ragged,  leaving  the  prints  of  their  bleeding  feet 
on  the  snow,  and  encouraged  only  by  the  brave 
heart  of  Washington,  who,  amid  the  universal 
discouragement   still   kept   on    his    way,    calm, 


THE   REVOLUTION.  355 


resolute,  and  incapable  of  despair.  But  better 
days  dawned.  Robert  Morris,  of  Philadelphia, 
devoted  his  large  private  fortune  to  the  ex- 
penses of  the  army,  and  established  a  system 
of  credit  by  which  money  could  be  raised  for 
the  soldiers  ;  and  soon  after  there  was  a  great 
victory  at  Saratoga,  through  which  a  large  part 
of  the  English  army  under  General  Burgoyne 
had  to  surrender  to  the  Americans. 

The  battle  of  Saratoga  showed  the  nations 
of  Europe  that  America  was  likely  to  win  the 
day ;  and  France,  which  was  very  hostile  to 
England,  agreed  to  help  the  colonies  with  men 
and  money.  In  many  ways  the  cause  of  the 
colonists  gained  new  strength,  and  this  was  the 
turning-point  of  the  war.  From  this  time  the 
Americans  gained  courage  and  hope  as  one 
victory  followed  another,  and  finally,  on  Octo- 
ber 19,  1 781,  the  English  general,  Lord  Corn- 
wallis,  surrendered  his  army  to  Washington  at 
Yorktown,  Va.,  and  thus  ended  the  war. 

The  English  troops  were  called  home,  and 
articles  of  peace  between  England  and  the 
United  States  of  America  were  signed  at  Paris. 


:^ 


356  THE   REVOLUTION. 

The  United  States  chose  George  Washing- 
ton for  the  president  of  the  new  repubHc.  He 
was  inaugurated  April  30,  1789,  in  New  York, 
which  was  then  the  capital. 

The  Revolution  separated  us  forever  from 
England,  and  made  us,  politically,  an  indepen- 
dent nation.  But  it  could  not  break  the  ties  of 
race,  which  will  always  make  most  Americans 
feel  strongly  bound  to  the  mother  country. 

To-day  there  is  no  nation  on  earth  to  which 
America  turns  with  friendlier  eyes  than  Eng- 
land, which  gave  to  it  its  language,  its  laws, 
and  its  religion,  and  whose  brave  sons  crossed 
the  seas,  and  through  much  trouble  and  peril 
laid  the  foundations  of  this  great  new  country ; 
and,  in  spite  of  all  differences,  the  American 
and  Englishman  must  ever  feel  that  they  are 
both  descendants  of  the  brave  Norse  races  that 
crossed  the  Northern  seas  hundreds  of  years 
ago  to  choose  for  themselves  a  new  home  in 
England,  and  that  no  difference  of  time  or  place 
can  change  the  mark  of  race  that  proves  them 
brothers. 


fi  -  1950 


c^^ 


.^ 


^  ^   °  0  ^       <i>,  V     s-  ^   *  »  /       %  V      S-  ^'   '  "  ^     ^ 


<!5  9^ 


^'^..^^ 


''^^/>  K^^ 

V"^^ 


^^..^^ 


^  0^    - ,:  O' 

4  ^     '  wAm 


,p   o^ 


^^ 


=  %,<'''  : 


'':%      &r. 


,4  n. 


■^^d< 


.>>■" 


.4    ^ 


A  ^ 


'/A^wS; 


WW/  J 


k,. '" 


\V^  9x   ^0.  ^-^    xV"  9?  "^ 


,^^  ^^ 


^^.^i:;/''/-^^      oQ^oi:^''o%      0^^01:1:-.%      ^^ 


•■  \>     .   s  <■  o 


rO